ST UDENT S M A R ATH i GR A MM AR .

BY TH E

R EV GA N P A T R A O R A VA LK A N ,
. .

N
FE L L O W O F T H E B O M B A Y U N I V E R S I T Y .

T h o ug h i t wo u ld be a m i st ak e to at te m p t i n o ur e l e m e n t a ry s oh o o h to
re p la ce a n e m p i ri cal by a s c i e n t i fi c k now le dg e of G r am m ar, t hat e m p i r i ca l

k n ow l e d g e o f Gramm ar ou g h t i n t i m e to be rai sed t o a real rat i onal , an d .

f
sa i s y
t i n g k no w l edg e
.
—a
knowle d g e not o nl y o f fac ts , bu t of reaso ns ; a
k no w le dg e tha t te ach es u s no t o nly wh a t G r a m mar i s, but how i t c a me to be
wh a t i t i s
.
— M aw M u ll er .

T H I R D EDI T I O N (R E VI S E D A ND EN L A R G ED) .

B o m b ay

P R I N T ED A T T HE

EDUCA T I ON S OC I ET Y S P R ES S , BY C ULL A
"
’

1 294 a
(A l l ri g hts re s e r v e d . )
 P R EFA C E T 0 T H E SEC ON D EDI T I ON .

T ms is an d enlarg ed e di ti on of the ST UDEN r

’
a ne w '
s

M A N UA L o r M A R Arai
'
GR A M M A R , desi g ned e q
u all
y for be i n
g
n e rs an d a dvan ced s t u den ts . T h e for mer are advi sed to pas s
o ver th e N otes, pri nte d i n s mal l ty pe, as well as th e po rt i on s i n

th e text wh i ch are s peci fi ed as u se ful at an advanced s tag e of

s t u dy . I have g i ve n cOpi ou s exp la nati o n s, n ot sel dom ven tur

i n g to c fler a ra ti o nal e o f th e fac ts o r fo r ms di s cus se d, as i n

tel l i ge nt den ts, i n th ese days ,

s tu are e xpe cted to k now m ore
t han what i s m erely e leme ntary an d
p racti ca l . I have al s o

e n deavou red to dete rm i ne th e e xact for m an d s ens e of e ver

y
g ram mati cal word an d
i nflecti on ; an d the val ue of defi ni te
O p i n i ons o n the se p oi n ts can be tru l
y e sti m ate d o n l b
y y th o s e

wh o q
are ac d
uai nte
w i th th e
pres e n t
p ai n ful s tate of u n ce rtai n ty
a n d do u bt th at g en e ral ly prevai l s I h ave, moreove r, a ttem pt
.

e d to s i m pli fy and sy s te m ati se se ve ral di fli cul t departme n ts o f

M i g ramm ar I wou ld speci ally ci te,

ar at h . by way of example ,
th e Declensi on of N ou ns T he n um ber of . the Declen si o ns has
bee n redu ced f ro m si x or s e ve n t o three, if n o t absol u tel
y t o

on e , whi le a most si mpl e m etho d of de ri vi ng the cru de -

fo rm
h as bee n s ug g es te d B y the ai d of
t wo pro no mi n al l e tters an
y
.

M ar ath i n ou n co ul d he decli ne d wi th abs ol u te certai nty F o r .

th i s an d other i mpo r tant i n my book ,

chang es I am i n debted
ch i efly to th e C om m /ra ti os Gr ammar of B oer . a work whi ch i s
n ot m o re val u able fo r what i t e xpl i ci tly teach e s tha n fo r what
it ob scu r ely s ug g es ts . I t i s by a s tu dy o f th i s wo n derful work
that I h ave bee n l ed to look fo r s om ethi ng deeper, tru er, and

more Spi ri tual i n W ords than what thei r e xternal for m r e veals,
an d i t i s u nder i ts g ui dance that, I beli eve , I h ave attai ne d,
th ou g h b ut i m perfectly , to the hi dden l i fe o f so me o f th e
M ar at hi words an d i nflecti ons . I n deed, there i s n o thi n
g arbi

trary an d con ve nti onal i n lang uag e : ever

y for m o f i t i s i nsti nct
wi th li fe a nd re ason . P ani ni m ay be s a i d to h a ve
g i v e n it a
 P R EFA C E .

bo dy of erfe ct beau ty and sy mm e tr bu t B opp has th e h ono ur

p
o f havi n g co m m u ni cate d to i t th e breath o f l i fe !
T he s ecti on s on th e I nh erent at , the A ccent , th e C omp o u nd
Ve rbs , & c .
,
m ay be g re
q
arded as ui te n e w an d o ri g i n al , whi le
th e ch apters on Etym ol og y , th o u g h they can no t cl ai m m uch
ori g i n ali ty, fai l to prove i nteresti ng
wi ll n ot T h ey have been .

wri tte n c h i e fly w i th t h e ai d o f Dr M um ’
s S a ns k r i t T exts , .

w P é i t P rakés a, an d M r Em ma s Oom
’
k
’
P rofe s s or C o nL s r r .

I -
the nd A ry an Vem a cu lars Very val u
p ar a ti ve Gr am mar o f o .

a bl e i nfo rmati o n o n th e M ar ath i i di o ms h as bee n deri ved from

th e work s of M OLE SW O R T H , C A N D Y an d S T EV EN S ON .

B esi des th e wor k s I have pro fi tably cons ulte d

c i te d abo ve ,

m any oth er s, am o ng whi ch I w o ul d me nti on wi th pro mi ne n ce

th m i l l w i ti n s f P f M A X M ii LL ER an d W H I T N EY ,
e s ce a n e o u s r g o r o s .

resen ti n g as th ey do , the res ul ts of th e m o de rn ph i lol og i cal

p ,

i n ves ti g ati o ns , i n a si m ple an d attracti ve for m , l i t u

p w i th
o ri i n al obser vati on s of g r e at beau ty an d force , as well as th e
g
M ar at h i Gram mars of my p er s on al fr i en ds, M essr s .

DA DOB A an d GOD B O L E, t o g e t her w i th th e H i ndi and Urdu

G ram mars of th e R e v . W ET H ER I N GT O N
. an d P ro f DOW S ON
. .

I p ray that th e Di vi ne blessi ng m ay res t u

pon thi s h u m ble
e ffo rt t o ben efi t s tu de n ts .

P R EFA C E T O T H E T H I R D EDI T I ON .

Som e p orti ons o f thi s book h ave be en re -

wri tte n an d a at
g r e

deal of ne w matter h as been adde d, whi ch, I tr us t, wi l l enh ance

i ts u ti li t
y an d i m p o rtan ce .

3“ Every form of declensi on and co nj ugati o n, every g eni ti ve, and e very
so - call ed i n fi n i ti ve and g erun d i s th e res ult o f a l o ng s ucces si o n o f efforts
an d o f i ntel li ent effor ts T h re i s not hi n
g a c c id e n ta l n o t h i n i la
g e .
, g rr egu r ,

nothi ng wi th out a u
p p r o s e a n d m e an i ng i n a n p art o f G ree k o r L at i n
y
g ra m m a r N. o o n e w h o h as o nce d i s co ve re d th i s h i dd en l i fe o f l an u a
g ge, no
one who has o nce fou nd o u t that what see m ed to be merely ano mal o us and

whi msi cal i n lang u ag e i s but, as i t were, a pe tri facti o n of t houg h t, of dee p,
c u ri ous , poe ti cal, p h i los o phi cal th ough t , wul l ever rest a s i n ti ll h e h as
descended as far as h e can de scend i nto the anci ent sh afts of u man speech ,
e xplori ng l e vel after le vel , and te st i ng e very su cces si ve fo u ndati on whi ch
— M
su pports t he s u rface o f each S pok en lang uage aw M u l ler .
 TABLE OF CONTENTS .

PA R T I .

Orth og rap h y . PA GE

C H A PT ER I .
— L etters thei r F or ms a nd S ounds , l 14 1
C H A PT ER I I .
— T he N a ture f
o the L etter s 9
1 . T he Vowel s , 15 20 9
2 . T he C onsonants, 21 28 12
[ IL — T he P owers o
f the L etters 15
l . Syll abi flcati on , § 29 32 .

2 . Syll abi c P ron unci ati on 33 , 39

1
( ) T h e I nh ere n t at ,

( )
2 T h e A n u svara , 38
3
( ) T h e A cce nt, 39
3 . R ules on Spelli n g , 40

E ty mol og y .

CH A PT ER IV .
— T he C lassi fi ca ti on an d I nfla ti on f
o Words

G en e r al Observati on s, 4] 53
Ge nder, § 48 5]
N u mber, 52 53

C H A PT ER V .
— T he S u bstan ti ve
T he Di vi si on of Substanti ves, § 5 4
2 . T h e Gende r of Su bstanti ves, 6 0 69
.(l ) T h e D e t e rm i na ti on of th e Ge n d er by
th e fo rm of th e Substanti ves , 6 1
2
( ) yB th e S i g n i fi ca t i on of th e S u bst an

m
ti y es , § 62 63
( )
3 T h e Deri vati on of the Gender For s,

64 69 .

CH A PT R R VI . N u mbers
- o
f S u bstan ti ves, 70 7 l
C H A P T ER VI I .
-
C a ses of S u bs ta nti ves
T h e En umerati on of th e C ases, 72 83 .

T able of th e C ase -
T e rmi n ati ons, {
s 84 85 .
 C ON T EN T S .

PA G E

C H A PT ER VI I I .
— Deelensrbn f Sou bs tanti ves

Decle nsi ons en um erate d an d explai n e d,

87 1 00
C H A PT ER I X .
— Declensi om - con ti nu e d .

T h e fi rst Decl en si on , 1 01
T he Se con d Decle nsi on , 1 04 1 07
T he T hi rd De clen si on, 1 08 1 11
C H A P T ER X .
— T he A dj ecti ve
T he A dj e cti ve of Q u ali t
y, 1 12 118
T he A dj ecti ve of N u m be r , 1 19 149
1 . T he C ardi n al N u me ral s, 1 20 13a
2 . T h e Or di n al N u m e ral s, 13 6 138
3 . T h e M ulti pli cati ves, 1 39 14 0
4 . T he Fracti o nals , 14 1 14 7
5 . T h e Di stri bu ti ve s , 14 8
6 . T he I ndefi n i te s , § 1 4 9
C H A PT ER XI T he P ronou n s
.
—

En um erati on of th e P ron ouns , 1 50 1 52 .

1 T he P e rs ona l P ronou n s ,
. l 53
2 . T he I n defi ni te P ers onal P ron oun ,
1 59
3 . T h e R elati ve P ro ii ouns, 1 62 1 65
4 . T h e Dem on s trati ve Pro no uns, 1 66
1 72
5 . T he I n ter rog ati ve P ronou ns, 1 73
1 76
6 . T he I n defi ni te P ronoun s, 1 77

C H A P T ER XI I .
— T he Ver bs
T he C lassi fi cati on of th e Ver b, 1 78 1 87 .

C H A P T ER X II I .
— T he I nfi ecti on of Ver bs

G e neral Obse r vati o ns, 1 88 1 92

1 T he . T en se s , 1 93 199
2 T he . M oo ds, 200 205
3 T he . P ray og as , § 206 21 2
4 T he . P ar ti ci p l e s an d th e V erbal N ouns
21 3 21 5
 C ON T ENT S . vi i

P A GE

C H A PT ER X l V . Conj ug a ti on
C lassi fi cati on Of th e C onj ug ati ons an d P a ra
di g m s, § 21 7 2 22

C H A P TE R XV .
-C onj ugati on —
'
con ti n ue d .

1 . C au sal V erbs, § 223 23 2

2 . P oten ti al Verbs , 23 3 23 8
3 . A n o m al o us Ve rbs , 23 9
4 . I rre g u lar V erbs, 24 1 24 2

C H A P TE R X V I .
— T he A u xi l i ary Ver bs
Gen eral Observati ons, 24 3 25 1
1 . T he S ubstan ti ve V er bs, 25 2
2 . T h e Ve rb ai , 25 6
3 . N eg ati ve F orms, 25 7

C H A PT E R X VI I .
— A u zi li ar y Ver bs *
con ti n u e d .

T h e M odal V erbs, 25 8 28 5
1 . T he Ve rb W A 25 9 26 6
2 . T he V e rb was} , 26 7 26 9
6 . T he V erb arrfi , § 27o 27 6
4 . T h e Ve rb m a 2 7 4 278
5 . T he V erb T i ,
279 286

C H A PT E R XVI I .
- Oompou nd Ver bs
G e ne ral Obse r vati on s, 28 7 29 1
T h e N om i na l s , 292 3 00
T h e V erbal C ompou n ds, 3 0]
1 . T h e P oten ti al s, 3 02
2 . T he P assi ves, § 3 03 3 05
3 . T h e I n te n s i v e s , § 3 06 3 07
4 T he C o nti n uati ves an d F re q
uen ti ves,

3 08
u
g T h e Desi derati ves, 3 09
T he I ncepti ves , § 3 10
s
o

q T he P e rmi ss i ves, 311

o
o T h e O bli g ati o nals , 3 12
vi i i C O N T EN T S .

PA G E
C H A P T ER X VI I T he Comp ound T enses
—

Ge neral Observati ons, 3 1 3 318

T he I ndi cati ve M ood, 3 18 3 21
T he C on di ti o nal M oo d, 3 22 3 25
T he S u bj u ncti ve M o od, 3 26 3 29
T he P ar ti ci pl es , 33 0
CH A P T ER XVII I .
— P aradi gmas f
o Ver bs
T h e P aradi g m , 3 3 3 2
“

Fi rst C onjug ati on

Second C onj ug ati on
C H A PT ER X I X T he P ar ti cl es
—

T he A dve rb 335 34 8 ,

T he P o stposi ti on , 349 3 55
T he C onj u ncti o n, 3 56 3 57
T h e I nterj e cti on, 3 58 360
PA R T I I .

C H A PT ER XX T he Ori gi n an d Go l l tposi /i o u of
.
—

Ge ne ral O bse r va ti o n s, 3 61 3 67 208

I .
— T h e C han g e s of S an sk ri t Wo rds
1 . T h e V o wel C han g e s, 3 68 369 21 1
2 .
-
Si mple C o ns onant C h ang e s , 3 70 21 2
3 . T h e C om p o un d C on son ant C hang e s ,
3 71 3 77 21 3
IL — I n flecti onal C hang es, 3 73 21 5
III .
~ — T he Desaj W ords, 3 74 21 6
IV .
— T he C h an
g es o f P rak ri t W or ds , 3 75
V .
—
C lassi fi cati on of the e le men ts whi ch
co m
p i
r se M arathi , § 3 78 21 9
VL — T he M arath i R oots, 3 80 — 3 81 22 1

C H A P T ER X X L — T he P ri nci p les o
f M ar a thi Deri vati on
Gen e ral Observat i on s, 3 82 3 84
I .
-
P ri mary Der i vati ve s
1 . T h e C ausal Ve rb, 3 86 3 98 2 28 —

2 . T he P o te nti al V e rb, 3 9 9 4 0 1 23 1
—
 PA GE

II . Secon dary Deri vati ves

P re fi xes, 4 03 4 05
S u fli xes, § 4 06 4 14
II I .
— T he R edupli cati ves, 4 15 431

CH A P T ER XXI I —
P r i ncip les of D er i vati on — conti nu ed .

IV .
— C o mpounds
General Obser vati on s, 43 2 436
1 Su bstanti ve C ompou nds,
. 4 37

(1 ) Dete rm i nati ve C om po u n ds , 438 440

()
2 C op u l ati ve C om p ou n ds , 4 4 1
2 . A dj ecti ve C ompou nds, 443 446
3 . A dverbi al C ompou n ds, 447 44 8
II .
— Obscure C ompo unds, 4 49 4 50
III .
— A p paren t C ompou n ds , § 4 51

C H A P T ER XXI I I — T he P erm u tati on f

o L etters (at? )
G eneral Obser vati on s, 4 52 4 53
1 . T h e C ombi nati on of V owel s, 4 54 4 55 .

2 . T he C ombi n ati on of C on sonants, § 4 56

4 60 s o .

3 . T he A nu svara, 461
4 . Th e V i sarga, § 4 62

PA R T II I .

CH A P T ER XX IV — R u les of C oncordance
1 . T he arran
g m en t
e Of words i n to Sen tences ,
§ 4 63 51 ]
2 . T he v ari eti e s Of t he S ubj ect, 4 77 479
3 . T h e C as e of the Su bj ect , 4 80 4 81
4 . T he R elati on of the N omi nati ve to the
V erb, 4 82 4 85
5 . T wo or m ore N omi n ati ves, 4 86
6 . T h e Obj ect, 4 87
7 . T wo Obj ects, 4 95 5 08
8 . T he Obj ect bei n g a Sentence, 509 51 1 .
X C ONTENT S.

P A G E.

C H A P T ER X XV — T he A ttri bu te
T he A dj e cti ve , 51 2 53 0
1 . R u le s on C o ncordanc e, 51 6
2 . R u les on C ompari so n,
3 . A pposi ti on , 53 1

C H A PT ER XX V I .
— P ronouns
1 . P ersonal P ronoun s, 53 2 53 7
2 . T he I ndefi ni te P e rs onal P ro no un ,
54 8
3 . R elati ve P r onoun s , 54 9 5 56
4 . Demonstrati ve P ron ou ns, 55 7 5 70
5 . I nterrog ati ve P ro nou ns, 57 1 5 77°

6 . I ndefi ni te P ron ou ns , 5 78 5 82

C H A PT ER XXVI I .
— T he Uses f
o the C ases
1 . T h e N om i n ati ve C ase, 5 83
2 . T he A ccu sati ve C ase , 5 84 5 85
3 . T he I nstr um e n tal C as e , 5 86
4 . T he Dati ve C ase, 5 88
5 . T he A blati ve C a se, 5 89
6 . T he Gen i ti ve C ase, 5 90 5 92
7 . T he L ocati ve C ase , 5 93

C H A PT ER -
XXV I I I P ostposi ti ons governi ng
. the C as es
1 . T he I n s tr u m e ntal C ase, 5 96
2 . T he Dati ve C ase , 59 7
3 . T h e A blat i ve C ase , 59 8
4 . T he L ocati ve C ase , 5 99

C H A P T ER XXI X . Uses of the T en ses

T he I ndi cati ve M o od
1 . T he P resent T en se , 6 02 6 07
2 . T h e P ast T en se , 6 08 615
3 . T he F uture T e nse , 61 6 6 21
T he C ondi ti on al M ood, 6 22 6 28
T he S ubj u ncti ve M o od, 6 29 63 1
T he I mperati ve M ood, 63 2 63 3
T he I nfi ni ti ve M ood, 63 4 63 8
 xi

T he P arti ci ples, 63 9 64 2
T he G erund, 64 3
T he S upi ne s, 644
C H A P T ER XXX . T he P ar ti cles
T h e A dverb, 65 1 — 6 56 351
T h e P ostposi ti on, 657 6 59
T he C onj uncti on , 6 60 6 76 353
2 3 53
.

1 T h e C opul ati ve S entence s,

. 6 60 66 .

2 T he Di sj uncti ve S en tences ,
. 35 5
3 T he A dversati ve Sentences,
. 664 6 66 . 3 55
4 . T he C ausati ve Sentences, 667 668 . 3 57
5 . T he C ondi ti onal Senten ces, 669 3 57
T he I n terj ecti on , 6 78 6 82 3 60

PA R T IV .

P r oso d y .

CH A PT E R XXX I . fi lm P ri ncip les o

f Versifi ca ti on , 68 3
$ 6 9 4
CH A PT E R XXX II T he Va r i eti es f M a r a thi Vers ifi ca ti n

o
. o

CH A PT ER XXX II I .
— T he P ecu li ar P oeti cal F orms, 7 07
§ 7l8

A P P EN DI X .

N ote (A ) - T he M odi C har acters

.

N ote (B )
°
— P ars zng
.
 '

STUDENT S MA R ATH I GR AMMAR .

C H AP T ER I .

Orth ograp h y .
m .

L ET T ER S : T H EIR FOR M S A N D S OUN DS .

1 14 .

1 T H E M arathi al
h a b et, a s p op ularly g i ve n, consi sts o f
.
p
-
fi fty two le tte rs, on ly fi ft f w h i h re resent di sti nc t ori i nal
y o c p g
so u n ds .

2 . T h e le tter s are methodi cally enu merated i n the al phabe t ,

th e Vo we ls ( a t bei ng g i ve n fi rst, an d ne xt th e C onso

n an ts dsfi
r

T H E VOW EL S .

s fi o, a fi a u, s i m mr e : ah .

N ote . — T he sounds re
presen ted by at am and a: . ah are conson ants,

but i v alon wi th th vowels as they are al ways used wi th

are g en
g e

t he m. Sect 9 . .

'

T H E C ON S ON A N T S .

a: h k h h i k 3 hh a j {I j h “

, (a
H r a a
, fl H
a a a a 3 v a a a c a ’
g , g , , , , , ,

3 1 na, a ta}; a tha, e da , a fi l m, o r n o , a ta , 7: tha, e

'

r da , u d ha,

(7
p ,
a cl.
p h a , a t ba ,
“
3 ; b ha , H a na , a a
y , r t a ,
a l a ,
27 a m ,

i f M , W s ha, tr s a , g ha , as l
a, t ks ha , g dnya
a

N e ssa —QT hel m and a dnya are compou nd con sonan ts and do n ot
re resen t ori i nal si m le sounds b t th i n d a pl ace i n the
p g p u ey a re a ss g e

alphabet onl th n t d b eculi ar fo rms

y as ey are represe e y p .

1 m
 8] FOR M S A N D SOUN DS OP T H E L ET T ER S .

T H E S EM I -
V OC A L S .

1
( ) P a rti a l ly Open , or Li q
ui ds —
H ya, 1: r a , a l a , H ca .

N ata — T hese semi - vocals are cal led 3 i azm ( o r th ose h ol di ng a ~

m i ddle place ) by th e S anskri t G rammari ans as they stand betwee n

t he M u tes and the P arti al ly C l osed co nsonants. T h ey are, also ,

de no mi nated L i q
ui ds, as they h ave a sm ooth and flowi ng so u nd, an d

e asi l uni te wi th th e ot her letters

y .

2
( ) P i lly C losed,
ar t a or Si bi lan ts .
—
n éa , H s ha , fl ea, g ha .

N ol a —
T hese are called 33 3 o r si bi lantS — hei ng uttered wi th a

h i ssi ng sound.

7 . T he mu te s are fu rther arran g ed i n th e ph

alabe t i nto

fi ve classe s acco rdi ng to th e org ans or

p ar ts o f th e m o nth

w hi ch affect thei r u tte rance . T ho org an s p or arts Of th e

m ou th R IT ?
E are fi ve, an d th ey are the throat, the p alate, the

f f
r oo th e o
p a la te, the teeth an d the l i s
p . We g i ve bel o w th e

fi ve org ani c classe s Of th e M u tes :

1 . Gu ttura ls or Ef“ f ! th roat s ou n ds Eh

'

ha, (H Icha,
tr a
g , H g ha , g r ha .

2 P alata ls am en
( l t so un ds
) : 21 ak a , 3 hha ,
“
. or
p a a e c

ST j a, fi j ha , i t na .

3 . Li ngua ls or
T i -
aH ( pp
t
“

o -alate so u n ds ) a t a, 3

h
t ,
a 3 l
( a, a h
d , g
a H t a .

4 . Denta ls or Ha t ( teeth so un ds ) : H ta , 2! tha , H (l a,

H d ha , H na .

5 . L abi a ls Sh aw ( l i p s o u n ds ) r pa ,
t q
. p ha
‘
, H ha , H
bha, H ma .

8 . In each of the abo ve fi ve classes of th e m u tes t h e letters

are di sti ng ui sh ed S onan ts (HTHH H ) , A sp i r ates
as S aras
’

(m m ), N on -
a s
p i r a tes (
W ) ,
an d N as a ls T h e W .

fi rs t two let ters are su rds, and the last th ree s on an ts T he .

fi r s t s urd an d th e fi rst sonant are u naspi rated ; the second surd

an d th e secon d sonan t are as pi rate d ; and the last sonant is a

n a sal . T h us
4 FOR M S A N D S OUN DS OR THE L ET TER S . 9

M u tes (n
I ?
Sonant .

Unaspi rat e . A s pi rat e . Un aspi ra t a l A spi rat e . N asal .

N ote — In nci ng the surds SI HIH voi celess the breat h is

'
.
pronou

th e voi ce,
q
'

si m ply u sed, bu t not but i n u tteri n

g the sonants Hi H H
'

voi ced t he vo i ce is used T he i

.
p rates
as W s tro ng

breaths are o nounced wi th an audi ble breath as h T he n asal s

pr

rg-
.

e 1m -
co nasal or nasali sed ) are u ttered through both the nose
and t he mo uth si mu l taneou sly . T he u nas
pi rated l etters are W
weak breath s

9 . Of th e letters ofp hth e

ab e t wh al
i ch are n ot i n cl u ded i n

the above detai ls Of cl as si fi cati o n ar e the Si , an, as. Q? and i t .

T he dot i is call e d the A u u s vri r, an d i t mark s

( )
a o ver S a

u re ly n asal so un d uttered exclu si vely thro ug h the n ose li k e

p
the u i n the Fren ch wor d bou , un modifi ed by the or
gan s of the
mou th I t i s p ut o n a vo wel, an d uttered
. after it . T he pu rely
n asal soun d of the A n u sva r i s call ed m or n asal, and

th e modi fi ed nasal sou n d is cal le d 3 11 m ( S e ct . 8

T he t wo dots by th e S i de of at : are calle d th e Vi sarga ,

b
( )
an d th ey are p u t by th e S i de o f a vowel to expre ss a s tro ng

aspi rate Th e Vi sarg a i s s ai d to be produ ced enti rely i n th e

.

ch e s t, u n modi fi ed by the o rg ans of the mouth . I t belon g s to

th e cl ass of th e si bi lan ts .

()
c T he 68 l a, is a m odi fi cati on of H la, an d does not occur

i n S an sk ri t, except in som e pas sa s f the Ve da s, where i t i s

g e o

u sed for H d a. I t belon g s to th e class of the li ng uals .

 1 5] N A T UR E or r ns L ETT ER S . 9

8
( l Th e letter ( I éa i s a palatal , and belong s to th e class o f

i t c h a, g a la/1 a ,
& c sr s h a ,
. a l i n
g ual, belon i
g gn to t he clas s of

g t a
'

, a
.
i m
r , &c ; an d a sa a de ntal, ag reei ng wi th the clas s o f
.

a t a , u t k a ,
& c T h e fu l l so u n d
. o f e ac h of th es e s i bi l an ts co ul d
be m as te re d by att e m pt i ng t o u tt e r th em al o ng wi th the class

o f l etters to wh i ch they bel on g ; th u s,

a ak a , 3 chhafi r a,j qj , n
h a é a .

a ta , 8 M a, a d d . 8 d/za , q sk a ,
’4 t ha, d dl
'

a t a , Q
’
a
,
2: za fi s
r sa .

()
9 T h e l e tter as la , whi ch belon g s to th e class of the
l i n g u als , h as n o cor respo n di ng so und i n Eng li sh I t never .

be g i n s a word i n M arath i an d is u s uall

y substi tu te d for th e 8

la of San sk ri t words . I n C anarese an d the othe r Dravi di an

lan g uage s , i t i s fre ely i n terchang ed wi th Q (la and tr ig a .

T he a( )
t1[0
cal m an d a dnya are n o t wr i t te n as o th e r co m
o un d con son an ts are , but have each a pe cul i ar for m , on
p
w h i ch accou nt they are assi g n e d a l ce i n the A lph abet, an d
p a

g i ve n i n th e di cti onari es as i n dependen t letters T h e QT i s .

co m s ed of a. l q a an d m b w sk a ,
i tt an d
a k slza
“

po a e r e n as a
g r
y ,

an d als o ron o un ce d as s uch ; b u t a du /a, wh i ch i s com osed o f

p g p
sl j a an d at ri a , may be wri tten
a, bu t n ot ronou n ce d
'

p as

a s s uch i n M arath i , t ho u h i t as su mes th e sound i n San sk ri t

g .

I n M arathi i t i s p ron ou n ced as dny a, as i f i t was composed

o f Q da na an d a y a I n G uj arati i t h as th e sou n d of
.

n
g y a , and i n H i n di o f
gy a as a , j ii a nobé — M D ny dnoba m .

G . G ny é n o ba, and H . Gy én obd .

C H A P T ER II .

On th e N atu re of th e L etters;
1 . T H E V OW EL S .

s 1 5 28 .

15 . T he vowels are si mp le sou nds , whi ch can be u ttered

by the mselves wi thou t the ai d of oth er letters . T h ey are in

all fo ur te en i n n u mber .

2m
 POWE R S or r an L ETT ER S . 32

a ta, ET té . fe ti , a ti 5 tu a ma é ta i fr to. a tau

“

. , , .

-
. . . . . . . .

N ote T h e vo wels w gz ‘ 1 5 a i d m I, m h m di
'

E : t an f a s e t o
'
. , s u ese , ,

fi ed f orms respecti vely

, aw
E
N a
at — T he follo wi ng i s an exampl e o f a: be i n co mbi nati on wi th
i t, i t. i t and a:
kri , kr i ,
’

a H i, i kl z
;
g .

N ote —
{l é i s Opti onall chan ed to “
t combi nati on wi th the
y g
v owel s ; as g; or
3 i n.

32 . T he M arathi s de no mi nate the tabl es of syllabi fi cati on

arm 3 67 5 7671 0 4 31 “ W W -
twelve lettered
”
ro ws , )
and to mak e the nu mbe r the A n us
”
up twe l ve i n each ro w,

vl i m and the Vi sarga are added 1 mm and at : leak tom

”

. as i f; 3

an d a: ta h H ere i s B é ré k had z wi th i ts compl ete nu mber

’

. a

of twelve syllabl es

m yé fi r gi fi t at 1!en fr 98 . i t ge t H ? 9 0. fi
“

V 9a . . , . 1 t

ya w,
i f 9am, 1 1 0.
g ah .

SY LL A BI C P R ON UN C I A T I ON .

33 . T he lette rs or syll abl es whi ch co mpos e a M arathi

word are not all m way S o me
ronou nced in a u ni for u lly
p . are
f
s o u nded, so me i mperfectly, and s o me others orci bl
f y .

l lable, compos ed o at a, m a f
1 .
y A s
f y, or m ay n o t, be ully
s o un de d ; 1711 11 8 , 65 66 ? a flo ck -
lea l ap th e last letter tr i s
i mperfectly u ttered, mak i ng as i t were a di ssyllabi c word,
whi l e a; and as are fu lly soun ded .

2 . Wh en a syllabl e
f by a Viis
s ar g ,
a nasa li sed, or i s ollowed

or by a comloouml letter, i t i s fo rci bly pron ou nced, or, i n other

words , a ccented : as si n a body g

‘
d i n : fi rzafl t c on te m p t
dhi h-
kti r ; ql fi rm h
g t t
'

a .

§ H34
en ce t
.h e l aws of M ara t h i s y l lab i c pro n u nc i ati on

apply to —
( )
l th e I nh e ren t at , ( )
2 th e A n u sv ara , ( )
3 t h e

Vi sarg a, and (4 ) the C ompo un d letters .

Obs — M ost of these l aws of syllabi c ronunci ati on have been

p
announced for the fi rst t i me, but they are most useful, and a l
pp y to
 rowans or T H E L s rrs as
'
. 36 »

Nots .
-T h ese rules, so i mportant i n reference to M ari thi and th e

other I ndi an vernacul ars, do not apply to Sans kr i t , i n whi ch every

let e
t r i s f ll
u y u ttered u nless a vi r dma be su bscri be d at th e foo t of it ;

as i t a god : -
Sk de va ( but i n M arath i z d -
e v
.

-
Obo I n t he Dalt han
.
, every i nhe rent 3 1 i s fully sounded, and e ven
the educated cl asset
, u nless they h ave long res i ded i n P oo na and i ts
d- i
vi ci ni ty, are p rone to do the same t hus, M , a co verl et z y o l
g
( but i n the D k
a h n
a —
g o -
da -
di

( )
2 T he A nusvci ra .

36 . T he A nu svara , i n re
g ard to i ts p ro nu n c i at i o n , has
o th er cu li ari ti e s besi des th ose of th e acce nt, and we sh al l treat
pe

of the fo rme r, befo re we co ns i der th e l atter ch aracteri sti cs .

37 ,
T he A n us vara i s a co nve ni e n t si
g n for th e nasal

sou n ds i n the lan g u ag e , whi ch are of fo ur k i nds . T hey are th e

Organi c, the N (i si l ya, the P rovi n ci a l, '

an d th e C las si cal .

1 . W hen th e A i ra i s
n us vz p ro no unced l i ke an y of the nasals

g r
, q ,
o
r, a, and tr, re pre s e n ti n g th e fi ve orga ns of s pee ch

it is sai d to h ave an Org a ni sou n d are th e throat= m

[can‘t/t s tat a. fi g u re mi l
at
!
e
.

2 . When the A n usvara

i s si mply pron ou nce d thro ug h th e
nose, wi th o u t g i vi ng i t any o r g an i c s o u nd, as i n the F re nch

word bo n, i t i s sai d to be a N é si leya or a

p ure n asal m .

T hi s i s the ori g i nal an d p r i n ci al s und of the A n us vara, and

p o

may be o
pti onally represented by th i s mark as s i '
s s h dads,
barley .

N ote — T he N as i kya i s us ually omi tted i n the Dakhan, and when

it is consi dered necessary to prono unce it di sti nctly, ch i efl
y in
ho nori fi c fo rms, i t is c hanged, even by the hi gher clas ses, to the
den tal a; t ai n t tyii la to “ ’
them , erroneously t am tg a-n-lci .

3 . When the A nusvhra ass umes t he so u nd o f no, a M aréthi

substi tuti on for the S ansk ri t 11 , i t i s sai d to be provi nci al as

am pro tec ti o n , i s sanvr a ks h ta

ar .

4 . W hen the A nusvéra , i n p ure ly Sa n

assk ri t words ,
doubles

the letter whi c h follows i t, assu mi n g , at the same ti me, a wea

k ened nasali sed so und , it is sai d to be classi ca l as di l
' ‘
lr

j uncti on w
hi m sa g y g
o a .
 c u ssl rl oar z
o n or Wonns . 39

m rotecti o n sa nvra lt s ha na .
’

a p
m a dou bt sa
g s e aya .

{fart the w o rl d s anrsér a .

massacre
f
fli rt sane In r a
‘

( )
2 T he A n u s v i ra follo we d by at ya, 8 la, a! va , tak e "

g
the classi cal so und. i . s. , i t do u bl es th e le tters, a , a , an d er,
g i vi n
g th e m a s li g htly n asali se d sou nd 30 4)
H eft" j u ncti on a
w it r
e sa y
y g
o a .

W co nnec t i o n
-
{fi n sr sa l l ag na .

m co nversati o n «i n ; sa vva da .

N ote . B esi des the fi v

e nas a l le tters, t he re are sti l l three nasali s ed
l etters, the q , a: and q , or i ; 53 and i , y ,
, l n, whi ch are u sed t o
re
present fi nal a m, i f fo llo wed by a n i nti nl (
a
ahl m v. and
‘

m odi fi ed by the pron unci ati on of these three semi - M

'

vo wel s .
— aw

M ti ll er
'

N otc . T he ca l v co nsonants w hi ch have no corres pondi ng n asal s

q q q
"
we 1; r , a s. 3 15, s, li .
—
llI a c ll I il ller
.
.

T he A ccen t.

39 . I n M arathi every w ord i s u ttered in an e ve n tone, th e

i n i t i all labl e bei n alon e, i n th e e ffor t of u tteran ce , s l i g htly
y g s

r ai se d above the o th er s ; bu t accent, i n the sen se of i ncreased

force, as i n E ng li s h , i s fo r ei g n t o M arat h i , excep t i n the three

fol l owi n g i nstan ce s

1 . When letter i s follo wed by a com po und le tte r, i t i s

a

acce n te d as a? g hatt, fo rci bly ; m palrlta , co mplete B ut the .

acce nt m ay be ei th e r wea k, s tron I f t he co m ound

or
g .
p
l etter i s co m ose d of s tro ng l e tte rs th e acce n t is
p
s tro n , but i f o f weak le tte r s , i t i s weak T h us ,
g .

I —
S tr o ng it ! a swo rd ; W w o rd W devotee gfi fi
'

. a a

s al vati on .

M i aed : 35
II
W brace le t ; W beak ; a ! the m oo n W
—
a
:
.
, a

mar ri ag e d) ; gm boo k ; am?a r oad ?a se rpent

83 5 a
a
51 y a ; t
,

W t ru th ; W wi ne .

III .
:
— Wea lt 31W o the r a
; r m a de s e r t a
; g
o
} an e ar

K ri s h na ai d th e ft ; I fii w
p r i ce .
$ 52] GENDER or sUBsrA N n vs s .
'
25

N ote . T he characteri sti c of the n oun i s the -

case endi ng, as that
of the verb i s th e personal endi ng ~
. C ase and number are to the noun
what person and number are t o t he verb, fi tti ng i t to enter i nto
defi ni te relati o n wi th anythi ng , &c Whi tney . .

§ 48 . I .
— Gender i s a di fference i n words, or thei r i n
flecti ons, i ndi cati ng t h e di sti ncti on of s e x flaw wheth er, real ly

exi sti n
g o r i ma i n ed to e xi st i n
g o b e cts ;
j m a man , («
fl a

woman ; e fizr a h orse shi t a mare ; (Qu a lamp, m . fi a a

wall, f .

49 . II . N umber i s a di ffere nce i n th e i nflecti on of words,

denoti ng wh ether th e o b ec tj is on e, or many ; m a ch i ld,

a
n ? ch i l dre n m wo man , arm
a wo men .

50 . T h ere are th ree g enders i n M aréth i , vi z . the M ascu

li ne graw, the F emi n i n e Gflfi
N
' ‘
t r, an d the N euter 3i g m .

51T h e M as cul i n e g en der den ote s obj ects of the mal e

.

k i nd ; th e Femi ni n e, obj ects of the fe male k i n d ; an d th e

Neuter, obj ects whi ch are n ei th e r mal e nor fe mal e T h u s, .

mascul i ne an father, femi ni ne 3 11 i moth er, n eu ter i n:

“
a a

a hou se .

N ote — I t i s but natural t hat l i vi ng bei ngs should be consi dered as

male or female, but i n M i
arrthi , as i n S an skri t and al l i ts offshoots,
thi s di sti ncti on of sex belongs even to i nani mate j
ob ects. Ori gi nally
i n Sansk ri t, ho wever, all li fel ess j
o b ects were arranged under a

se par ate cl ass, called i t; H i t, t e , . . eunu ch , but, gradually , th e old

li mi ts were di sreg arded . For languag e i mparts l i fe to what i s ln
ani mate, and, o n t he o th er h and, i mpai rs th e personali ty of what i s
by nature ani mate .
”
— B opp .

N ote . Great mascul i ne or femi ni ne partly

classes o f names are

by poeti cal anal ogy, by an i magi nary esti mate of thei r di sti ncti ve
qu al i ti es as li k e,those o f th e one or th e other sex i n the hi h er ani mals,
g
especi all
y man by grammati cal analogy, by resemblance i n
p artl
y
formati on to wor ds of gender al ready establi shed
”
Whi tney . .

N ote .
-I n Eng l i sh the natu ral di sti ncti on of g en ders i s mai ntai ned,
all i nani mate j
ob ects bei ng con si dered as ne uter, i . e. , o f nei th er sex.

g 5 2 . T here are two i n M arathi , the S i ngu lar

n u mbe rs

(m ) an d the P lu ra l a m ) T h e -S i ngu lar n u mber .

denotes one obj ect, an d th e P lur a l, more th an o ne .

4 m
§ 57 J cl a u s e or s uasra a rrvxs . 27
'

forms drop the Prékri t an usvi r ; Sk . l

g a house, P ri k .
W , M . fit .

‘
The anus vé r i s an appropr i ate expressi on of the neuter gender, as

i t i s l ess personal, less ani mated, and h ence appropri ated to the ac

cusati ve as well as the nomi nati ve i n th e neuter.

”
-B opp .

N ata — T he M arathi plu ral termi nati ons could be easi l v traced to
thei r S anskri t ori gi nals i n the followi ng fo rms z

a?all, P rak Uzi ?

l
P lu . M . Sk . .
,
M .
Q
’
.
( fi l h ors e s
) .

F . Sk . we) : al l P i nk w as or m M an (arm )
. .

-
, . .

u si fw mari ! or e sari M r (sti f f )

‘
N . Sk . a l l P r ak a
, . . .

N ol a — T h e fe mi ni ne plural an i s changed to at or al l when the

si ngular ends i n i or at, i n harmo n wi th th e S ans kri t r ules of th e
y
Permu tati o n of Letters at} a ri ver + sfl = m ri vers ; a n; a leech
+su = m le eches . I n H i n di the presence o fi ‘
always c h anges th e
3 17 or i f; to at or i t i rrafl a g arde ner + s ffi = qrafli fi by gardener s
7
3 3 i n tel le ct 3 1? m i ntellects .

C H A PT ER V .

T h e Su bstanti ve (are ) .

DI VI S I O N o r S UB ST A N T I VE S .

§ 54 69 .

54 . A . sub stan ti ve i s th e name ofa bei ng or thi ng , wh e th er

m ate ri al o r i m materi al , or th e n am e o f i ts a t tri bu te
,
vi e we d as a

di sti n ct o b e ct ;
j at a hou se, a
? God, W mi n d, “ r m r wi s do m
u o .

55 . T he subs tan ti ves are p rop er (fail ? ) a nd co mmon

56 T he proper n orm i s a name pertai ni ng to

.
a parti cular

obj ect ; as {Ti n R ama, fl P u n a .

57 . T he com mon n ou n is a nam e com mon to eve ry on e o f

a class o f ob ects j ; may a m an , “ i s a vi ll a

g e,
m a book .

N ata — A common nou n h as som eti me s th e force of a r

p p
e e r nou n

and vi ce versé
'

m W uff “ a?“ m
t gr
? H ave y ou seen
28 es s ns a or sus s ras r rvs s
'
. 58

the proclamati on of the Q uee n ? I n thi s sente nce mi ? denotes th e

Q ueen V i ctori a ; Fl?3 3 5 {W film, W m H a H e was q ui te

a R ama ; he n ever swerved from hi s promi se .

58 . C ommon nou ns are of th ree k i nds, C ollecti ve Noun s ,

N oun of m ateri als, an d A bstract N ou n s .

1 . A comm on n ou n of th e si n
g u l ar nu mber expressi ng a

collecti on or multi tu de of ob ectsj is calle d a collecti ve n ou n

2 . A com m on n oun whi ch de notes th e matter or substa nce

of whi c h an ob ect j is com ose d, an d n ot

p i ts form o r nu mbe r ,

is called a n or m f ma teri a ls (M an ) éfi l d
‘
o as g o

w s ug ar, m lf s ilk .

3 . T he n am e of a
p ro
p ert
y or
q uali ty of an ob ect, j vi e we d

as a se
p arate en ti t
y, i s call e d an a bs tract n ou n (W W );
as m hu mi li ty , m g o odn ess .

N ote A word desi gnati ng both a q

.
—
u ali ty and th e subj ect i n wh i ch

i t exi sts i s called a concr ete nou n, i t bei ng opposed to an abstract nou n .

T u s, matfi ai q rhonesty i s
'

an abstract noun, and W e.

“

m
an h onest man i s th e concrete noun corres ondi n
p g to i t .

59 . A su bs tanti ve i s i n flected (fi amr (In ?) to i n di cate i ts

g en der, n u mber,
a n d case .

T H E G ENDE R OF S UB S T A N T I V ES .

60 . T h e g en der of M arath i no u ns can be determi ne d

nei th er by th ei r f orm n or s i n
g ifi ca ti on , an d i t i s, con se q u en tl
y,
i mpossi ble to g i ve an y pre ci se ru le s o n the su bj ect . T he
fo llowi ng obes rvati ons m ay h owever , prove of som e u ti li ty t o
th e M arét hi stu de n t .

61 . R ules for Determi ni ng the Gen der f

o S u bstanti ves
by thei r F orms .

1 . T h e M arathi n ou n s en di ng in at are of all th e thre e

g en ders.

2 Th e pu re M arathi s ubs tanti ves i n an are alway s m ascu

.

li ne but Sansk ri t n ou n s en di ng i n arr are e i th er m asculi ne or

femi ni ne M al l?! a mang o , m M 6 1 1 a th read, m
. Sk an" . .

a tal e, f ; Sk 3 mm S pi ri t, m
. . .
30 e rr ors or sus su nr l vs s . 6]

ch arge. trust, m . f ki nd ;i wur rumour f

'
m
’

or sort
‘
. .
N i a , . , .
Q ar
ci rcu mci si on m j esti ng ; m Indi an corn. on, f .
(11 ai r ; W
me di ci ne R m rai si ns.

3 . M arath i n oun s in i are us uall

y fe mi ni ne, as W a

carri ag e. T he foll owi ng words are exce ti ons

p
( ) a m a bi rd, m: ; M a j ewel, m nfl
'
an el e
ph an t, m
M butter, n .tm 'fl water
, n .

()
b A l l wo rds de noti ng p rofessi on, character, o
fi i ce, &c .
,

are masculi ne ;as tfla!a wash er man ; W

” '
a
g arde ner m a

g ui de m m a man ager wfl t a s i n ner, &c .

() c A l l words en di ng in i , h avi n g an anu sv r o n a the m , are

ne uter ma? a
p earl .
(S ee S e ct .

4 T he n o u ns e ndi ng
i n sh ort 1 a nd 3 are pure San s k ri t ? '
.

words , and bel on g to al l th e three g enders ash a p oet, m .

m? i n te l li g e nce, f W bo ne , n ; ma th e s u n ,
m.i n a co w,
. .

f Bi water ,
.
g n.

T he i n at, wh i ch fe w, belo ng
U

o . nou n s are ver

y to all t he
three g enders .

6 . T he n ou n s in Q an d Q f e
'
mi n i n e , bu t t ho se i n the
are

q T he fem i ni ne n o uns i n Q and i?are

"

na sali se d ,
are n eu ter .

bu t two or th ree , and are us ually wri tten wi th a or i as a

tri pod, bei ng wri tten as fi rm or fi rai ;Gi a habi t, as W or mi .

7 . T here ar e s o me seven or e i g h t words i n the l ang uag e

whi ch end i n Si ?an d air ,
an d whi ch, e xce
pt m erit a woman f , .
,

are mascu l i ne as wri t covetou s ne ss, m Bi l a mark on a di e ,

T he fi nal i ri s of ten ch ang ed to 3 1 s. as ta o r tn ;

'

or an
“

a , ,

or W T h e word mi l bees
’
n est, wri tte n al s o as Hi s, is ei ther

m ascu li ne or ne uter .

ai r,
N ata — T he sol i tary femi ni ne word i n i s th us formed ; 8 k . m!
r

a moth er, P rak . mi or W .

M .
a m 01
’

am ; and th e m wi th th e
di mi nuti ve s uffi x
g or a? m ak e s m , or m a li ttle i nother or a

wi fe . S i mi lar forms exi st i n G ujarati ; mai l

”
.

N otc Few monosyllabi c p ri ma ry forms

.
end i n S ansk ri t i n the
di ph th ong s, not an y at all i n q; i n Q only i m
"
. , Q bei ng chang ed i n
m
'

many lang u ag es to . P ri mary fe rms i n N T are rare i n Sanskri t ;

.
 § 63 ] exa m or suss raurrvs s '
. 81

t he only ones k nown to me are a? heaven, and i ii co w .

o nly two words i n Sansk rit wh i ch e nd i n ai r, 1 } a shi p, ra h

8T he M arathi nouns en di ng i n the anusvér are all

.

‘
‘ "
a re d powder, at? a vesse l Exo
n euter ; tfi al a rl,
g?
'

p ea . .

11
1 m .

N ote . T he euphon i c n i s most freq

uentl
y by the neuter employ ed

by the masculi ne, and most rarely by th e femi ni ne,

”
gender, l ess so in
the Sanskrit l anguage — B oyp . .

9 A compou nd n ou n tak es the g ende r of i ts last member ;

-
.

W ITET v get e able s , m . si ng . , 7l1 m n ose and ey e s, m .

p l u

m bri de g roo m an d bri de 12 .

p i n , str i mwm .
p lu . fath er
an d moth e r .

5 6 2 . R u les f or determi ni ng the Gender f

o S u bsta n ti ves by
thei r S i gnifi cati on .

1 . N ames of li vi ng bei ng s are accordi n g to th ei r sex e i ther

masculi ne or femi ni ne W T a boy, m m a i

g ,rl f .

N ata — S ome nou ns, expressi ng li vi n g bei ngs, may denote ei ther a
mal e or a femal e ; as
m a perso n W a cat ; W a hog o r i
pg .

When these nouns are u sed wi thout y an refe rence to the sex of the

i ndi vi dual named, they are consi dered to be the n eu ter

g en de r sit in
m I s it Ku nbi boy i f lfi r
a i t W’
Ch ose ch i ld i s th at ?
am mi f I t i s not a h um an bei ng ; m nwi a fl lfi
’

5 5 73
3
there are many cats i n th i s town . W hen th e sex of th e i ndi vi dual
is refer red to , they assume th e masculi ne fem i n i ne gender ;
or as, 37
m ? fi ki l led th is hog , m ? a si m: m wri ts
’ ’

at rt rr r r
v s wh
g a t o .

fl rfi ,
t h i s cat f )
. does not ki ll rats ,

2 . T he n ame s of larg e an d
power ful i nan i mate j
o b ects ar e

often m asculi ne ; W a mo un tai n, m th e sea,

q
j th e s u n.

N ora — Some names of i nani mate ob ects

j are o f more than one

gender m a star, f . , m .
; i t !n . , so. ,
W n. , fl awj .
, n .
, an :
place in , f . T he masculi ne gende r i s preferred i n the Dak han .

5 63 . I mperfe ct as th e se l
r u es are, th ey wi ll be fou nd u se ful
by th e i ntel li g e nt s tu den t of M arathi . H e wi ll , however, be
g reatl yhe lped i n de termi ni ng the g ender of th e nou ns i n the
readi n l ess on by the i nflecti ons of th e adj ecti ves, prono uns,
g
32 camp us or sus sr aur l vs s. 64

verbs and adverbs whi ch may relate to the m T h us i n t h e .

sen tence 3 fl? m TN 1 !i f"?

? ,
R am m
a read thi s lar e
g
book wel l , th e n eu ter g en der o f the n ou n ge rm i s i n di cated by
the demonstrati ve p ronoun 3 th i s, the ad ecti ve
j flfi larg e, t h e
adve rb W 3 wel l, and th e verb a r m read .

R u les f or deri vi ng F emi n i n e and N eu ter forms f rom

M as cu li n e N ouns .

S ubstanti ve s, denoti ng m ale s, h ave someti mes corre s

64 .

on di ng femi ni n e an d n eu ter form s, an d thes e fe mi ni n e an d

p
n euter forms are of two k i nds

( )
1 S om e are deri ved from th e root by means of sa
f i nes ,
'

an d ( )
2 some are di sti nct ori gi na l words
1Deri vati ves : i fs? a
. ram , i i i } a ewe ; ar m a grandfath er,

ansfl a g ran dmoth e r

‘
.

2 Di sti nct words : he -

camel, ate -
she camel
. a a
W
a man, {i t or H R H ?a W om an .

65 . I .
— Deri va ti ve F orms .

1 . W h en a M arathi wo rd en di n g in m i n di cates a li vi n g
bei ng , whe ther rati on al or i rrati onal, i t i s u s ual l
y i n th e mas

cul i ne d ( 55, an d assu mes i and Q to mak e

"

g en er see

up i ts fem i n i n e an d n eu ter forms . T he n eu ter form , h o wever,

is n ot so comm on ly deri ved as th e femi ni ne, p arti cul arly in
r efe rence to no u ns den oti ng h uman bei n g s . T hu s
M ascu li ne . F emi ni ne . N eu ter .

an? " a g ran dfather W a

g ran d mother
m
ar a p aternal un cle m a patern al a u nt

mm a matern al u ncle mfl t a m aternal aunt

a
r m an el derly m an g ri t an el derl
y wo m an

m boy mfl l
'
a
g a g ir

dog 1 1 a bi tch
a 5
m- a fox ant fl
i - '

a vrxen

ha
sgr a h orse a mare
a m a -
h e oat
g Gran ? a sh e -
g oat

in a ram i ts? a e we

ai m a -
he wolf ai m -
a she wolf a
 34 c aus es or sus sr as rl vss . 68

p W f
ri e st ,w m . ar a M arath a, f .
, m a P arbh u
‘ a washer m n
WW f ai nt a W f ,
. C haracters : trrtfl a si n

ner qt fl t f ; ai rs? a l eperfl l rf twf

’
t fl .
,

N ote — S urn ames, wo rds denoti ng castes, &c .

, may end i n strand vet
‘
im Ge rri , t i ni q
‘ '
tak e the femi n i ne su ffi x i n
! as r 3 511 3 1 a Kanarese
m an. awash .

N ote . T h e wo rds 1 21 a g od, m

— a B rah man, m a s lave, a

d r a, wh i ch ar e p u re Sansk ri t words, may assume on l

y i ; if?
mm fl a Brahm an woman ma l a female slave q Sudri
i
a g od dess, v
, , fl
'
a .

1 11 36 ? a c o wh e r d, makes W “
!a cowh e rd es s .

N ote .
—
So me Persi a n words de ri ved from Urd u, s u ch as W a

M og ul , W a s wee er,
p tak e ar m? for f i
t as mug , M f .

fi rs t . W e "f,
.

2 . M as cul i n e n o un s i ndi cati n g i rr a ti ona l a n i ma ls , as s u me

e i th er i or i v
r to m ak e u
p th e fe mi n i ne fo rms . T he se t e rm i
n ati o n s are affi xed i n th e fol lo w i n g m an n er

fa) M arathi wo rds, co mp os e d on ly o f two sy l l abl e s ass u m e

m rf
,
‘
i n th u s , a? a ca m el , s a?w f ; as: . s ti g er, ar o
. Fee a li e n ,
fi r mf . i n p o etry , f¥r€
l { fi t a n e l e
ph ant , m f .

b
( ) P u re S an sk r i t words of two sy ll able s , n o t
q u i te n atur al

i se d i n the lan g uag e , ass u m e i ; th us r

t tr a de er qrfl
f , .
i n a

s wan , i ii} f .

() M a rat
chi ol s l labi c
p y y wo rds as su me i th us Sti r a

-
m o u se , i sfi j fl; W e a dog l o use , M ei i
j ; was an ass, m
f .
; h ug , M fi;
s a p ar rot, M f ; i v . a frog ,
‘
M f f g areas a m onk ey , W fi fi ; t ri m: an el l, ai n t
f qm
'
a

deer, M f .

68 . T he nam e s o f i nan i mate ob ects are som eti mes

j modi
fi ed i n M arath i by th e g e nder term i n ati ons , an m . and i f
n , to expr e ss th e followi ng se nses :
.

1 . T he sens e of hugen ess o r cl u msi ness i s i ndi cated by the

m asculi ne termi n ati on an th us , t he radi cal for m mast bread,
by th e addi ti on of an become s m , S i g n fy i ng
i a h u e l oaf
g .

d f br ea d ; f ro m amen: a pai r of sci s sors, afi ra rt r a h ug e pai r of

s ci ssors trm a cart, from w e? a carri ag e .
44 .
C A S ES or su esr as r l vus . 78

78 . T he Dati ve case ( W m?)

i s i n flecte d by H , err s i ng u
lar, an d a, m ,
=rr l ural a n d e x re s s e s t h e i de a of a re c i i e nt
p , p p
do n ee ; W fiwm fi é ’ ‘
th e em ared
or 313
3 3 1 3 i , p e ro r s
p
A bdul la s li fe
’
.

N ol a — T he i n flecti ons o f t he dat i ve are partl

y deri ved fro m S an
s k ri t, an d a tl fro m M ara th i th e H and =rr are f Sansk ri t o ri i n
p r
y o
g ,
and at i s a co rru ti o n o f t he M
p ath i postpo si ti on mrfi n ear (a m to
ar

touch Sk . Bo th a and W! are m odi fi cati on s o f the Sans kri t

g en i t i ve te rm i n ati on s { at an d Hi th u s,

S i ng u la r Geni ti ve S k i s m P rak 3am M .

,
.
,
.
m ( Dati ve ) .

P lu r a l W , P rak taro
t,
M . .
m (D ati ve ) .

T he P rzi kr i t, th rou g h whi ch M arat h i i s i mmedi ately deri ved, bei ng

defi ci en t i n the dati ve ease, s u bsti tu ted th e fo rms of th e g e n i t i ve for
it and he nce the i den ti ty o f the M arath i dat i ve i nflecti o ns wi th those
of th e class i cal g i i
en t t e . T he Guj arati an d H i n di da t i ve fo rms clai m

th e sarr e o ri g i n .

79 T he A bl ati ve ( -
ter fl ) i s made b th
§ . cas e en
p y u e

i n flecti o n an an d e x th e re la t i o n o f s e arati on
or Ea , p re s s e s
p
an m sneer, he ca m e fr o m h o m e t fr g v
arga 11 m m trai t, I
we n t fro m P o o n a to S at ta r a .

N ote .
— T he A blati ve ga or an i s a co rru
p ti on o f th e P rak ri t fi st?
deft .

80 . T he Ge ni ti ve e as e W ) i s the s ubs tan ti ve i nflec t

ed by H T, an d e xpre s s es th e l
re a t i o n of ori
g i n, or p os se s s i o n ,

e x i s ti n g bet w e e n two o bj ec ts 1m H a rm fi mfi r gig W

m , th e dea th of th i s brave m i n i s te r o cc u rre d i n th e c am
p .

T he r e l a ti o n be t we e n the t wo n o un s sn f f i an d $
53 i s i n di cat ed
by th e i n fle cti o n QT ”
.

T he Ge n i ti ve ca s e is ad ec ti val
j in ch aracter , an d m ay
be sai d
q y f th to
e noun b
y w hiuali
ch i t i s
g o ve r ne d . H e n ce it
is m o di fi e d l i k e an adj e cti ve to ag ree wi th th e n o un it re fers

to

M u se . s ng i . emi t fi rs t h i s h o rse , p l u . fl rfi i t? h i s h orses .

Fem fi t h s?hi s
i m a re , mu i tes" h i s mare s
-
eari s
'
.
n s .

q"
” K N

a rr i ? h i s h o rs e, t ari ff dra ft h i s horse s .

§ 96] n ecnansx
on o r S UBS T A N T I VES . 49

91 . I f the vo wels i n whi ch M arathi nou ns termi nate were

o f a uni for m nat ure , all the nou ns wo ul d reg ul arl
y ass ume th e
HT a nd i ; b u t the vowels are, as we h ave n oti ce d i n the chap te rs
on Orthog raphy , of vari o us prope rti es and powers (some bei ng
s tron
g and o th e rs weak , s o me n oble an d o the rs mean ) , a n d
th e n ouns, con se
q ue ntl
y, assu me the dem onstrati ves so mewhat

i rre g ularly .

92 . S on s N o uns A S S UM E T H E Ds nonsrns rl vss ' '

IN T H EI R

P UR E Foans, om ens I N m um I n ru s s on M omma!) FOR I S, A N D

T H E R rsr '
Enr mat r R um or T H EM .

93 . H e nce the re are th ree l

c ass es
-
o f the crude forms, or,

in o th er wo rds, th ere are T H R EE DEC LEN S O N S I (m ani a

i n M arath i .

94 . T he three Decle nsi o ns a re thus e n u merated and

descri bed
I .
-I n the Fi rst Declen s i o n a re i nc luded al l those no un s

whi ch ass u me the at and i i n th ei r P UR E roams .

lI — I n the S econd Decle nsi on are com reh ende d al l thos e

p
~
.

nou ns whi ch assu me the m and f i n the i r m enu m al l s .

I a th e T hi rd Decl ensi on are

III .
— co ntai ne d al l those nouns
whi ch EN TI R ELY arm or th e I n and i .

95 T a r m ru a.n on m o m m a !) r o. a ms o r an A N D i A R E s i r A N D f

Q E
R
’

S P EC T I V E L Y T he W i s o bt ai n e d by
.
d r o i
pp g n t he s e m i
vowel qof m, a nd the q , b y c ha n i
g g n th e i t o i t s co rr e sp o n d
i ng di phtho ng Q '
.
(S ect 1.l

N t S tri ctl y speak i ng there i s on ly

o e. — o ne declen si on i n M arah
t i,
vi z , the fi r st , and th e other t wo may be
. consi dered i ts -
s u b di vi si ons .

96 T he foll o w i.ng i s a tabl e o f th e Di s ti ng u i sh i ng T er

-
mi nati on s of the crude form i n the T hree Declen si ons

Fi rst Declensi on . Second Decl ensi o n . T hi rd Decl ensi on .

N o change fo r the
at m an m, Q f crude -
'

n. , n. ,
form
. ’
. , .
62 DEC LENS I O N o r s uesranrl vus . 1 06

1 06 . T he n u m be r o f wo rds i n 3 1 u nde r thi s decle ns i o n

a bo ut 2 90 70 an d th ey a re th e fo l lo wi ng

si t ar art h m n
a

m «m (fit
ne w all :

T 7

m e
! !
i s}

was : (i s

m r al i ti
m ;
er

i
st l t

W
[ me t
ei l m
ter
i ‘
ztar
r
l 23 5
1

i t as
s i s:

m an
:

m : m:
were!
are

- ar
firm e
m as

H F?
 1 06 ] DEC LENS I ON or s ue sranrl vus . 63

fin T 1

fi rm fr?
'

2t a far !

fi rms fi st ar m Fires
'

w
th art!

fi rs i f? m a i s ro r fl fi rm m
tilt i fs Graft»: at? a? ! si s
fi rm : "
i f! as “ a
”

m a

N ote Of th e above femi ni ne nou ns, mos t ar e deri ved from

S a nsk ri t words e ndi ng in an, and i t is on thi s acco u n t t hat the ,
y
in spi te of thei r al tered for m i n a fi nal 31 , co n form to the class i cal

m o de of declensi on . We sh al l , for i l lustrati o n t race a few M arath i

wo rd s i n 3 1 to thei r San skri t or i gi nal s i n an

i
ar a a n aci d

i ! o r i fl? a bri ck
“

m flo ur
arm u dder Sk . a
-
rms r
? a cot
Err

fi ll a cre vi ce
“

are; a ar lan d
g
W as h e s

m sh a m e

(i f? e ve ni n g

area a sch o o l

N e ta — S ome o f t hese femi n i ne wo rds are deri ved fro m nou n s e nd i n

g
i n o t he r vo wels than si lt

M . W h on ey , Sk . 37
5 n .

N ote. -S ome M arath i words, tho u h de ri ved from S ansk ri t

g n o u ns in
a", assu m e
i 1 11 th e -
crude f or m mma j aundi ce (Sk m m )
E . D at i ve
w
,

asn t to j aun di ce ; so also 66 ? tu rm e ri c (S k

'

3 Dati ve
m
,

, to turmeri c .
64 D EC LE N S I O N or s u ns ra nrl vrs
'
. 1 07

N ote .
~ —
So m e words decli ned ei ther wi th t or Q ; as fi n or
are
”

m
a s hel l, Dati ve W !or fi r m
to a s hell H um: a s word; m m
or m to a sword .

N euter S u bs tanti ves .

S 1 07 . Ne ute r no u n s e ndi ng i n a! ass u m e an .

Exa mp les .

R oot, at a -
hous e ; c ru de fo rm, ar r .

Si ngu la r . P lural .

"
at a h o use El i h o u s es
"
at a h o us e fi h ou se s
s

Eu fi
by a house
'
qrhfl by h o u ses
'

qu ai l wi th a h o u se at h fl w i th h ou ses
.
‘

m «T to a ho use m - -
H HT to houses
at ri a than a h o u se W than h o u se s
ER
'

FHT of a h o u se m of h o uses
ari a i n a ho n i h o u se s
atr a 1 n

an 0 h o u se firt h? 0 h o u se s

T H E T H I R D DEC L EN S I O N .

M ascu l i ne S ubs ta nti ves .

1 08 M ascu li n e S ubs tan ti ves i n 3 7, Bi t and 85 rej ect them

“

. .

T h ere are n o m as cu li ne n o un s e n di ng i n the d i ph tho ng s q

an d fi"
. 54 , 6 ~
l
Examp les .

W : A penk ni fe

enk ni fe W e nk ni ves
W a p p
a e nk ni fe a res by p en k n i ves
p
wi th a p e nk ni fe W wi th pe nk ni ves

a rm -
H to a p e nk ni fe W 4 3 H
3 T to p e nk n i ves

W E? th an
p enk n i ve s

m m a inp a e nk n i fe

a ri O pe nk ni fe
70 r un A DJ EC T I VE . 1 15

S i ng . W m . fl i mfl
’

f .
1 71 1 5: m , g o od . .

P lu . mm? m . ai m f t h a t? g oo d .

1 15 . B e fore an i nfle cte d no u n, the ad ecti ve

j in an

assu mes i ts cr u de -
form p wi th th made
e dem o ns tru
a ti ve I n;
m t black ; m ar tha n? by th e black horse ; W qt i fl r, '

to larg e hou ses . So meti mes Q i s Op ti onally s ubs ti t u ted fo r

'

the demo nstrati ve 1 mm or an ? m Of a

g ood wo man .

N ata — In p o etr
y so meti mes the ad ecti ve
j takes the cas e

termi na ti ons of th e no un i t qual i fi es. In t he followi ng li ne t h e

ad ecti ve W tak es the i nstru mental -
case endi n of the
j , g nou n

m e m t n?a
i a w i t m ist s ushi .

1 16 . When th e ad e cti ve
j does no t e n d i n an , i t re mai n s

u n alte re d befo re th e no u n it q u ali fi e s i

a
st er mi S o ur fru i ts
i m m K W hat s hal l I do wi th th e bi tter g o urd ?
“

EE
R ,

N o te. -I n poetry t he adj ecti ves that do no t end i n an ma be

y
i nflected
a ff r
i m surf? ardfi rm W arm ,
g m M u k te sh war .
—
.

i « i n i ?Q T m
« i f 3 11 3 5? i f erg? fi fi S ui — T uk aram “

721 " an ? 11 66 W?W , strewn ?um — W aman m . .

N ata — T he j
ad ecti ve in 31 is someti mes i nflected to agree wi th th e
oi n ed to i n prose , especi ally when the ad ec ti ve is
nou n it is j even
j
emph ati c i n exci ted di scou rse —
ur§ 8 11
1 5 6 1 . W QW
0 my brave boy , let me k i ss th ee ; 3 13 3 1 M W w i ‘
flfi
'

W IN H ‘fl sa u na O m y m ost
’
w o rthy u ncl e,
wi?l l y o u
pardo n

my faul ts ?
1 17 I f the fi nal vo wel of th e ro ot i s chang ed to err, the
.

j
ad ecti ve becom es s ub ect j to i n flecti onal chang es like any

ordi n ary ad ecti ve j in T hu s m s mal l, may be ch ang ed

to m ; in
g:bi tt e r, to m , &c ; m {fi g ht i n the s mall

mo uth ; avg or g b i tter g hee, n

it .

118 . W hen an adj ecti ve i s used as a s u bstan ti ve, it i s

decl i ned li ke a s u bstanti ve m W W as soci ate wi th the

g o o d ; M in m an? r e tu r n g ood for e vi l. T h e mas cu

‘
li ne , fe mi ni ne, an d neuter adj ecti ves en di ng i n WT. i and Q
’

r es ecti vely, fo llo w the Fi r s t Declensi on , th ose en di n g i n or

p
follo w the Secon d, an d th e rest the T hi rd
 1 1 8] T H E A DJ EOT I V E.

M as cu l i ne . F emi ni ne .

A ce
m

-
W WW G w ri te rs
r
W e ft i - sm
a l m i tt i t
l a w a tt p lu l W a -
nt i t

-
crude fo rm m
P l u ral

ar m -
ear

L ac .

Va c .
“ 1 am
0

-
A t t ri buti ve crude form

S i ng ular .

. Nom . « 1 1 00
3
‘
. mi ?

fi g, B i tte r

Si ng nla r .

3
.
'
A cc . av
g
Ins l r
f

.
 72 ms am s crl vn. 119

N un s m ns .

1 19 . T h ere are s i x k i n ds of N u meral s , vi z .

, the C ardi nal s
( fil m ) , Ordi nals m ), F racti o n als (M m
Di stri bu ti ves W ) , M ulti pl i cati ves ( ) , anW
d I nde fi
n i tes (W m
1 . T he C ardi na l N u mera ls .

1 20 . T he C ard i n al s de note th e n um ber j of

a nd o b ects ,

an swe r to th e qu es ti on , how many ? A s, Q a

r.
‘
o ne
‘
am fi fty , .

1 21 In co m un d n u me ral s, s uch as W m twen t - n

.
p o y o e ,

i nfr w -
a t enty t wo, & c , &c , the s maller n u mber . . co m e s fi rst i n
M arathi , wh i le i n Eng l i sh i t i s j us t the reverse .

-
N ata I a M arathi the el emen ts of t he compound word desi g nati ng
t he numeral, cannot often be d i sti ng ui she d, as for i nstan ce i n th e
co mpo und m . I n stands for two , and w , fo r fi fty I n i s.t he m odi

fi ed form of 3 (Sk .
Q or a two ) w is
and deri ved fro m m ( P r .

m Sk qqmqfi fty) In M arathi qi s often ch ang ed q in

'

, . . to

com posi ti on .

N ate.
— I a M arathi the nu merals above o ne h u ndred are not u sed

i E l i h h d d w l fi w o uld be i
”
wi th and,
n n g s o ne u n
as re a ve, n

M ara i Q fi i l q
i q, d fi h d i h d ed
'

t h a o n e
'
h un re d ve
'
o ne t o usan n ne u n r

a nd si x, eat em w i t em .

1 22 T he i dea of i n de fi ni tenes s i s ex re s sed by the cardi

.
p
nal s by j oi ni ng t wo n u mber s tog eth er, wi th o u t th e co nj u ncti o n
“
and o r
“
?or ;S t r ati fi ,e d
t hu s ,s o m e W T vi a
fi v e or HT“

te n m e n h a d c o m e ; s tar W are“
! W758 3 3 13 ,
i t w i ll b e a r fr u i t

i n fi ve o r s i x y e a rs m a m $ 13 g fi a l ac o r a l ac a n d a ,

q u arte r h a d as s e m b l e d W ‘
fi fl 7 m f l it , s o m e fo u r o r fi v e m en

were prese n t .

1 23 . W he n a cardi nal
p is re
pe ate d, i t m ak e s u a di st ri
bu ti ve fo rm : i 3 ,
t? m t w o a
p i e ce ; wi l t v i a , b y fi ve s ;Q ar
f
" '

m
s; i n mam" R m, h h d t w l i t h i m
a e e ac a o e a ve s
g ve n o .

1 24 T h.e i de a of m u l t i t u d e , e xp r e ss e d i n E n
g l i sh b y th e

re pos i ti on “
b y,
”
i s d en o te d i n M ar at hi b y i n fl e cti n
g t h e a
gg r e
p
ate o r c o l l ec ti v e c a rdi na l s s u c h a s a h u n d re d a t h o u s a n d a
g , , ,

lac, and a c rore , by th e p arti cle Si? as , ru

pe es by la cs , W
 12 7 ] ms A DJ E OI I VE ' ‘
. 73

Kr
e i ; W W W “ 6
7
m ,
I h ave seen s uch ci ti es by
h u n dreds . T h e follow i n g ga
gg re ates are th us i nflected
m a h u ndre d, W T by h un dre ds ; m a thous an d, fi rfi
'

by th o u sands m a h undre d th o u san d, a re? by lacs fi r!

ten m i ll i ons , by ten mi lli on s . T he collecti ve n u m e ral

{fart a h un dred, as s u m es th e fo rm of W ,
and th en tak es
th e Si .

T hi s sam e i dea of mul ti tu de i s expressed, also, by the em ploy

m e nt of th e San skr i t forms of th ese ag g reg ate n umerals , co m
b i n ed wi th th e word W a li mi t as, a m by thousan ds
m m fi fi that W , th i s s am e s tor
y w as i n th e

m o u ths of mil li o ns of p p
eo l e .

1 25 . T he n u meral a
Q fi
'

one , j oi ned to ano ther cardi na l

n u meral , e xpress es th e sen se o f i nde fi ni ten e s s de no ted i n Eng

b
l i s h y th p p
e re o si ti o n
“
abo u t ; si s! Q 5 :m i a ft , p l e as e g i v e

h i m abo ut fi ve r upee s ; firs t w an ts (T i ff, ab o u t a h u n dr e d

m e n had co me I t may only be u sed wi th wo rds de no ti ng
.

q u an ti ty ; W (far
: 33 su m ,
bri ng abou t a mau nd of g hee .

1 26 T he cardi nal nu mer als de note the i de a of frequ en c

y
m
.

by as s u m i n g the p ar ti cle s? Sk
“
.
q r) ; W on ce ; a

h u ndre d ti mes .

1 27 . T he cardi n als are thu s wri tten an d p ro nounced

1 9, gas .
13 u 3m
2 Q h
a . 14 a? m , r
3 3 fits .
15 is
4 v 16 it
5 Q 17 l b

6 s 18 u
7 6 a.
er 19 m
3 20 Q0 m .

9 9. was “ 21 it M G .

11 u 23 i t 311 13
12 9
a 1
c m 24 a? fi f te fi é tmw .
78 rs s A DJ s crrvs . 13 6

II — T he Ordi nal N u mera ls .

§ 136 . T he Ordi nal s den o te the or der or s uc ce ss i o n of

j
o b e cts as q
fi
'

ar fi rs t , S EN T se c o n d .

137 . T he Ordi nal s, e xcep t th e fi rs t fo u r n u mb ers, are

m ade u
p yb addi n
g an to th e C ar di n als : q t? fi v e rr
a : tri m
fi fth 811 3 e i g h t Err= snzz fl e i g h th ; fro m 1
15 0
1
1 1 1 n i n e t een and
o nwards the o rdi nal s ch an g e t h e fi nal vo wel o f th e cardi nal to

ai r befor e tak i ng HT ; as a m n i ne te enth , m h u n dredth .

T he fol lo wi ng are t he o rd i n a l for ms of th e fi r s t fo u r n u mb ers:

qfi '

srr fi rst, m .
m f .

ga f f secon d, m .

fi at r thi rd, m
’
. W f .

fo urth , m zfizfl fi fi
f
’
. . n .

138 . T he o rdi nal s are decli n ed l i ke ai m i n the F i rst

Decl en si o n
tr fi a r the fi rs t
' '

S i n gu lar .

wfi wl th e ‘
fi rst, m
'

q
fi mr to th e fi rs t fi fi mr
q ’
B at . a r

Gen .
m of th e fi rs t

Pl u r a l .

was; t h e fi rs t, m .
-
mge m f
f
.
m e} n .

Dat . wh en t o th e fi rs t
Gen .
qfi of th e fi rs t

m am th e se ve nth .

S i ng u lar
N am . W se ven t h, m . e mi t f
Da t to the s e ve nth
-
E raJ i m
. W
P lu ra l .

N am . e mi t m .

Da l . w ai s t

N ata — T he i nstru mental case of th e ordi nals is u se d adverbi ally ;

as stree t?
! or stre a m fi rst or at fi rst e ra u
s fi a seve nth ti me .
 1 4 2] T HE A DJ EC T I VE. 79

III T he M n lti p lzcati ves

’

13 9 .T he M u lti pl i cati ves den ote h o w many fold a thi ng

is as - i n l -
m o ne fold, or s g e ; gm two fold, or double .

T h e se for ms are made ub

p y addi n g i !
t (S k qg ,
a fol d ) to th e .
' '

c a r di nal n u meral as vi a fi ve i t? -
W e fi ve fold .

( m two (if?
"
140 . T he n u me ral s , thre e , W four, an d W
,

t e n, ar e c han
g e d to 3 F
a , fi t an d W, p res
y b efecti vel
o re in
,
"

an d th e w of in i s do uble d i n th e for ms o f i f? and rfi a T hu s, '

ar
a dou ble 1 7m ! fo u r -
fol d
g
EM ? tre bl e W ten -
fold
N ta
a —
T h e forms
3 fi t an d at are the forms ass umed hv fi ? t n 0 ,
m
e
,

$ 1 t hree an d W fou r i n comp os i ti on ; as ak a, a frame ,

- m
,

an e ar-ri ng , QrfiT fi q
a d u a rangu lar, M four-
leg g e d, fou r .

m
;

fo l d ed an ta kes the fo rm of arg i u a

'

2
all aro u nd fi n afi
.
;
-
-
t h re e stori ed ; Erm ;
a th ree s i ded ; e? w c lever ;
gai n? a two

m as ted vessel .

N ata T he word g l fold o r ti me i s j o i n ed to nu me rals i n thei r

'
— o

S a n skrit form s ; as t wo fOl d ; f i g

fl
t th W
ree-fold ;
v
erai
c t
y
'

-
fo u r fold .

T he forms (fi t !o r ui fi fl si n gle, gi

’ - or
N ata i f t d u ble, ft ( r
'

g
—
o

- -f l h i fl
f fl
’

f fi
a fl o
'

r fi g t r th ree o d ,
'
are u se d c e y i n refer en ce t o the f ol di ng
o
f cl oth, or a rap e fl i i i ] a d o ub l e
fi th rea d Fro m four and on .

word “ i t, the ad ecti ve ] form of i fold, i s j oi ned to

w ards the j nt a

th e nu merals ; an d ?afrfi a neck lace wi th fou r fo lds .

m may be
O
p ti onal ly used for all the oth er nu merals m m si ng le.

IV .
— Fr acti ona ls .

14 1 . T he Fracti o nals de n o te o n e or m ore parts of a whol e

n u m ber ; as W or W o ne an d a fou rth ; ti re a fo ur th .

14 2 - . T he fracti on als m ay be used W i th th e car di n al s ,

si mple ag g re g ate as G a ra
z t w d q u ar ter, W fil
‘
or ? o an a or

on e h u n dred an d t we n ty fi ve - . W h en the fracti onal s are u n i te d

wi th th e cardi n al s, th ey p are ut fi r st an d th e n the cardi nal s,

whi ch i s j ust the r eve rse o f wh at i s do n e i n Eng li sh m

four and a h al f . T he followi ng ar e th e fracti onal nu mbe rs ,
wi th th ei r peculi ar si g n s
 1 4 9] r ue
‘
A DJ EOI W E. 81

I n thi s way any fracti on mi g ht be j o i n ed to

146 .

th ou sands , l acs , cr ores, &c B eyon d th e n u mber two , as i n .

two , fibri l t wo h u nd red, fin m t two th o us and , &c .

, th e wo rd
H r? i s use d to denote a hal f ; as m F IT!
“

a m:

N ate T he sy mbol s
fo r pi ce, an nas , and ru pees are these
J r o n e pi ce, J l l t wo p i ce, ) III th re e pi c e,
-J o n e an na , J tw o a nnas,
=

at) t h re e a nn as , U fou r a n n a s, IIJ gei h t a n nas, IIU t w el ve an n as, 1

fi ve annas an d o ne pi ce, I=
J l l si x annas and two p i ce, III?) III fi ftee n

ann as and th ree p i ce, o ne rupee, t( M fi f d i b

tJ L) ty ru
pees an e g t an nas,

632 113 ) In si x hu ndred -

and thi rty four rup ees ten annas a nd t h ree
1 nd1 Gr amm ar
' °

pi ce .
— H .

147 . T he fracti onals are re g ularly decli ned . T ho se e nd

i ng i n at are o f the S e co nd Declen si o n , an d those i n 3 11

, f an d

Q
’
of th e m
Fi rs t . a i s i rreg ular ; as m to o n e a nd a

q uarter, n ot m m .

V .
— D i stri bati ve N u mera ls .

1 4 8 T h e di s tri buti ve nu meral s i ndi cate ho w many each

5 .

ti me a thi n g i s ; as m , M ,
2133 13 ? each , ever
y . T he s e n se

of di stri bu ti on i s u s ual ly e xpres sed by re

pe ati n
g th e car di nal s
;
W at? m ay co me o n e by ; (n fl i aS1 W !
i
o u o ne at ar
y
br i ng two mang o es at a ti me ; m m m ama they
sat down to di n e by fi fti es .

some numeral endi ng m

'

Note -B affi xi ng at to an, the di stri

, y
bu ti ve sense i s exp ressed ; e cr m W , s wi m 3 3 : as!“ g i ve a whole

VI — T he I nd efi ni te N umera ls .

14 9 T he i n defi ni te n u meral s de note nu mber i n de

§ . a

fi ni tely ; as aga m any zfii a few, m pl u ral Ii i , em , all , m

‘
. .

h
T e n i d e fi n i te n u m e ral s a re re g ul arl y de c l i n e d li k e th e ad

jec t i v e o q
s f u al i ty , 1 1 4 i ts ?
! m a n y , m i en t o m a n
y ; a rm
all, ar m to al l .

11 m
82 P R ON OUN S . 15 0

C H A PT ER X I .

P ron ou ns .

t 1 50 17 7 .

1 50 . A pronou n i s a word whi ch su ppli es the place o f a

no u n , o r re fers to a n o u n me n ti on e d be for e o r afte r i t as ( rm

m ‘
fi W R amasay s tha t he i nten ds to co m e s fi '
tr
i m
W i ll “ th i s i s the very m an that cam e

este rday
y .

1 51 T here are s i x
p k i n ds of ro no u n s. vi z. , th e P ers o n al
mar-
.

m , th e P e rso nal I n defi ni te m m ,

th e
R e l at i ve th e I n te rrog ati ve “ W EE, th e De mo nstrati ve
i a
ar s ,
a nd th e I n defi n i te W .

1 52 . T he P ron o un s , W i th th e exce pti o n of the F i rs t an d

Secon d P e rso nal Pron ou ns , are re

g y d ecli ned
ul ar l T h e m a s .

culi n e pron o u n s i n an o r aft are ch an g ed t o i i n th e fe mi n i n e ,

"
an d to Q i n the
'

n eu te r g e n de r; as a? he, tfl
'
s he , an d 31 i t, an d
are decl i ned l i k e th e ad e c ti ve s of
j q ual i ty i n arr, 114 .

l . T he P ers ona l P ronou ns .

1 53 . T h e Pe rso n al P ro no u ns W W ) are chi efl

y
e mp loy e d as s u bsti tu te s fo r th e n am e s of p ersons, an d represe n t
thr ee pers on s , vi z . , th e p s teak er,
h e p e rson S ok e n to, an d th
p
ers o n s ok e n of T h e fo r m i n d i cati n g th e speaker i s calle d
p p .

the F i rs t P ers on , th e fo rm for th e p erso n sp oken to i s cal le d th e

S econd P erson, and th e for m den o ti ng th e pers on sp oken of i s
calle d th e T hi rd Pers on . T h e fol lo wi n g are the forms for th e
th ree person s

S i ng . l s t P ars ,
t
"
il I m .
, f . P lu . e m we m f .
,
n.

2n d th ou et}
gr g y o u n .

3 rd Gfi h e , a
'

ft s he, it . 31 m , em f}, a?n

. th e y

N ta
a —
T he personal pron oun s are thu s deri ved fro m the Sans kr i t
lang uage, th ro ug h the P rak ri t
'

S t aya lar .

l et P ars . Sk . 313
"
i
, P rak . 8 m ,
M ar . t il I
“

2nd P ars . Sk . t a, P ra
k .
fl , M ar .
r
E th ou
84 P sououns . 1 56

z th an are no w u sual ly use d fo r

N ote .
— T he nomi nati ve l fi I and
i
h
t e i nstru me ntal a t yb m e and m y b t h e e a s , f f for t u t ) { ti
m fg
- 3 i t h as b em
en w ri.tt en by m e n i ( f o r a n ) a m a re i ts ,
-
li t i t sh o
. u ld h ave be en d on e by th e e T h e se a re p ur e ly K o nk a n i .

const ru cti o ns.

if thus de ri ve d
N ata T h e i nflected fo rms
—
of I and i
i th ou are

from S an sk ri t
i f! I .

S i ng N am Sk a t , P rak wt fi f,
‘ M ar l fl , I
‘
. . . . .

A cc S k t ri , . . P r ak . M ar i t, m e
.

I nstr S k W T, . . P rak 3 o r my,

.
‘
M ar . a n, by m e
1 T h ou .

S i ng N am S k fl , P rak g t ?o r a,
"

M ar
"

. . . . .
i th o u
A ce S k a t, . . P rak i n?o rfi o r g,
.
'
M ar . 51 th ee
‘
I ns tr S k ( fi r, arr by thee
'

. . P rak g fi .
'
or ag
'

or H Q , M ar .

P lu I n str Sk W
S P r ak W M ar St u f f by us

m
. . . . .
, ,

Sk P rak ‘
.
M , .
, M a r
gg fi byy o u .

1 56 B efore i nfle ct ed n ou ns i f?I an d t h o u as s um e th ei r

.
1
cru de -fo r ms z
l st P er a?! Plu . smut
am
0

2nd 1 37

T h ey m ay ta k e also thei r cas e -

fo r m s as , tfi r 1 1 6 3 13 1 to me
a
po o r m an , o r W tram . I n th e i n str u me n tal s i n g ular

on l y th e -
ca se form s of t h e r o no u n s are u sed as, ra w ( WW “

p
by me R am a .

"
15 7 T h e T hi r d Perso nal P ron o un s
. i f} h e , i f?she , and a
i t, are thu s de cli ne d :
M ascu li ne
S i ngu lar .

N am . fir h e
A cc . fi r hi m

t ate r, m am , ts
ar ,

a i m, to the m
A bl .

w ,
W th an wi g ; mi n? e th an th e m
Gen . W R IT o f h i m a fa r of th e m
Lac .
-
wi tr i n h i m tw i st i n t he m
C r ude -
form ( at t art
86 P aos ouus . 160

1 60 form an : of o ne s se lf, i s u sed s o m e

T he adverbi al
’
.

ti mes for W W, espec i ally when i t i s u se d to e mphas i ze the

as , til e r : fi at? i r i
”
p e rs onal pron o u ns a fi ( f t I m y s e l f w e nt
“

th ere so al so «mi s1 m ? fi he has i nj ured hi m s e lf .

W hen a n: i s u sed i n thi s way as a

p ron o u n , it is an I n d e fi ni te
P ersonal l rbno u n ’
.

N ata W W s e
—
i d r i ve d f ro m t h e S an sk r i t w o d ant m1
r - se lf,

ch anged to 3 11 q
i n P rék ri t an d 81 i n th e fo rmer lang uag e, i s m
used i n al l th e g enders, nu mbers, and perso ns m : i s the S ansk rit .

ablati ve o f a sel f, and i n th e fo rm H i self, i s u sed as fr eely as

W ( mi ,
I ch ose i t
Nm y se l f, or t h o u c h os es t i t t hy sel f,
o r

he o r sh e cho se i t h i msel f or h erself ; mm : we, y o u, o r t hey

ch ose it of ou rsel ves or o u rsel ves o r th emsel ves — M ar M i l ler
y .

161 . W W and era: are de cli ned as fo ll o ws

e mu Oneself .

N am . W o n e s el f

A ce . W on es el f

I nstr . arm by on ese l f

Da t . W i t to on eself
A bl .
W th an on esel f

Gen m m m of onesel f
. .

L ac m .rtar i n on e s elf o

r -
C ude form W .

N ate — I n p oetry the i nstru mental may be i nflect ed ; “ mi n m m

fil m ? W a? 3 3 “ W ll Vi th al
a —
.

m : S el f .

N am
’
. E m: self A bl . £ 276 :
t than self

A re . a s : se lf Gan .
t art[ fi -n of se lf
I nstr . m by sel f
: L ac . (wai t? i n s elf

Dat . w m
a r -H t o s e l f -
C rude form m :

I n th e pl ural th e c
N ata — of 3 1m i ra;
assu mes th e anu svz r -
u e fo rm
d

m i
i d "
smm i q W 3 3 3 ,
t h e
y k i ll ed th em sel ves .

N ata — T h e g e ni ti ve ai m ! is
“
often e rro neousl
y su bsti tu ted for

W 5 W E T ( fo r W ) m m a fi a, t hey are g oi ng
But 3 1 mm own or of onesel f may
’
to co me to s ee y ou r honour . one s

he u sed as a l i ke th e ad ec ti ve
j al t l ar d an d the n i t can
' ’

no u n g oo .

he decli ned i n all the cas es ;a qi a r a r “ mi e o

,
we sh ou ld se e to

o ur o wn (peo ple ) W W ? h fi me sh o ul d keep what i s o u r o wn.

 16 5 ] P R ON OUN S . 87

Nata —
Some chang e ( an: i n th e crude-
form to un i ; wfi '
as
-
p relim (m esr) m fi fi
'
he cheated hi mself .

I II .
-T he R ela ti ve P rononn .

§ l 62 . T he R elati ve P rono un has a relati onal force, an d

a lwa s refers to som e o the r word or ph rase i n th e sen t n

y e ce

fi ll 53 " i ": i n" aft si tar mi

1 n
,
the boy who i nte nded to co me
h as com e I n the sen ten ce, s iri s a relati ve , referri n to a in
.
g g
”
a boy, foll owed by the de mo nstrati ve a?th at .

Nata a? i s deri ved from th e Sansk ri t at : who, chang ed to i t

—

the P rak gi t .

1 63 . T he l
re at ve i i ii ass um es th e fo rm s aft fe mi ni ne, and

a neuter, an d i s decli ne d li k e the ad ecti ve

j i n an .

1 64 T h ere are so m e relat i ve forms wh i ch are made u

.
p
wi th the hel p of the demon strati ve p ro no uns Sect . . 1 72
as, srar s uch as m of s uch k i nd as ; M r, W as mu ch

as , as
g reat as W m, M as m u ch as to each
p e rso n

fl aw érerzr,
‘
of t he n umber wh i ch
'
.
,

1 65 . T he l
r e at ve i p ro noun, tog ether wi th the nou n to
whi ch i t re fe rs, mak e s u
p one s en te nce, to whi ch anoth er is
j oi ned beg i n ni ng wi th th e Dem on strati ve pronoun a? that, so
that the rel ati ve ron o un h as the force of a conj unc ti on— th e
p
parti cle wh i ch j oi ns two sentences tog ether ; as sfi m an" '
.

W WW
"

m a (1 ) {fl "f rag? sti rs; (2) T he man who wi ll act

honestly may be eve n poor T he de m o ns trati ve wh i ch fol lows .

the relati ve i s call ed a correl ati ve W M .

S i ng u lar .

N am si t m who sfl f wh o 7 n whi ch
’
5
’ “

. . .

A ce . si rwhom sfl
‘
fi whi ch
‘

I nstr . w fi by whom fi at S ufi by wh i ch

Dat . S H IR T R -
W '

m a tte fi rm
- W ' -
H W
to whom to whi ch

th an wh om than whi ch
Gen . su m m . of who m fi rm m .
W Tm . of whi ch
Loo . s afer i n wh om i f!
“ a ll?!i n whi ch
Crude form W
 P R ON O UN S . 1 66

P lu r a l .

N am . i m who
“

. W f w h o s fl n whi ch
'
.

A cc fi wh om a n wh o m il fi wh i ch
‘ '
.

I n s tr . “ i n?by who m or whi ch

D at . sw -
im a to wh o m or wh i ch
A bl .
w i g s wa g? than wh om o r whi ch
-
”

Gen .
W ET m of whom or whi ch
.

Lac .
W 6 i n wh o m or whi ch
C ru de form a rt
'

IV .
-T he Demon s tr a ti ve Pr onou ns .

1 66 T he De mo ns trati ve P ron o un di re ctly poi n ts ou t the

.

word or ph rase to wh i ch i t re fe rs er gm thi s b oy ; eh m

that s er van t .

1 67 T here are two de mo nstrati ve pro nou n s , vi z , gr thi s,

. .

oi nti n g to an o bj ec t n ear th e s ea k e r, an d i i} th at, i n ti n

p p p o
g
t o a di s tant obj ect .

1 68 T he decle n s i o n a? th at, i s g i ven u nder the P er

“
. of
son al P rono un s

169 T he p ron o un 3 1 i s
. chang ed ? fem i ni ne,
to e and ?
n e uter , an d i s th u s decl i n ed

S i ng ular .

N am .
31 m thi s .
ifl f
'
. 3 n .

A th i {l
"
cc. 3 1 s s
"
I nstr .
ufi
‘
by th i s g
fi ! afi
Da t .
ma m -
warn to thi s e fm -
m fssm
- -
m - -
s m

A bl .
-
mg r W th an t hi s Fag
Gen . ma r m . of th i s fi aT
L ac .
u h i n th i s {re
-
C rude fo rm m 81 1
P lu ra l
N am .
3 the se m .

A cc 2 th ese m
‘
. .

I nstr . W y b th e s e

Da t .
- -
W H u i fl m to th ese '

A bl . ari a m g?
- !th an th e se
Gen El i !of th ese
“

L ac mi n i n these.

-
C ru de form m .
90 P s onouns . 1 73

form s , they si m l r etai n th e i r i ni ti al fi an d er

con s o nan ts, S r, a
'

py
ffl
a who ? m
ar GR IT, h ow ? 5 13 + fl m = w as ; fi t -
t
SN T H GT so

V.
—
T he I nte rrag ati ve P ronou ns .

q
'

1 73 . T he I n te rrog ati ve P ron ou n s are u s e d to fo rm ue s

ti o n s; a s ,
EFT“
!“ Ti ?who i s th e re W t GEM what doe s
h e wan t ?

1 74
1
T he i n te rrog ati ve prono u n s
. ar e i f ?! wh o ? si mlar
i

or W a r wh i ch o r what one ? ai m? o r a fi fl v
r a ny o ne 5511
‘
wh at fk éfl, fa ralafi h o w many ?
'

N ata — “ a
f f !i s deri ved fro m th e P r k ri t afir i , S k an: wh o 4
fi ? ' “

- -
.

o th er
-
aham ; F emfl h ow m any ? from S k GERr?and m .

fro m S k . fw
a n, P r ak r i t afi srr, (am H i ndi ) .

N ata —
M is co mposed of a ,
and o cc ur s i n p oetry .

I t i s al so com monly used i n th e Deck an , bu t f r t} i s

e no w p referred

to i t .

1 75 . T h e i n te rrog ati ve s are decli ne d i n t h e fol lo wi ng

m an ne r
1
( ) i f ”: w h o tak es SIT ; GEM wh o f fi rm
a to wh om

( )
2 m Ou
r m whi ch one ? i s i nflecte d i n the th ree
g en de rs , an d i s decli ne d l i k e the ad e cti ve
j i n an (S e c t .

3
( ) fi at?h ow m any ?re mai n s u nch an
g e d i n th e c ru d e— form .

4
( ) fi fi efi afi h o w m any ?i s decli ne d wi th an i n th e m asculi ne
‘

an d n e u te r, an d wi th é i n th e fe mi n i ne as fi fi fi h i ‘ " to h ow
‘

m an y m n . m m
to h o w many ( wom e n M an i s deri
ve d f ro m Emi l Q li d i d l i wi th
' '

é a n
Q }?
'
a n n s
, g re e s ec e n s o

B e fo re i n fle c te d n o u n s i t rem ai ns u n ch an g e d ; as fa wh m al fi
'

‘
é

E H ow m any m en di d th i s

( )
5 E mi r wh at ?i s i rreg ularly decl i n e d .
92 T H E vans . 1 76

1 76 B e s i de s th e i nte rrog ati ve form s g i ve n abo ve the re

.

are o the rs de ri ve d wi t h th e h e l p o f the dem o n s trati ve pro

n oun s : m h o w m any or h ow m u ch ; fi rm
.
,

m
,

h o w m u ch i n or der ?m , m m mm , of wh at
ki nd S e ct 1 7 1 . .

VI — T he I ndefi n i te P ron ouns .

1 77 . T he I n defi ni te P ron o u n s e xpre s s an i n defi ni te

g e n er ali t y . T h ey ar e th e s e : GEM ,
s om e on e , fi fi,
El fl an
y o ne ;
w , som e o ne 651 W ,
s o m e o ne ;m an
y on e 5 m m an y
a on e 31 WW I, tai n ; am w s o me
“

; 5 5 ,
S TR EET, a oe1 o ne , ,

p ar ti cu lar
pe rs on o r th i ng ; w ar am fi
t, both ; F a
fi s e ve r al ;

m , s o m eth i n
g, s o me m som e fe w tar: (aster
ava
a fe w A R M s o m e i n di vi du als o f a n u mbe r ; W , W .
81 1 an o the r ; W , “ T i ff, m u t u al , , W e ,
o th e r s ; m
3 1 W , G il W l l m O f th w d t h
‘
EBT Q ar n
'

, , a . s o e o e e s e o r s , o s e .

e ndi n i n sn decli ne d li k e the ad e cti ve s

j in an th o se
g ar e

in a! as s u m e an i n th e c ru d e -
fo rm ; an d th e res t r e m ai n

un ch an
g ed i n th e cr u de -
fo rm .

CH A PT ER XII .

T H E VER B .

T h e C l assi fi cati on of Verbs .

1 7s 1 87 .

§ l 78 . A ve rb i s th e ch i e f wo rd i n th e s en ten ce . an d

affi rm s bei ng, a cti on an d i ng of so me th i n g ;

’

su
fi p ers on or
'

ei

a ?
? on Go d i s (b e i n g) ; {Tm W R am a wal k s ; fi q‘ r q’'
i zfi
fl fi fi Go vi n da reads a book (acti on ) ; ant i 17
3 3 qf
r
8 i afl fi afi
‘ '

fo ur h u n dre d m en wer e k i lled

§ l 79 T he verb al mos t al wa s e x re s s e s acti on , and

.
y p
e speci all y th e chi e acti o n of th e m i n d, vi z th e as se r ti on or
f
den i al of a p ro
p o si ti on , an d it is c o n se
q u en tly cal le d m
an A CT I ON —
WOR D i n M arathi .
9 t r un vas e . 1 85

1 85 . T he M arathi verbs may be di vi ded a ccord i ng to thei r

s j ug a ti on i nto A uxi l i a r
y verbs, Defecti ve verbs, R eg ular or

I rreg u lar ve rbs, A noma lous verb s, I mp ersona l verbs , and Pas
si ve ve rbs .

(1 ) T he A u xi l i ary ve rbs are u s ed to mak e u

p t h e fo rms of

th e ve rbal T ens es and M oods as 11 1 "W S IT ? R am ai s wal k

i ng ; W 575 vrffi t I m u st g o .

( )
2 T he Defe ct i ve ve rbs are defi c i e nt i n so me form s of

j
c on u g ati o n ; as m I t i s W anted m It is n o t n ecessar
y .

( )
3 T he R eg ular verbs are conj u g ate d i n th e p as t tense i n
th e co mm o n way , an d th e I rre g u l ar i n an u nco m m o n way
as , a re W al k th ou , W H e walk ed, R eg ; err G o th ou , first
H e wen t, I rre g .

T he A no malous verbs ar e j ated i r re g ula rly i n

( )
4 con u
g
the constr u cti on s o r s i m;
w as , ( In m a r ti e r fi r m R am a has
l earn t h er l ess on .

(5 ) W h e n the T ran s i ti ve verb i s co n ug ate d j wi th i ts j

ob ect

as j
the s u b ect, it is call e d a P a s s i ve or S u ffe ri ng verb as, n?
a
fi
t g fi
'
T h e tre
'
e f e l l m 3 375} T h e tree was fe ll e d .

()
6 W h en th e i n tran s i ti ve ve 1 b i s co n u g ate d
j wi th o ut a

s ub ect , j i ts j
s u b ect bei ng con cea e l d i n i t, i t i s cal l e d I mp ersona l ;
-
m m m i c1 m m a? I was s i ck at th e s to m ach
y ester

day — I was aflecte d wi th n au se a .

1 86 . T he ve rbs m ay , als o, be di vi de d c
a cor di n g t o the
A gen ti a l i
r el a t on o f the s u b ect
j to the a cti on wh i ch th e verb

ex resses , an d con si de re d as A cti ve, P assi ve an d N e uter

p .

1 . W h e n th e verb r e pr esen ts th e s u b e ct
j as th e a
g en t or

d oor of th e acti o n e xpre sse d by i t, th en i t i s A cti ve as rm

R am a si ts ; W ( ffar
a i R ama eats br ead . T he
act i ve v erb may be ei th e r T ransi ti ve or I n t ran si ti ve .

2 . W h en the ve rb re 1 e sen ts
p th e s u b ect as a cted
j u
p on by
s om e o th er ag e n t, or by i ts el f, th e n i t i s P assi ve a s, u fi fi;

ffi fl fl l i fi t
i gf W ’ ‘
fi t? T h e R ohi llas were k i lle d by th e Eng li sh ;
3 11 3 T h e tree b reak s . S e ct 1 86 , .
 1 87 ] ms vane . 95

Nata — S t ri ctly speak i ng wh en th e sub ect of

j the verb i s acted u
pon
by i tself , i t i s di s ti nct from th e t rue Passi ve, wh i ch necessari ly i m pli es
f orei g n a g en cy T he for me r.m ay be c alled a verb o f th e M i dd l e

Voi ce, that i s, a ve rb the su bject of whi ch i s bo th the ag ent and the
ob ect o f
j th e acti on as, W (1 11 3 5; the doo r opened .

N te
o —
. S o meti m es the T ransi ti ve verb, wi th out any ch an e o f co n
g
j u ati on,
g h as t he fo rce of an I ntransi ti ve ; rm 8 M ?! ( I ! a , m
the Spray wi l l beat upon h i s veranda T he ve rb expresses the se nse
.

o f r ep eated o r vi g orous acti o n .

N ote .
— W h en th e T ransi ti ve verb e xpresses th e pe r fo r mance of

the denoted by i t i n a g ener al way , i t i s u sed i ntransi ti vely,

act
’

wi th ou t any ch ange of conj ugati on éfl W W ? he reads well

‘ '

{i t anti in ?
f 81 0
m mgr h e do es not at al l reci te badly .

3 . W he n th e I n trans i t i ve ve rb p re re s e n ts i ts j
s u b ec t as

nei ther the age nt o f the acti o n de no te d by i t , nor the obj ect
affe cte d by i t, th e I n t ran si ti ve ve rb i s call e d N e u ter as , m

trai t T h e tr e e fa ll s mi g a i t T he co w g o t l oose ; rm? sti rrer

Sui Edm ai s g oo d ; ( M T fl tT fi fl fl w ri t R amado e s n o t l ook well
“ ’
.

N ote — T h e . ve rb
w , g ot loose i n mi “

g r aft, the co w go t loose,

and “ a; fell i n m e qg ar, th e tree fell,
'

may be regarded as ve rbs o f

the A cti ve fo rm wi th th e P assi ve sense, li k e th e verbs of the M i ddle

Voi ce o nly th ose are I ntransi ti ve an d th ese T ransi ti v e

Note .
— C o rrespon di ng to these N e uter I ntransi ti ves th ere are A cti ve
T ransi ti ves a
e r to t l oose, { th at to l oose at?!to di e, Sufi to
as
g g e

ki ll “ at to fall, M to fel l fi F- fi og
t e t l oose, sw a
t to u nl oo se .

N ata — So m eti mes A cti ve I ntransi ti ves h ave a n eu ter fo rce i T‘

IT

g ra m i fl fit R é mé si ts on th e chai r, A cti ve ; m 3 gri m m

F
W , W a? W ET W ET fi T fi
‘
R é ma fi xed the nai l wi th a h am
mer ,
but i t was not ( or di d not g et ) wel l fi xe d .

§ 1 87 . T he las t th re e di vi si o n s of ve rbs , bas e d on t he

a enti a l r ela ti on of
g th e s ub ect, j are com m o n l
y de n om i nated
Voi ces or W .

N ot e . T hese di sti ncti ons, h o wever, r est i n many cases, i n S ans

kgi t as wel l as Greek , on pecu li ar concepti ons wh i ch i t i s di ffi cul t to
analy se or real i s e ; and i n S ans k ri t, as well as G reek , th e ri g h t u se

of the A cti ve and M i ddle voi ces i s best lear nt by p racti ce . T h us it

96 r u n vans . 1 88

t o lead, i s u sed as parasma i pada in s uch expressi ons as m he

c arri es o il a swell i ng ; bu t as at manep ada, i n h e t ur ns m m
away or di smi sses wi th wrath ; a s ubtle di sti nc ti o n whi ch i t i s possi ble
t o appreci ate when stated, bu t di ffi cul t to bri ng u nder any general

r ul es . V at -
M ul l er .

C H A P T ER X I I I .

T h e I nflecti on of Verbs .

1 88 21 6 .

1 88 . T he verb i s g i ve n i n the M arath i Di cti onary i n

wh at i s cal l e d i ts g erun di al for m , i e , it 18
g 1 ve n wi th the a
. .
p r

t i cle a affi xed to i t ; fl to do .

1 89 . A ve rbal root (mg) i s th e fo rm whi ch re mai ns afte r

the i f i s dr o ed as, ‘
mfi r to s tri ke 3 m: stri ke th o u
pp ; .

1 90 . T he ve rbal r oot, when e mpl oy ed t o p re di cate acti on

fa n o un , i s mo di fi e d, by m eans of certai n ar ti cl es, called

o p
p ers on a l -
endi n g ,
s to i ndi cate i ts relati on to th e n ou n . T hus,
the g e ru nd, m to speak ; th e r oot, i 175 speak th o u ; the
i nfle cted f 1 m, i 1 ? p k i fi mi r H ari
’‘
3 1 ! s e a s a

S p eak s w e si t i n is a
p e -
rsona l en di ng .

§ 1
. I . T h e p e rs o nal -
en di n s i n di cat e th e fol l o wi n
g g par .

t i cu l ars
1 -
T h e Genders (W k M asculi ne, F emi ni n e, and N eu ter .

2 . T h e N um bers (a rfl
i —
Si ng ular an d P l ur al .

3 . T h e P erson s (g fl
E —
thé Fi rst, th e S econ d, an d the
T h i rd .

4 . T h e T en ses (m ) —
th e P resen t, the P ast, an d th e
F u ture .

5 . T he M o ods ( h
Sh —
th e I n di cati ve, th e C ondi ti on al , the
S ubj uncti ve, th e I mpe rati ve, an d th e I n fi ni ti ve .

6 . T h e C onstru cti on s (ai nt

'
or P rayogas ) -T h e S ubj ee
ti ve, th e Obj e cti ve , an d t h e N e u te r .

7 . T he P ar ti ci pl es an d th e Ve rbal N ou n s (mam
fou r P arti ci ples , an d two Verbal N o un s .
 204 ] I N FLEC T I ON or r u n vans . 1 03

supposi ti on . T he samedati ve parti cle, on the other hand, by bei ng

u ni ted to a fu ture parti ci ple, expresses a purpose most e mphatically
as di m ( ai l
t -
H IN T,
21 5 ) h m he h as g one to lea rn .

5 203 3
( ) T he.S u bj u n cti vo de n o te s th e p p
r o ri e ty or i mp f e

i i f m m
i

p ri et of an ac ti o n !M ar i , fi ( flfi . ( '

y 3 !
w , a w ai t
'
m m w e s h o ul d q
ac ui re t hat

w h i ch has n ot bee n obtai n e d ; p re se rve t hat whi ch has bee n

q
a c u i red ; i n c rease t
ha t wh i ch h as b ee n
pre s erve d ;au d e xp e n d
i n g oo d wor k s what h as bee n i ncreased ( l fi t m m
fli‘ lfi l e t i t be sai d to W ho m thi s wo man sho u ld be g i ve n T h e
'

followi ng are th e i n flec ti o n s of t he s u b u nc ti ve :

j

S i ng u l ar . P l u ral .

arr-
rt su it sui t 8 mm
m m st rata w as arrears

arm w aft an? errant

N ote .
—
T h e monosyllabi c roo ts in q and f are ch an
g ed to at in
combi nati on wi th the s ub uncti ve su ffi x ;
j 3 lead t ho u ; a m (3 +
81 m m) it
. ou
g h t to be led ; tfl dri nk tho u ; W
'
it ough t to be
drunk .

N ote .
— T he s ub uncti ve
j te rm i nati on s 3 1 m , &c .
, are de ri ved from the
Sansk ri t parti ci pi al parti cle «a t denoti ng the sense o f fu tu ri t
y as well
as that o f o bl i ati on T h W i s c h ang ed to W i n P rak ri t and to
g e .

saw i n M ara t h i ,
c omb i ned w i th t h e p ri nci pal g en der t erm i nati o ns

N l T he P o tenti al Pas si ve parti ci pi al an

o a — al so swi and a
) m
d enotes that the acti on o r state e xpressed by the root or deri vati ve

base mu st or oug ht to be done or u ndergone T h e sense co nve ed

y .

i s that of fi tness, obl i gati on, o r neces si ty war a?!fl a

t I m ust do .

§ 204 .
( )
4 T he I mp era ti ve e x pre ss es co m man d, advi ce ,

exh ortati o n o r bene di cti o n

-
erm5sm w a m i nd our
'

, g a rr y
w
o n b u si n e s s
q y
u i e tl B IT? W W s i s ! m
‘ fi fl m a y t h e
‘

-
i
a d
P n avs obt a i n t eh i r k i n g do m t o -
da
y i ll! « 13 W t i t an raw ?
1 06 I N F L EC T I ON or T H E vans . 21 2

flected cas e o f th e o b ect

j i s th e A ccusati ve . C on s e q
u e n tl
y i n

the S u bj ecti ve co n s tru cti on , th e s u b ect j i s i n t he N omi nati ve

cas e, an d i n the Obj e cti ve co ns tructi on th e j
o b ect i s i n th e
A cc u sati ve cas e .

21 2 . Si n ce i n th e N e u ter co n s t ru cti on , th e verb ag re e s

n e i th er wi th th e j
su b ect n o r t he j
o b e ct , both th e n o u ns are

i nflected . T he i n flecte d su bj e c t i s u s uall

y i n t h e I n s tru m e n tal

case , a n d th e i n fl ec ted j
o b e ct i s i n th e Dati ve case Some .

t i m es th e i nflecte d su b e ct j i s i n th e Dati ve cas e .

N ote -I nflec ti on wh i ch i n real i t is a m u ti lati on , is a si g n of

.
, y
we ak ness, an d the i n flecte d su b e ct an d o b ect are
j j therefo re i ncapabl e

of i n flu en ci ng th e verb .

Obs — T h e P rayog as a re, stri c t ly spe ak i ng , a de par tmen t of

S y ntax, bu t we h ave ant i ci pated i t as i t i s i m possi bl e to u n ders tan d

the pri n ci pl es o f M arath i co nj g
u a t i o n w i th o u t so m e k n owl ed ge of i t .

TH E P a arl crrt ns A N D T H E V ER B A L N or ms .

21 3 . T he P a r tci p les are fo r m s deri ve d fro m verbs , an d

are chi e fly e m l o y e d to
p m ak e u
p co m p o u n d ten s e s . T h ey ar e

th e P resen t, th e P as t, th e F lu p erfect, an d th e F u ture .

1 . T he P rese n t P arti ci p le de no tes curren cy o f acti o n , an d

as su m e s a, at m
“
.
, Hi i m to m ak e
o r tr u
p i ts fo r m s ; a m wal k

th e n ; m , a men, a m t or $ 1 t , w l k i n g ; fl flTfl fl
a l “
; ‘ '

I am beati n g .

N ote P r esent P ar ti cip l e i n a, of wh i ch at, at and ai m ar e

.

modi fi cati o ns, i s der i ve d fro m th e San sk ri t p re sen t par ti ci pl e i n st q

{ to be + 3 fi =
m beco mi ng ; F
3 to co n
q + la
u er st =
m co n
q
u er

i ng T h e for m s i n at an d H F" are th e l ocati ves o f th e M ara h i ‘

.
t a
den o ti ng d u rat i on .

N e
t — T h e form s of th e P resen t t ens e are st ri ct ly s
pe ak i n
g ro
a
p
du ce d by affi xi n th e p -
erson al e n di n to th e P re sent Par ti ci ples,
g g s

and no t to th e roots, th e Par ti ci pi al t e rm i nati ons bei ng j oi n e d to

th e r oo ts ; as a m a a ma wal k i n g
+ = P re sent P ar ti ci pl e ) + 6 ?
"
sna ar h e walk s is eli ded i n un i o n
— '
. On e of th e a s .

2 . T he P as t P a rti ci p le i m pl i e s a
p as t acti o n , an d ass um es

h or W W1 ;
o
W m OP t sa ve d ; fir fi q
a v
% fi aq fi afl
'

m
(3? -
W 5?i i i fl o n a. cer tai n day sh e lay we e pi ng i n th e fo rest .
1
5 2 1 3 ] I N FLEC T I ON o r 1 ln . vans . 1 07

Note T he past parti ci ple m m i s deri ved from the Sansk rit past
—
.

rti ci ple passi ve a. chan ed i n Prék i t to Q t h h d P ak

p a g r us, first e ar . r .

at , an d Q ,
b ei n
g chan
g ed to a I n M arét h i as w e l l as i n S
. a nsk i
r ,t
the parti ci p le i s both acti ve an d passi ve i n sen se H a? i nt: h e went
there thi s was sai d by h i m T h e passi ve endi ng appl i ed .

t o verbs denot i ng moti o n, to i ntransi ti ve ve rbs, a nd a few oth er

r oots has an acti ve se nse ; u
r in h e we nt .
—
M r . A p te .

I n the S clavoni c lan g uages , the passi ve parti ci ple a i s t rans ferred
to the acti ve vo i c e,
“
wi th th e retenti on of th e meani n g of past ti me, ”

a nd i s also weak en ed to I, p robably by fi rst beco mi n h n d t d

g c a g e o .

In Pers i an i t i s usu al ly acti ve , and i n Geo rgi an , i t become s l .

—
B op p .

T h e P lup ei f ect P ar ti czp le den o tes

'

3 . an acti o n that tak es

lace be fo r ez th at m e nti o n e d i n the i n i l d m
p p r c
pa cau se , a n as s u e s

W h a vi n g g o n e ; t a
r nsit m t i t v w i vi a I w i ll g o

i nto th e p re sence of my u n cle, an d on my k nees beg pardon .

N ataT he P l uperfect P arti ci ple

—
i s deri ved fro m the Sans k ri t
i ndecl i nable parti ci ple a t, wh i ch i s q m i n P ra
ch anged k ri t
to ?! or

I n th e Prak ri t p rose, there “

m bei ng relaxed
are a few i n stances of a

to i t a s W ,for m y — C owell . .

T h e F u tur e P ar tzcz
p l th e i n te nti o n of th e
'

4 . e e xp ress es

a ent to do jth e ac ti o n den o te d by th e ve rb , an d tak es th e

g
fi rm i n a ti o n WIT or m ; 3 co me tho u ,
"r
a nt u bei ng abo ut to
com e
g er m an ? h e i s abo u t to co m e .

N ote . T he;F ut ure Parti ci p le WIT i s a m odi fi cati on of th e S ansk ri t

—

futu re r ti ci al form i n a or H R T h e S ansk ri t fo rm i s e m l o e d

pa p .
p y
both as a arti ci p le and as a n ou n o f a e nc , and th e M arah i t fo rm
p g y
i s als o u sed i n th e sam e manner . W hen th e M arath i p arti ci
p le is

used i n t he latter se n se, the fi n al a! i s l eng thened Ff?fl a nt 3 113 ,u

he i s abo ut to p s eak ;fl au
nt! a s peak e r. I n S anskr i t, as in M arathi ,
the fu tu re parti ci ple i s g eneral ly u sed wi th t he verb
”
to be, as Sk .

mafi a I w i l l g
, i ve , M i f! au
nt a q1i . .

No te . It is re
q u i si t e to observe h ere that, i n th e h i s tory of Ian

q
auages , th e case n ot u nfre u ent ly occu rs , t h at one and t h e same form
is m th e l apse of t i m e, spli t i n to seve ral, and th en t he di ti erent forms
'

l i d b th e s i r i t o f the langu ag e to di fferent word s T h i

are a
pp e y p u s, n .
'

‘
Sansk r i t, star fro m the base QTER , means both th e gi ver and he that
 110 oom nc art ou . 21 8

21 8 . T he verbal roots assu me th e p e -

rs on al e n di n s
g in
T wo way s they e i ther modi fy thei r termi na ti ng vowels before
t a ki ng t he personal-
endi ngs , or r ema i n u n cha n ed
g bef ore them .

21 9 . T he radi cal fo rm of th e verb, wh e th er m o difi ed, or

un m odi fi ed, is cal le d, in referen ce to th e erso nal e ndi ngs, -

p
the base ( m)
sf .

220 . T he ve rbs accordi n g to th ei r ba s es are di vi ded i nto

T W O class es o r C ON J UG A T I ON S , vi z .
,
th e F I R S T C ON J UGA T I ON and

the S EC ON D C ON J UGA T I ON .

l . T he Fras r C omm un '

i on i n cl u des all th ose verbs whi ch

do n ot change i n the bas e ; as, r oot, am wal k th o u ; base,
W th e sam e as th e ro ot ; p rese nt
p arti ci l e a r
e a walk i ng
, p , .

2 . T h e S EC ON D C ON J UGA T I ON i ncl udes all t h ose ve rbs whi ch

a ssum e i i n the bas e as , r oo t, fli t do th ou base ,
‘
rese nt arti c i l Eh l lfl do i ng
'

p p p ,e .

N ote . — T he i n te rmedi ate i , wh e n sho rten ed, as wh e n the pe rsonal

e n di ng has an i ni ti al l o ng vo wel , h e does ) i s
u sual ly omi t ted in co nver sati o n, bu t i t sh o uld ne ver be eli ded i n wri t
i g
n . T he i l li terate affi x it e ven to verbs of th e fi r st con ug ati o n
j for
‘

i nstan ce, th ey woul d an d even fi rsfi fir for fi nd? he

'

sav ,

speak s.

at h i co n u gati on s corres o n d to th e Sans k rit

T h e two M j
'

Na a
t — ar
p
I nt rans i ti ve ) P a r as mai p ada ( T i i
A l ma nep ada ( a nd rans t ve ) j
co n u

g ati ons . T he di s ti nc ti ve i of th e seco n d co n ug ati o n

j ch aracte ri s es

th e co rrespondi ng Sanskri t co n u g ati on, vi z

j th e P ar as ma i p a da . T he
i th ri g i nal p
-
erso nal e n di n th e San sk ri t (r bei ng pr o duced fro m
3 s e o g ,

- of at be fore i t T he g i s a re m nant o i fi t,
'

i t by th e i nserti on the
“
.

weak ened fo rm of th e sy llabl e n whi ch i n S ansk ri t an d Z e nd l i es

at th e fou ndati on of the o bl i q ue cases of t he si mpl e p i o uo u n as i ts
th eme .
— B opp .

N ata — I n g e neral, h o we ver , th e Sansk ri t l ang uag e, as i t at p resent

“

exi sts, di sposes of both forms i n an arbi trary m an ner O f th e cog nate .

l ang u ages, o nly th e Z en d, the G reek , an d th e G o th i c h av e re tai ned

th ei r p ri mi ti ve fo rm a ra
”
.
—
B op p . In M h
t i th e ve rbs re
g u larl
y
c on form to th ese p ri n ci ples j
o f con u g ati on .
 222] com m arms . 111

221 . T he M arath i ve rbs are th u s arran

g e d u nder the two
C o nj ugati on s
T s s F m sr C ON J UGA rmN '
.

A ll I n tra ns i ti ve ve rbs N ,
IN N ?he s i ts .

l
'
2 . A ll A n oma lous ve rbs ; a rt
e
, th an? h e learns .

3 . A ll P oten ti a l ve rbs m , w I ca n do i t .

4 . A ll M on os y l la bi c ve rbs, wh e t h e r tran si ti ve or i ntran

i
’

s i ti v e, and a ll the verbs endi n

g i n a( e x?
c e
ptfi efi r to w ri te ), i n

t he p resen t tens e only i i i? he g i v e s ; ,

h e see ms bu t m
-
73 3 , fi fevii h e wri tes .

T u n S eco s n C o m ue ar um .

1 . A ll T r an s i ti ve ver bs si ts , Emi l ‘
h e loo ses .

2 . A ll the ver bs en di ng i n g , i n the p ast tense

.

it r em ai n e d

222 . T he -
P erso nal e n di ng s for both the C onj ug ati ons are

al i k e , ex ce
p t th o se of th e I n di cati ve P as t H a bi t ual an d Fu t ure
te ns es .
( S e ct .

P aradi g m a .

F rasr C ON J UGA T I O N .

‘
R oo t $ 3 B as e 3 1 s ; I ri s e .

I u mcar l vs M o on .

P resent T ense Ka r ta ri P r ayoga ) .

S i ngu lar .

N .

fi sfi I rl s e

a
’

a “ ?!th ou ri sest

f
i !afi he, sh e, or i t ri ses
{ r3 3
f 3

1 .
3 1 78 “ m7 we ri se
2 3 3 3 i y ou ri se m
“
.
.
,

3 .
3 m mm .
, sat 3 3 3 13 1 1, i fm n th ey ri se
1 14 co m mu te s . 22 2

P a st W !m .
, m m . ri se n

P luperfect 3 h avi ng r i se n
3
3
F u tu re W bei n g abo u t to ri se

G E R UN D .

M to r se , o r r i s n
i i g
S UP l N Es .

Dat mm mm m am m fl fi l to ri se or fo r u i
-
' ’

. 3 3 or 33 , or s n g
Gen . a tar i o r m w ri to
va i i
r s e , o f ri s n i g

S EC ON D C O N J UGA T I ON .

R o ot B ase firs}? firfifi fi I br eak '

I N D IC A T I V E M o on .

P resen t T ens e Ka r ta r i Fra g/09 a

Si ng ul a r .

M . F . N .

‘
fi fi rfi ffi Wl ‘
fl 1 br eak
’

1 ’ ’

2 .
i fifi
i t
'

c fi fl g; fi rfisfie
’
i fi lfl ém t
th ’
o u b reak e s t

8 5T i fl filfi fi flfir ? ,
s t h h i t brea k s
' ’
. e s e o r

P lu r a l .

1 . mf?m
e We break
2 .
gai t my o u bre a k m f n .
, .

3 a, ear, Efi fii fi m th ey br eak
‘
.

P ast T en se Ka r mani P rayoga

M . F . N .

- ‘
tfifg a r m m
.
f . M n .

I brok e hi m h er or it)
m
, ,

fi rfi a m
’
f M
' ‘
. . n .

I brok e (th e m m f, , .
, . n .
)
m m M rf
. .
filfi fi
'

n .

th o u br ok es t (h i m , h e r, or i t)
fi fs fi m
’’ '

f m#. W T .

th ou br ok est (th e m )
W fi W u .

h e sh e or i t bro k e (hi m h e r or i t )
, , , ,

h e, s h e , or i t brok e (th e m )
116 CO N J UG A T I O N . 22 2

P as t H a bi tu a l (Ka r tari P ra o a)
y g .

S i ngu la r .

M . F . N .

t il I u se d to break
f
i m th o u u se ds t to bre ak

FIT, i i i , 3T he, s h e , or it u sed to break

P lu ra l .

snuff i n; we u s ed to break

El m y ou u s e d to break
i f, a n, i f? m th ey u se d to break

C O N DI T I O N A L M oo n .

W ere I to break , or h ad I brok e n

I wo ul d break , or wo uld h ave brok e n

S i n g u l ar .

M . F . N .

i l fiTTfs Ffi
t
'
’ i fi m I ll tfifi fi had I brok en ' ’

‘
m m
‘ ' \ 0\ N

fi fi af s i i s h ads t th o u brok e n
i r sfi rrr a u s

a?ti ff? " fi l fil m 3 Wfi é fi had h e , {sh e , o r i t br o k e n

P lur a l .

M . F . N .

st ra it m a! h
‘
”
ad we brok e n

g et?ti i
r s ai h a d y o u b r o k e n

m m, i i i fi ffis Ffi had th e y brok en

‘ ’

a a a rr t i f
r s z
' '
'
y

S UBJ UN C T I VE M o o n .

Karmani P r ayog a .

S i ng u la r .

I, th ou , o r
i m m he , sh e, o r i t
te fi f f I ? S i
'

,
g fi
.
i t
” H M n , n
g . .

ha
m s m urf . arm ?n q
.
, . .

fifigg , g
s h ou l d break .
 118 C O NJ UGA T I O N . 22 3

G ri mm ) »
firs ? to b reak , break i n g
t

S u p rn ns .

Da t firs t!“. or fi rm ; “ W or i te m to break

Gen . or to be brok e n

C H A P T ER XV .

C ON J UGA T I ON - c0 n ti n u e¢ l .

1 . T h e C au sal Verb .

223 28 0

223 . T h e C au sal V e rb i s der i ve d by affi xi n

g 3 11 7 to th e
r o o t of th e M arat hi ve rb as

ar q qfi I cau se d i t to be brok e n 1 84
'

f
’
r
g
'
t . .

224 . T h e C au s al Ve rb , be i ng , i n al l i ts fo r ms, es sen ti al l y

tran si ti ve, i n vari ably fol lo ws th e S econ d C o nj u g at i on .

S EC ON D C O N J UGA T I O N .

I N DI C A T I V E M oo n .

P r esen t T ens e

f fi g fifi fi I i t to be b rok en
'
'
tr t cau se .

S i ngu l ar . P l ura l .

m zrrfi fi fi rm
l
3 Fi l , Ffl, m f
' ' '

c
, ,
,

P a s t T en s e .

Ixarma ni P rayog a
’

“ IT I cau s e d i t to be bro k en .

( I mm f
m
3 u
.
, ,

S i ng fi r -
m , Fi t -
; 3: n
f
2 m m f ;
. . . .

—
P l u firg fi fis m f
.
, ,
!r
r arr n
'
. . . .

j h m m
.
s
a 3 u ,

l l st ra fi m
'

m
a
2 f
'
s s e
L mfi t m f
'

“ 3 s ,
 224 ] C ON J UG A T I ON . 1 19

B la i ne I ’
r ag oga .

a n or F fl
‘
K W I cau s e d i t to be br ok e n .

S i ng ul a r a nd P l ur a l .

F u t u re T ense .

t fi firg ’ -
ffi r I sh all ca u se i t to b e bro k en .

S i ng u l a r . P l ur a l .

l . t fi fi rg afla
' '
72 mi ?$ 3 1 n.

2 .
i tfi g fi i flfi
’ ‘ '

§ fi
Rfll m n .

i t wa ffl fi rsfi i fi e
‘
3 . si r, a s s e s s , .

P a st H a bi tu a l .

r fi th ei r I us ed to c a u se i t to be bro k e n .

S i ng u l a r . P l ur a l .

f?fl e w ?m f , “ refi firs g m f l,

'

1 . I .
'
.

w
,

2
i fi fi l fl m f
'

. .
, n.
‘
si n efh é firs at t m ari nd ) ?
'

3 . a

C O N DI T I ON A L M o o n.

l st Si ng fl firefi éi h ad I cause d i t to b e b ro k en I sh o u l d
' ‘
. t

have cau se d i t to be brok e n .

S i ngu l a r .

i l firs fi ai m fi -
'

1 . t .
fe é?n .

2 .
i fi s fi m a fl fq -
ifi n .

3 .
’ -
fi r fi t 3?firs fi wrm Fi r . n .
, , ,

P l ur a l .

1 .
-
3 mmfi s ts( ii .

3 a n i f? he m -
rm - arrJ
’ -
eff n
“

a, t ,
.
,
.
s .

S UB J UN C T I VE M o on .

Ka rm a ui P r ay og a .

l st S i ng . n or
a ar
mm n
a I may or mi g ht cau s e i t to be
1 22 C ONJ UGA T I ON P OT E N T I A L vans . 23 2

m hfi q
rw r
'

R ama to do th e wo rk , C a usa l
'
ti r g
'
—
cau ses ~ y t

a
g ft
r it a n arfl fi fi
'
a Vi th u ca u se s R ama to g et t he w ork do n e
by Go vi nd, — Uouble C au s a l .

23 2 . T he s ub e ct o f j t he c a u sal verb
,
wh e n de n o ti ng i nd i
r ect a en cy, i s i nflecte d by the p o s tp osi ti on by m ean s o f,
g
wh i le the di rect ag e nt may be ei th e r i n the n o m i na ti ve or th e

i nstru men tal case {Tm W i g? m e W ? R ama

e wroug h t
won de rs by t he ag ency of t he m on k eys er ge m 81 W
‘

W it mfi arth i s boy cau ses h i s broth e r to fi ll wate r

‘
n
I u

“ a 8 TH !fi fi lfi fi th e n ur se p u t th e chi ld to s le e p q
r? {LB W
' '

t 3
W t “ (fi r the n u rs e seats th e ch i l d i n the C ll tt l l ‘
.

I n Sanskrit the s u b ec t of th e si mp l e verb i s pu t

N ot e —
j in th e
i nstru mental case i n the cau sal fo rm as (m? ma? ma fi a R am a
m?m
' ‘
abando ns h i s wi fe C ausal , a tr r r
t fl
r a afir he mak es
R ama aban don hi s wi fe .

N ote .
-Et vmolo zi cally t he Passi ve and C ausati ve fo r ms are ali ke
but th ei r d ‘
i n form and sen se, co nvey p resent i flere nce of sense only

by th ei r forms j
of con ug ati on an d con s tru cti on W i th a to re a n a en t
g g .

2 . TH E P OT EN T I A L V ER B .

T he P o te ntial Ve rb i s deri ve d fro m th e s i m pl e v erb

a ffi xi n g i f t o th e R oo t wal k tho u
-
by i l7 6 arz e a
rr r ,
s W
-
am ti I can walk .

23 k T he Po tenti al Ve rb, wh eth er tran s i ti v e er i n tran

s i ti ve , is of th e F i rst C onj ug ati o n, an d does n ot t a k e f to m ak e
u
p i t s base; s tu nt t h e i r? I can u nloose i t a m m e e:
r
1 was able to u n loo se i t .

23 5 . T h e Po te n ti al Ve rb ne ver tak es th e Ka rtari con

s tr uct i on , wi th the s u b e ct j i n th e n o mi nati ve cas e , b ut on ly th e

K ar mani or th e B ha ve, wi th t h e s ub ect j i n the da ti ve or i n t he

i ns tr u men ta l form der i ved f rom the g eni ti ve case ; arm or am
“ fi t I ca n s i t ; w rar o r w rfl rrfi arrest W h e can eat
bread 5 fi rs t 0 1 fil ‘fl fi 3 T W W ’ '

W s he co u l d read

th i s w h ol e book U nar or t mrzzrfi

l
M 11 33 3 5 R ama coul d
“

catch th e thi ef .
 23 8] C ONJ UGA T I ON ~
P OT EN T I A L vans . 1 23

N ote — I h Sanskrit the P otenti al P assi ve Parti ci ple has the agent
e i ther i n th e g e ni t i ve or the i nstrumental case m o r i n
$ 15 3 3! or (ba h ?gfi :B ari sh oul d be worshi
pp e d by m e I n P ra .

k ri t th e g e n i t i ve i s changed to the dati ve H ence th e case of th e .

M arath i P ot e n ti al i s ei ther the dati ve, or the i ns t ru mental deri ved

"

f ro m t h e g eni t i ve m or M m 1 can walk . I n Sansk rit

t h e s ubject i s ne ver put i n the dati ve case .

23 6 . T he P ote nti al i nt ran si ti ve verb al way s tak e s the

B have co n s t ru ct i on, an d th e tra n si ti ve, ei th er the Karmani
i
or th e B la ne

23 7 . It is on ly when th e ob e ct
j denotes a ers on ,
p that
t h e p ote nti al t ransi ti ve ve rb t ak es t he B hé ve co ns tr ucti on,
o t h e rwi se i t i s habi tuall co nj u ate d i n the Kar ma ni
y g .

I n poetry th e si mple i nstrumen tal i s somet i m e s u sed for

N ata —

t h at deri ved fro m th e g en i ti ve W ?fl W 3 3 !5 W

T t/
a «fr o m.
23 8 . T he A no malou s i n th ei r potenti al fo r ms , tak e
ve rbs ,

e i th e r th e “ have or th e Ka rma n i con str ucti on, li k e th e o rdi

n ary t ran s i ti ve pot ent i al s
S i m p le A nom l
a ous — ii
I trg r N a i f I l earnt the le sso n Kar
t ar i P r u y og a .

P otent i a l A noma l o us war o r W “ I fi rm er I co u ld

l e arn the l e s s on Ka rma n i P r a yoga w or m m !( am

?
h i m (B la ne P r ay og a)
i

fi n ?
e I co u l d teach .

P aradi g m .

I N DI C A T I V E M o on .

P res ent T ens e (B lai ne P r ay og a ) .

m ufi or fi rst W I can W 3 1k ; m i l fi or am a rm s
I can break .

2 .
g za
z fi ‘
or

W mm m ,u
{ W
or
6 I ntra ns .

fi f flfi or h al f .
1 24 C ONJ UGA T I ON — P OT EN T I A L vs an . 23 8

(Ka r mo w P r a t/e o
'

g .

m qfi M ) m I . can break .

l st S i ng .
m afi or H GT W I co u ld wal k , I a tr o u s .

W flfi HS T 31 3 1 35 I co u l d break , T r a nt
’
Ol . .

Karm ani P r ay oga .

l s t S i ng . qrzqfi or WET fi re arm m I . co u ld break .

m an?! or m

Fu tu re T ense.

S i ng .
m qfi or H GT W a
s . I s hall be able to wal k .

m qfi or wa r I shal l be abl e to break .

M . F . N .

w fi
‘’fl
e, El a I n tr ans
or fi st
r
.

8 . ratt an o r a lte r
1 26 C ON J UG A T I ON — P OT E N T I A L van s . 23 8

S UBJ UN C T I V E M oo n .

B h é ve P rayoga .
)
l s t S i ng . ma n? or W w fir I may or m i g h t, sh o u l d o r

wo ul d be abl e t o wal k .

mm or wa r firs t"? I m ay or mi g h t , or sh oul d , o r

w o ul d be abl e to bre ak .

Karmani P rayog a
l s t S i ng .
m ar? o r W fitm rI mi g ht or sh o ul d or wo uld
be able to b reak .

1 m ufi war
l
. or

2 .
W or
g a r

3 S i ng .
m i f !
“

P lu M - -
fi W i r
-
‘
a
mu
s m et?" ti or

sw n
a ?!o r
5 1
mm
a i w fi or a im J
I M P ER A T IVE M oo n .

a m or m W I let me be cap abl e of walk i ng .

RE flfi or W t le t me be ca bl e f break i n g
pa o .

m afi or ear

ga
r ms or
g a r

W flfi or W !
5 mm I nt : a ns
fi w fi or fi t?"
.

xfi g ar T r a ns
’
' '

-
.

m or SWE E T
arma r

W ?! I 01
gm
sa fa ri s 01
'
cai ar
v

P A R T I C IPL ES .

P r esent W 6 ,
“

fi rm er, w as, g ra mmar bei ng ca

p abl e of

w alk i ng , I ntr a ns .
 23 9 ] C ONJ UGA I ION — A N OM A LOUS vans
’ ‘
. 1 27

P resen t mm a , firm , “ fl at, fire wai m bei ng ca

p able of

bre ak i ng , T r a n s .

P a st m
ar r t
es -firm h av i ng b e e n ca p ab l e o f w a lk i n g
firm -3 m h av i n g b e e n ca
p ab l e o f br ea k i n
g
G s aUN D .

M to be abl e to b reak , T f a ns
‘

W e?to be a bl e to wal k , [ al f o ns .

N ata — T he P oten ti al forms fro m th e Subj u ncti ve mood down

wards a re ra rely u sed, but are g i ve n s i m l
py for reference .

3 . TH E A N O M A L O US VE R B .

23 9 T he A no malo u s Ve rbs g j
are con u ated i ntrans i ti vel
.
y,
i . e .
, i n th e fi rs t C o nj ug ati on 1 8 5, as , i f?W m sh e

has learn t h er le ss on . T h ey alway s tak e th e S u bj ecti ve or

Ka rta r i co nstruc ti on . T he follo wi n g are th e ex ce

p t i o n s

1 . I n t he S ubj uncti v e m ood t h e A n o m al o us Verbs tak e

Ka rm a nz or
i
the B la li ke
'

the ne con stru cti o n , the o th er

transi ti ves ra n i t?t i t: were" I sh oul d l earn t hat book .

2 . I n th e Po te n ti al for m , th e A nomal o u s Verbs tak e th e

Karma ni or t he B lzd ve co n s tru cti on , 23 8 a s, m or
W
a?M w I co u l d l e arn that bo ok .

N ata — A ll the ve rbal ter mi nati ons deri ved from th e

Sansk ri t pas
si ve i i le retai n the i r sy m athy wi th th e s ufferi n b
part c p p g o
j ect w i th
whi ch they, by thei r natu re, a ree, an d
g hence these parti cles, when
ever they are affi xed to transi ti ve ver bs, fo rce them to ag ree wi th
the w h ate ver mi g h t be
ob ect , h ei r i nci dental l i ari ti es
j t pe cu T he .

a t a ti ci l e at has lost m uch of i t s o ri gi n al passi ve character and

p s p r p
ener
gy , a n d i t con seq y
u en tl do es n o t exe rt an
y i n flu en ce u p on such

i rregular fo rms as the A no malous verbs ; wh ereas the su bju ncti ve and

potenti al par ti cl es are not s o commonly used i n the l ang u age as m

and have not, therefore, lost any of th ei r ori gi nal
p assi ve force .

I N DI CA T I VE M oon .

P resent T ense .

m ? ( not W at ) I learn
i

l s t S i ng . a?R .
1 28 C O J UGA T I ON
N — A N OM A L OUS vans . 24 0

P a st T ense .

Ka rl a r i P rayog a not t he Karma n i or B lai ne .

l st S i ng . i ii mfi a? I l
a earn t

Fa tu re T e a se .

‘
I n S i ng . i l fi fi fi
t
“ '
n ot fi rai h I sh all le a rn

P a st H a bi t ua l .

‘
fi réfi l
'

fl fi ri n ot I u se d to l earn
'
t

C o nnrrro mu . M oo n .

W
'

l st S i ng .
?fi
a r efl ai h ad I l ear nt ( not )
S U BJ UN C T I V E M o o n .

B lai ne P r ay og a .

l s t S i ng . f arfi lm ? I s ho ul d o r o u h t
g to l earn

Ka r ma n i P r ay og a .

1 st Si ng .
t ar rfi ar m m I sh ou ld
. or ou g h t to lear n

IM P E R A T IVE M oo n .

l st S i ng il fi fi fi le t me l earn
“ '

. t

I n r nu r rvs M oo n .

fi r? to learn
P A R T I C I P L ES .

P resen t W , Im
’

, F m , fi rarm e learni ng
P a st -i m learn t
Q atar a or l ear ne d
P luperfect W havi ng l earn t
F u tu re m be i ng abo u t to learn

Dat . Em ma a t or ti ta ni um — —
arr
-
Gen . W ET o r F arsi m m

24 0 T h e followi ng the A nomalo u s verbs

§ are

l ang uag e
13 2 w e A UXI L I A R Y vane s . 24 2

24 2 . We g i ve be lo w tw o i r re ul a r
g ver bs co n u g ate d
j in
th e va ri ou s ten s e s

mt do T ra ns i ti ve Ver b
P resent T e nse .

S i ng u lar . P l ur a l .

"
t fl I do fi rst} aflfi fi i we do
P a s t T e nse .

i ii e r r at a? I di d W fi w e di d

5 g fi
“
i or a n 1 7
“
tho u di ds t t
'

y o u di d
$ 5; h e di d midi 56 3 th e y di d
3

F u tu re T e nse .

S i n gu la r . P l ura l .

ii fi fl I sh al l do d?a t we sh all do
‘ ' '
i Efl 3 1r

r
i m ?! th o u s h a l t do g gfl m y o u s h a l l do

?W he s h a ll do T W l fil ai l ti la they shall ’ ' ‘

F
'

a
'

, ,

at Go In tra ns i ti ve Ve r b) .

P r esen t T ens e .

fli s
’
mii I go snuff 3 1 6i “
we g o
P as t T e ns e .

t fifi ‘
I we n t an d? we we nt

3 31“ th e n w e n te s t
Q ui t W y o u w en t
i f? M he we n t, m . 3!7T?! they we n t m ,
.

F u tu re T e nse .

i
i
fi 3 71 ? I shall g o

sm ha t h o u sh a l t 85 0 ” St e
i g o, .

C H A P T E R XV I .

T h e A uxi li ary V erbs .

§ 24 3
24 3 T he verbs em pl oy ed to m ak e u th e co m nd
.
p p o u

f or ms o f th e T e n s es an d M o o ds ar e call e d A uxi l i ary or h elpi ng

verbs 3 th u s, new i fi I m u st g O it is i
'

n e ce s sar s
; y,
 134 r m : A UX I LIA R Y vas es
f§ 25 3

25 3 . an ? i s o mpl o vo d to ex
p re s s t h e e x i s te n ce o f ob ec t s j
well th e i r p rope rti e s rm
°

as as Gi ff 811 C R a ma is at h om e ,

exi s ten ce ( Wt mm R am a is W i se , p p ro ert y . B ut t h e

form i n i n: i s u s ed o n l
y fo r affi r mi n
g q
u al i t i e s of j
o b ects
3I
3 W m o
mm a ai ry
g m: men in the p ri n c i pal i n s tru
m e nt fo r e ffe c ti n We
’
g m a n s sa l vat i o n i s fai th . can not sa y

i ?(fi t m , b u t {fr (F3 he i s h e re .

25 4 T he p re s e nt fo rm i n Em i r h as u s ual l th n f
.

y e s e s e o

the p re s e n t h abi t u a l o r th e
p re s e n t co n ti nu at i ve
; rm swa n?
m R am a i s u s u al l v i ll .

25 5 . we g i ve be l o w t h e co n u j g a ti o n of th e v e rb a m
t o be

I xm e A T i n : M oo v.

P rese n t T ens e F i rst Form .

S i ng u la r . P lu ra l .

3 . i ii , i f}, a a ” ? he, s he, o r I t is fir, ( Q T, fi r W th ey a re

N ot e — T h ese fo rms are deri ved fro m th e San sk ri t p res ent f o rm o f

th e ver b
“
to be . T he i n flecti on s of th e habi tu al pas t o f the fi rs t
c on ug ati on are co mbi ned
j w i th t h e fi rst p erso n s i ng u l ar of the p r e

s e nt tens e

Sk . sati n P i nk , . sum ,
0 . M . Su i , M . si ft .

P lu r a l .

l . 3 1 13 w e? we
2 . 3 773 3 th e n ar t =
-
m et yo u are sni l sfi
- z

3 . an ? h e i s zz i fl r
t
' ’
r
a Q
'

S WEET th e y are W FSI H :

'

T h e fo rm s i n O ld M ar at h i co rre s pon de d m o re closel y w i th

th e S an sk r i t fo rm s of th e pr e se n t

S i ng . Sk . e ; 1 am
ar P rak . 51 m , 0 . M .
wi t
2 . Sk . a ft th o u ar t, P r ak . 31 133 O M , . . wfi s
3. Sk . at r a i
“

h e i s, P rak . af fi x]; O M . . Su fi :
136 T ue A UX I L I A R Y venue . 25 5

"
l ntu re T e ns e .

i f 3 1 3 3 I s hall or w i ll be .

S i ngu lar .

l . ‘
fi afi fi I sh all be
2 . r
i m e! or W tho u s hal t be
3 . i t , ti l . 3 W he , sh e , o r i t sh all be

P lu ra l .

an d ? w s ha l l be
3 1 1 e

2 fl t st a rs ou s hall be
.
g y
3 .
a a n, a,
sm i te th e
y s h al l be

N ata — T h e form a w i
at s i s no t so o l d as 3 1 3 m , but i t s u al lv

u sed at p res en t .

P ast H a bi tua l .

i f 3 13 I used to be or u s ua ll
y was .

S i ngu lar ,

"

qf I u s u al ly wa s
’

an !

1
f m th o u u s u all
y w as t

at) “ a he r 8 11 0 , 0 1 i s
'

P lu r a l .

W we u s ually we re
2 . 3 3 6 y o u us u ally we m
3 . 3 ,
c ar, 3 ?3 1 3 3 they us u ally we re

C O N D I T I O N A L M oo n .

we re I , had I bee n, _o r wo u ld be, or would ha ve

S i n g u lar . P l ura l .

1 . at 3 1 3 3? m i f 3 a. an d ? wa s?m , f . .

2 0
i a "l "
,
‘
fi fl fq ll .

w “ M im , 3 e 0 ll .

3 3 1 61 3 m
a narm f .
 8 r un A UXI L IA R Y vas es . 25 6

I N FI N I T I VE M oon.

“ 3 to he usu al ly .

P A R T I C I PLE S .

P resent 313 3 ,
3 mm sm ut , ,
a m bei n g
P as t . SI R E ? m
“
. 81 3 3 55? m been . .

PM . 81
1 3 h avi n g bee n .

Fut . W abo ut to be .

G E R UN D .

m at to be or bei ng .

S UP I N ES .

II T he verb ifi to beco me
‘
. .

25 6 . T hi s verb is re ularl
g y con ug ate d, j e xcep t in th e

p ast ten se .

N ote g.
?3 —Is de ri ved from th e S an sk ri t verb 3! to be or t o become
brough th e P rakri t .

I DI C A I I V E M oon
‘‘
.

P resen t T ense

S i ng u lar . P lu ra l .

ii i dri ll I b ecome Wi g?fi fi t we beco m e

3 $ 17 3 3 tho u beco mest fi s?(7
r t
3 ?y o u b e co m e

3 ?ad? he becom es
If?(13 sh e beco mes ) 3 ,
Ii i 613 7 3 th ey b ec o me

3
L ( 73 i t bec o m es J
P as t T ense .

S i ng ula r .

fi
t I became

i m f
.
the n be cames t

m m .
, h e be cam e
i f?fi rst?f . sh e becam e th ey became
L3 {11 3 n .
,
i t became
§ ]
256 ms L
A UX I I A R Y v anes . 1 89

F u tu re T ense .

i f?i i i ? I s hall beco me an d?(TS: we sh al l becom e

fi
lm ( tflfl ) tho u shal t
w h ll beco me
'

“
'
or y o u s a

be co me
},
a 3 i ri s:he , she, o r i t wi l l 3 , m , If? they shall

be come becom e

P as t H abi tua l .

I . I f?f r?I u se d to beco m e W tfi we u se d to be come

2 .
i 0h r th o u use ds t to become g uf?m y o u u s e d to beco me

3 .
3b 3 b 3 fif h e, she, or it 3 , W , i f i t! th ey use d to
u se d to beco me become

C O N DIT I ON A L M o o n .

were I to become , or wo ul d beco me, or have becom e .

S i ng u la r . P l ur a l .

1 fil fi fi m 3 f r o
r 3 n W i la
l ,

2
1m m, “ ti -
fifl n
gna w
3 ?a?" m 3 $ 3
nem f
.

3 a .

3 q
0

fi n i ll Cl i ff
’
.

S UBJ UN C T IVE M o on .

Karl am P ra yoga )
'

f r8m" I may, m i g ht, co ul d, w ou l d , or sh o u ld becom e or

have beco me .

S i ngu lar . P l u ra l .

1 &m W m i
at
r n . m ay ?m .
w fi e ff
, ,

i m ’
a m” M f g m i en .
f i l m .
-
m, M fr ?”

a?
i t em ?

'
( B ha ze
'
 14 0 nu : L
A UX I I A R Y vns ns. 25 7

I M PERA T I V E M oon .

i f i re. let me become .

2 : W W
3 . fl ai r“ ) 3 M . T, 37 3 3 3

I N FI N I T I VE M oon .

i re, to beco me .

P A R T I C I PL ES .

P resent i f“ , im m o
, fi at, m beco mi n g
P ast ma r m , 1 11 3 s ? m , beco me
'

. .

P lup erf ect havi ng beco me

F u ture (Tum: abo ut to beco me

G E R UN D .

$ 3 to become.

S UP I N ES .

D at g er m -
m ; t raw m to be co me
s -

m
.

Gen .
M '
i s to beco me

25 7 . W e g i ve below the N eg ati ve fo r ms of to be and

3 73 to co m e.

I . T h e N eg at i ve F or ms of wai f to be .

I N DI C A T IVE M oo n .

P resen t T ens e .

Fi rst form , co rre s pon di n g to

S i ngu lar . P lu r a l .

l . t fl flTfi I am
‘
n ot W mfi we are not
2 1 m m th o u ar t no t W ‘
fl fi y ou are n o t
'

3 mi ?h e she , , or i t is n ot 3, G IT, 3? 3
“ 7 h t h ey are

n ot

N ote .
-T hi s form I s used to mak e up th e neg ati ve forms of 3 11 3;
i ff mi l am tfi ,
m i ?1 am n ot ; fl mfla u fi I am doi ng, ‘
fi
142 TH E w xmu ar vs uns. 257

C ON D I T I ON A L M oo n .

if an d?were I n ot, had I not bee n, or wou ld

be, or wo uld n ot have been .

S i ngu lar . P lur a l .

di m -
m, fif , i f
. .

1m m, -«fla fi w h
. n
m m
i f?m m . aw e
1“ M f a rr ne w
"
if “ it n. lfl “ “
I!
D ubi f a t i ve T ense .

i f?m i ?shou l d I no t be .

S UBJ UN C T I VE M oon .

(Ka r t a r i F r ag/ g )
a o .

l ff aqrefl I m ay ’
or m i g ht n ot have been .

sfi arqm fi f i m, W W ?
.
J .
,

g u m m 4
’
an: n
g r
i
. t W 3 ? q .

i fm m a?w ri t/fl; if
.
,
a nam m , , w l?
all a
i f m ?u .

B lui veP ray og a .

)
t an wa r? I should n ot be .

I .

2 . "
E!
3 . a n? m n

(2n d Fo rm .
)

l ?
"
a
r g e a
m; ' ”u fifi )
fi ‘
'

mi di
I M PEBA T I VE M oon .

S i ngu lar . P lural .

2 .
1 W W do n ot be th o u
3 .
i t, fit, a we?le t h i m n ot be a, m , a? «he:
144 ms . A UX I LIA R Y vs aBs . 257

P ast H abi tua l .

N ol a — T hi s form i s also used t fi at

i f ?I was no t wont to become ,

{ a 3 m : i ll 5!
i ii , &c '

P luperfect .

lfi mall “ ( i f m .
, I had not becom e m
s
‘
i r W 3 ?W 7
it e m m m g un w m
G ri m m m i nf? W 3
m
.

i f? «cal f
w
.

‘
amfi W ?!n eff fi rst?a

C ON D I T I ON A L M oon.

R?3 ai r were I not to become .

S i ngu la r .

S o aJ UN c r I v s M o o n.

“ IT fit Hi I shou l d n ot become .

S i ngu lar . P l ura l .

1 . “ IT
2 . an fi ‘
fit
3 . mi me n Wi f
N ata — T he forms i n my ? are also u sed c mm m . . , &c a sgfi
.

I sh ould not become .

IM ‘
P ER A I I V E
'
M oo n .

2 i gh t a f t d n t th beco me
M i ii am
“

. l o o o u
‘
i i i , i i , 1 I éré r le t h i m, h er, or i t
2 i t , t ar, Efi
‘

8 not a i t?“
'

i =
.

beco me
14 6 T H E A UXI LI A R Y vanes . 26 0

M arathi ; as , Si . qu a . P rak . «
th a t, M . m e. i t i s studi ed.

W hen S anskri t pass i ve constructi ons are li teral ly transl ate d i nto

M arath i , the forms i n a o r i are u sual ly u sed as, Fm sli m :

N a i “ ? z m W i lt?th e worl d was created by Vi sh nu . In

o t th e forms i n i
“
occu r freq u ently , bu t i n p rose th ey are
p e r
y
rarely used. A n i mperati ve of di gn i ty, for med wi th fi r, i s Often used

i n letters , as fli t g i ve please, an? do pl ease T hes e fo rms . are

more courteo us tha those

n i n th e si mple i mp erati ve o r su bj uncti ve

- m
wt?«i n: 13 fani t i n . 3m m m . ar. .

N o a T he forms
l —
wi t h i t i s w anted, an d mi l i te rally, i t

is sai d that i s, th en, are the only two wor ds wh i ch are used i n
ordi n ary M arath i prose ; th e one i s a verb, and th e other a
con uncti on .
j
26 0 T he s ub un cti ve an
j ? of th e ve rb ( Q to beco me i s
“

opti o nal ly u se d fo r m 3i s c -
war l i m uff sr or S aran I want a
"

mang o . T h e for m em or gn
e may be s ubsti tu ted for m .

26 1 . T he ve rb wrfi fi
to th e p as t ten se,'
is j oi ned e i th er

or to th e dati ve s u pi ne of th e p ri nci pal ve r b, t o m ak e u p the

‘
i ré o r W
compou nd s ubj un cti ve for m s fi i I
'
as W tn
' '

r
m ust g o . T he lat ter f o rm i s u nco mmon an d i n eleg an t .

N ol a — T h e s u pi ne may be ei th er i n th e dati ve a or at . T h e form

w i th t he m i s more co mmon i n the Deccan .

26 2 .
W i lt, li k e th e Eng li sh word to wan t, e x presses

two di sti nc t i deas i n g re

q ard o to i ts
r sense of re u i si te ne ss

n ecessi ty ( )
1 i t m m h i f q
“
t re u i re
”
a
y ea n o a ve o c ca s o n o r, to

as, i n wi n ter we wa nt a fi re ; or to feel n eed of, to desi re ,

as I wan t to S eak to ab t m thi
p y o u o u so e ng .

T hi s two -
fol d s en se i s, e xpre ss ed als o, by th e M arath i verb
W m :
( )W
1 ifi '

wri t e? or w arm I h ave o ccasi o n to g o

or I mu st g o ; I am r eq u i r ed to
g o ( )
2 GET W E trrfi fi .
'
I feel
the need o f g oi n g , or I wan t or wi sh to g o T h e l atter s e nse .

i s expressed on ly by th e form made u wi th the dati ve s u i ne

p p .

5 26 3 T h e s ub
.
j e ct of th e C o mpou nd subj uncti ve form i n
m ay tak e th e s ub ect j i n the N omi nati ve, I n s tru me n tal,
or th e Dati ve case .
 264 ] ms A UX IL I A R Y vs s s s . 14 7

l
( ) T h e C o m pou n d form con s tru cte d wi t h a n om i n at i ve

or dati ve s u b e ct deno te s a k i nd of necessi t

j y o r re u i s i te ne ss q
that i s not m o ral ; W ei wfl m film ( or m ) m .

he must g et ri d o f all hi s van i ty

i R if t m a
g r
m
,

W 3 11: am m
“

or W y o u have n ot eaten an
y th i n g
and
yo u m us t tak e som e refresh ment .

N a
Ut — T he nou ns or thi rd
p personal ro nouns denoti ng i nani mate
Ob ects or i rrati onal ani mals us ually tak e
j the su b ect j i n the N omi
nati ve case .

()
2 W hen th e C o mpou nd for m tak e s an i n str u men tal
sub ect,
j i t i ndi cates a m oral nece ssi ty or du ty m w t nfl a
sa I

you o u
g h t t o com e .

26 4 . W e g i ve belo w th e j
con ug ati on of the verb

I N DI C A r I vn M o o n.

P r esent T en se .

wanted

3 . i f, i fl ,
'

a m h e, sh e
,
or 3, m1 , efi
‘
trr fi fi rd th ey are

i t i s wan te d wan te d

compoun ded
'

No a
l — S ometi mes th e present fo rm i s w i th sn é as

-
,

fl q
" ‘
the pas t ( the followi ng form ) i s made wi t h i i i tr t rfgfi an ?
'
u
p
I am wanted .

P ast T ense .

S i ngu l a r . P lu r al .

l . q?qrfé fi
‘

i t?
s ! I was w anted ‘
W fi Wi lt 5?
—

2 . i ms
a rai ser a m i fifl f W mffi or mafi a
-aa n. , th ou wast wanted i tai
{fl W m i i i -
Ir h
was wanted
e fi fl fi fi 3757
'
‘

m i ?gi at she was w anted

’ '

3 i ll ra
j -
.

i t was wanted i fi mfgfl g ?s

'

F u tu re T en se .

ma h I shal l be wan ted w e? mi ss?

'

1 , .fi vi si t or
r
s
14 8 THE A UX I L IA R Y V ER B S . 26 5

2 .
1 m or W tho u sh al t be wan ted gi ft

3 . ai
’

,
Ffl
’

fi
‘
or he , she , or i t, W IT, Fil m
i t sh all be wan ted
26 5 . B esi des the se I ndi ca ti ve for ms, there are s o me co n

di ti onal an d du bi tati ve form s i n u se , of whi ch th os e m ade u

p
wi th wai t and wi res are th e m os t comm on mm a? sw i m mfg ?
SI G HT at a? i t? i t wo ul d be we ll i f th e m ang o were re qui r e d

by hi m ; care r i t v i si t “ i ts h e m i g ht want i t .

26 6 . T he p erso n fo r who m o r by who m a thi n

g i s want e d
i s pu t i n t e d
h a ti ve cas e WT ] W ?
E 5 th e ru
p ees a re

wan te d by me .

P r es en t T ense .

( )
2 it is n ot wan te d .

S i ngu lar . P lura l .

1 .
I f?fi h s I am n o t wan te d su r e?was? we ar e no t wan te d

2 . i
g m th ou ar t n o t wan t e d Q Gfl wai t y o u are n ot want e d

3 fi r fill, awai t h e, sh e, or i t a a n, efi fl afi d th ey are n o t

' ' '

.
, ,

is not wa n te d wan te d

26 7 . T h e pas t for m i s m ade u

p wi th the a u xi li ary fi at ; th u s
P res en t te n se, H GT { W H ER? m o ney i s wan te d by m e
n ot P as t
ten se , W m ‘
aai r fi m o ne y w as n o t wan te d b
y m e . T he
-
p re se n t form s e r ves the p ur
p o se of t h e fu t u r e : WET E? s ari c m
m s fi
‘
éfi fi ai warm
'

I do no t w a n t t he -
swe e tm ea t fo r to m o rro w
’
s

feas t .

N ote may i mply di sl i k e OI di sappro bati o n as vs e ll absen ce of

was?aafiren mm fi at di sl i k ed h i m com pletely .

’
sh e
'

N ata — tra m m ay be an adv e rb ; fl ai r

, waft , { ma r uni; fl ai r NO .

For bear l do no t beat h i m .

l he was? i s
'

26 8 ve rb u se d to m ak e the C o m po u n d
.
u
p
N e g ati ve fo rm s of the I m pe ra ti ve an d th e S u bj u ncti ve m ood .
1 50 T H E A UX I L IA R Y vas e s . 27 1

P a st T ense .

? a t
-
q n rali I was wan ted emi t} w ai t we wer e wan ted

F ut ur e T ense .

l fi E ri k I sh all he wan ted an t i ?a n; we sh al l be wanted

P a s t H a bi tu al .

a n?I u se d to m mf we u se d to be wanted
“

t fi he wan te d e

T he o th e r ten se s , C o ndi t i o n al , S u bj u n cti ve , &c .

, at e r e g ularly

fo rm e d th ro u g h o ut .

27 1 . T hi s ve rb is u se d as an au xi l i ary verb, to m ak e up

th e co m po u n d for ms of th e s u b u n cti ve
j m ood as war arr?
mu tt i t i s n ecessary for m e or i n cu mben t u
pon m e to g o

am an? a mfi i t was n e ces sar y for m e to g o W a fi mi re: i t

' ‘

wi ll be n e ce ssary for m e to g o T h
. e s i mp l e s u bj u n cti ve

con vey s th e s en se o f
p ro
p i
r et
y or e thi cal n e cessi t
y , b u t the
com po u n d form wi th m i rrfi den otes si mp l e n ecess i t
y or

q
re u i si t en ess : W flfi
’

m wou l d li teral ly m ean, ‘

th e pro
ri e t
g of oin
g w i l l b i n m bent u on me T he t of
p y e c u
p . a
g e n

th i s com po u n d j
s u b u n cti ve i s i n th e dati ve case .

N e ta —
Si nce th e co m
p o u n d form tak es o nl
y th e dati ve fo r th e ag e n t
th e si m ple S u bj uncti ve form , m aki ng p u a
part ofi t , m ay be regarded
as a su bstan ti ve, bei n g th e su bj ec t o f th e v erb m a t, and tak i ng t he
dati ve o f the n o u n or
p j ro no u n oi ned to it as, 31 3 7 a ft m fi , for m e
( w)
ne th e ro
p p r i e t y o f g oi n
g i f? is n ecessar
y arl fi r z T he p ro
pr i et
y o f g o i n g i s i nc u m b e nt u on
p Ir e . T he su b un cti ve
j i nflec ti on
an? i s n o mi nal by o ri g i n (Se ct .

2 72 . T he dat i ve p i ne m a
su
y be s u b sti t u te d fer th e s i m p le
s u b u n cti ve
j m ak i ng u p th e co m pou n d for m W 3 T? wri ter or _

W i t w o ul d be neces sary for m e to g o B o th th e .

co m p ou n d f or ms h ave th e s am e sen s e .

27 3 T he r e i s a th i rd co m po u n d j
s ub u ncti ve for m e xi s ti n
g
.

i n M arath i , wh i ch i s p rodu ce d by j o i ni n g to th e er u n d ;
g
 m m m fi fi m . m mfi mfi w si m
R a mdas .

Oh y ou . are ou r p atron , i t becomes us there fore to te ll y ou

that .

-
w as} arr i mm
i fi l m: why was i t n ece ssary fo r m e to
consi der T ulrar a m .

T hi s form i s more cou rteo u s than that wi th th e si m l

p e

s ub u n cti ve, as
j the g erun di al form i s more i ndefi ni te than th e
si mpl e s u b u nc ti ve j .

N ote .
— T h ere are so me oth er co m pou nd su b u ncti ve
j verbs m ade
up wi th o th er au xi li ary verbs, s uch as q
fi to fall, an? i s, etc. , fo r
whi ch see th e C o mpound Verbs .

N ote .
-T he verb W is used fo r mak i ng up other compoun d

verbal forms, for whi ch see the C o mpou nd V erbs .

()
4 wi t h It is n o t n ecessary.

27 4 g
. is a ne ati ve form of strat a ? to be wanted,
deri ve d fro m i ts P as t H abi tual form 3 1 1? i t u sed to h e wan te d,
the at bei n g contr ac ted to a as, “ QTW FL a re; i f?
we m ay h ave t o g o away su dden ly , th e n eg ati ve con str ucti on
of whi ch woul d be warm mi J
“
i
r ?o r
er m .

27 5 . “ 75? m ay be u sed by i tsel f, or wi th other ve rbs to

mak e p u co mpou n d fo rms . I n t he fo ll owi ng se n te nce it is
used by i tsel f—
g i t m y ou r d re ss i s n ot wan te d .

27 6 I t i s j oi ned to th e s i mp le s ubj uncti ve, or to

.
ti re

g erun d to mak e up th e com po u n d fo r m s ; as, war fi fi m i ?i t i s

'

n ot n e cessary for me t o g o ai fl
'

Far m i a
fiu an l it is n ot

n ecessar f r h er to g i ve h i m i n s tr ucti on T h e su bj ect o f th e

y o .

co m o u n d for ms i s i n th e dati ve case T h e com o u n d for m s

p p .

may be re ar de d as com poun d s ub u n cti ve s . j

g
N te.
o — T he compou nd fo rm , made up by joi ni ng w a i t to the
si mple s ub u ncti ve, som eti mes exp resses
j what i s reason able o r p ro
bable am -
Rw y 3 m w i 1
7 ar
l
t such a day i s not li kely to co me
agai n .
1 52 T H E A UX I L I A R Y vs s s s. 27 7 "

27 7 . T he ne g ati ve for m 1 6 5?i s mor e courteo u s than wai t

it is n ot wante d ; Q 3 ? m i
y ou may tak e th ese sweet bal l s .

i i h
- h ey are n ot wan ted, o r
“

Y ou m y re us
a f e b y s a y g n e t e r era sIa t
«wl ?
i l th e y a re n o t n e cess a r
y T h e l at te r fo r m i mpl i es th a t
.

th e pers on wh o decli nes the Offe r has no ch oi ce i n th e m atte r

bu t i s con troll e d si mply by n ece ssi ty , and i t i s th e re fo re mo r e
courte o us th an th e form er whi ch i s an expressi on of a de si re
or wi sh .

27 8 . T he ve rb 1 6 57 is con u j g ated only i n th e th i rd

p erson . T h us,
3 ra P er s on S i ng u l a r fit, -
tfl t
'

, h e i r h e, sh e, or i t is n ot wa nte d .

3 rd P erson P l ur a l i r, a rr, a?1 8 573 th ey are n o t wan te d .

ai r I t will n ot com e .

27 9 . T he n eg ati ve for m wi t (=r fi ) li terally me an s

th at wi ll not co me, an d m ak e the
”
is u se d u su ally to u
p
ne
g ati ve for ms of th e s ub u nct i ve
j m ood in El fi
'

; wfi '
a t?
h e sh o uld g O, — N eg . mfi fi rst ai r h e sh o ul d n ot g o
W
W ?!fi rab ri a bel l -ful foo d wo ul d be g ot fro m h i m N eg
W
’
—
'

y .

a ffi r mm war fag?ai r-
r e ve n b e l ly
-
ful fo o d c o u l d
-
n ot be
g ot fro m h i m N ? filfi i ai rs wre ath at W ar
1
113 5?i n fi rmr i n - order t hat th e fi xed s tones may not co me

o u t, th ey fi x th e m wi th bars of i r on .

28 0 . T h ecompou n d neg ati ve form i s prod uce d by j o i n

i n g ai r to th e i nfi ni ti ve m ood as, ar
t a? arts: ai r sh o ul d
n ot do .

28 1 . T he ch i ef u se o f th i s ne
g ati ve
for m, li k e th e s i mple
s ub u n cti ve,
j i s to express th e e thi cal sens e of dut or ro ri et ,
y p p y
and for th i s pu rp ose i t i s u su ally e m l o e d T h f m ai r,
p y e or .

th e refore, e xp re sses what i s n ot p rop er or ad vi sa ble as armor

m
,

fil W Hi we s ho ul d n o t sho w di srespe ct to p eo p le .

282 . There i s an ot h er n eg ati ve subj u ncti ve for m p ro

d uce d by j oi ni n g ai r to th e present par ti ci le i n ai as, W

p
m ai r I sh o uld n ot do i t .

28 3 . Of these two su b u ncti ve n e

j g ati ve fo r ms th e former
i n th e i nfi ni ti ve mood i s stron g er than the latter . T h e fo r m er
 29 1 ] CO M P O UN D VER B S .

modi fi ed, th e p r i ncip al verb T h us, wi nter m to wear

.
at “

i s a nom i nal , and exp resses th e s i m pl e n oti o n o f weari ng , an d

em t
”
W i to eat u p i s a verbal co mp oun d, an d den o tes
that the act o f
“
eati ng , e xpresse d
by the pri nci pal parti
ci ple w ,
i s do ne to p erf ecti on by th e addi ti on of the se rvi l e
m to thro w . S o al so, 3 3 ? an . wash i t thoro ug h ly “

290 T he com u n d verbs, wh e th e r n o mi nal o th e r

.
po or

wi se, m ay be tran si ti ve or i n trans i ti ve i n sens e, an d wh e n th e y

are tra ns i ti ve , they tak e an O bj e ct T he obj ect of a com .

poun d ve rb m ay be A ccusati ve, D t ti ve , Gen i ti ve , or L ocati ve .

()
l T he A ccu s ati ve Obj ect (V b l com
) Err gm arali wash
' '
e a
r
p .

the ho u se th oro ug hly ; N omi na l i f srt ri a are; wear i t

'
'

()
2 T he D ati ve Obj ect : Verba l camp . ) ar ma n ?q rfi
I bathe d hi m ; N m -
firs r fi rst :
,
( o i na l ) t hey p u n i s h e d
her .

T he Gen i ti ve Obj ect : m i rh am qg

i

3
( ) ( N mi l )
’ ’

o n a ar s o

fi r n o n e s ho u l d t rust h i m qrgfl fi rm em
'
sh e p i t i e d me .

( )
4 T he L ocati ve Obj ect : N omi n al ) WW wi m
s If"
?
541 love you r parent s .

29 1 . T he co mp o u nd ve rb is co n u g ate d
j li k e an y s i m p le

verb, an d can be co n ug ated

j in al l th e te n s es in wh i ch i ts
con u g ate d
j T h us , for i ns tance, th e se r vi l e un
-
5
servi le is .
i 1
i s defecti ve, a nd th e refore th e co m po u nd co m ose d
p of it is
defi ci ent i n th e forms o f co n u g ati o n.
j I t i s th u s t he ser vi l e

alone th at u n der
g o es the chan g e s of co n u j g ati o n th us, at
am am h e dra m f ri a he wi ll co m
co m men ced to g o ;
mence to g o i ncep ti ve comp ou nd ) eff arts W 3 s he can do i ts
'

th at rai n I s h al l be abl e to do i t (p oten ti al comp ound

Obs .
—T h e M e ri ghi people tak e pleasu re i n usi ng th e com ou nd
p
verbs, even w h en correspondi ng s i mple verbs m ay exi st i n th e l an
g g ;
ua e an d th i s somewh at extended mode o f ex ressi on
p has a di g ni ty
and for ce w h i ch ar e want i ng i n th e o th er form s of s peech . T he
student w i ll fi nd ve ry val u able i n for m ati o n on th i s i n teresti n g s ub

jcet, wh i ch i s m ore a m atter of i di om than of grammar,

i n M oleswor th ’
s

several servi le s
‘
M arri tl u D i cti onary , u nde r t he wh i ch are em pl oy ed to
make up the comp ou nd forms .
1 56 C O M PO UN D va nes . 293

l .
-
T n n N OM I N A L S .

292 . T he N om i nals a re co mpo se d ch i efly o f th e fo llowi ng

s er vi l es

m to do ii to g i ve a
R i g ?to p lace

mi
'
i
'
to eat at ?! to h o l d m to s tri k e
"

Errata?to p u t w
h a
t to break a ? to
t co m e

E
fi '
to tak e a
fl fl i to si t m i l to to u ch

to place m a
t to preser ve m t to
a a l
pp y
29 3 . T he se rvi le s N o mi n al C o mpo un d m ay be
in a u ni ted

wi th i n fle cte d or u ni n flecte d, n o u ns .

l . I nfl ected N ou ns i
S l
'

fi a ma !to W ear, Si nk r i s th e
“ - loca
t i ve cas e , u ni t ed wi th the s e r vi le W to p u t .

2 . Uni nflected N ou ns m m to r e ce i ve a be ati ng , m

i s th e acc u sati ve cas e , u n i te d wi th th e ser vi le t tr
e a ?to e at .

294 . W hen th e ser vi le i s tran s i ti ve , i t a g re e s w i th the

uni n fl ected n ou n
—
t he i n ter nal j
ob ect , 29 5 ) th a t i s j oi ned
-
wi t h i t em t art arr (arm
i c r he g o t a s e ve re be ati n g an a r m
g m
afi ar y o u
'

let y ou rs elf be k i sse d by h i m .

B u t i f th e n ou n m ak i n g p th u
e co m
p oun d i s i n flecte d, the
tran s i ti ve se rvi l e ag re es wi th th e u n i n flecte d n o un whi ch i t
ta k e s as the ob ect o f
j th e w h ole n o m i n al com po u n d ; an ?
m
_

sta
r er 3t -
artrm h e wor e a coa t. I n th i s s e n te n ce i
air n

W i s th e j th e
o b e ct o f wh o l e N o m i n al sh -
i tr W t wore , an d
th e se r vi le -
antTm a ree s
g i n g e n de r and n um be r w i th “ W e" .

29 5 . T h e N o m i nal m ade u
p wi t h an u ni n fl e cted accu o

sati ve n ou n may tak e an o th e r n o un as i ts j

ob ect, j us t as th e
N om i nal made u
p wi th an i n flecte d n ou n T h e u n i n,
fl e cte d ao .

c u sati ve no u n co m os i ng t he N om i n al m a be calle d i ts I n terna l

p y
Obj ect, an d the oth e r n o u n
g o ve rn e d
b y t h e wh o le N o m i nal
i ts Extern a l Obj ect . T he Exte r nal Obj ect i s al way s i nflecte d .

29 6 T he Exte rnal Obj ec t m ay be i n on e of th e se

.
»
th ree
cases —
the Dati ve , th e Ge ni ti ve, an d the L ocati ve .

1 . W he n th e pri ma ry sen se of th e servi le i s that o f gi vi ng

o r a nalog o us to i t, th e Ex tern al Obj e ct i s dati ve mi n? N W
1 58 C OM P OUN D vas e s .

benefi t o f t he ag ent . T hu s «fi t to eat, ex

p re ss es an t
ac on i
wh o se n atural res ul t i s th e be ne fi t of the a
g e nt, the eate r , an d

h e nce co mpo u nds made u

p w i th i ts a i d are n
eflea i ve or
p a ss i ve
'

in s en se as mfi m: m 1 h e was beate n, l i teral ly h e a te a

beati n g . T h e i ns tr u me n tal su b e ct
j he re i s n ot ac ti ve, but
s u fi e rs th e effects o f i ts o wn acti on . T he real a
g e nt or doer
i s pu t i n th e g e ni ti ve case mfi r m cm
’

of the acti o n :W
he was beaten by R ama A noth e r verb l i k e (fl at to e at, i s
.

ii
v to tak e lfl
"
mm man Gi t mm
r why sh o ul d I bear hi s
re roach
p
N — T he fact that the M arath i com pou nd re exi ve or
ote fl p a ssswe

f orm s are made up wi th the ai d Of su ch verbs as si n l exp res s ac ts

g y
wh i ch are ap p arently p f
er or med f or the benefi t of the a
gen t, may
lead to the mo re i ntel li g i ble a p preh en si o n of t h ose di sti n cti ons of

con u g ati on,

j exi sti ng i n Sans kri t as wel l as Greek, whi ch er
p p l ex

th e modern student . qqfi t h e co o ks A cti ve Voi ce q

, afi h e co o ks
'

fo r h i m self, M i ddl e Voi ce T hese p ecul i ari ti es o f conj ug ati o n a re

.

p rese rved i n the M arath i A nomalou s Ver bs 1 6 7, 2 .

N ata — T he reflexi ve sen se may be i ndi cated, also,

by N o m i n als
aw th :an? h e beca me bo l d
e "

m ade p wi th i
u ntransi ti ve ser vi les s

ta r W
t ar 3 11 3 1 he was affected wi th pi ty ; W EE at fi r to be i n
dread .

N ote -T h ere are ac ti ve forms correspondi n t th e i

g o
pass ve
~
.
or

re flexi ve ex res si ons

p
T r ansi ti ve P assi ve H R m i l to be beaten
”

T ra nsi ti ve A cti ve H IT
3 5?to beat . I ntr ansi ti ve P a ssi ve on!aur al to be afrai d, to fe a r
ma ! to fri g h ten
y
'
ransi ti ve .

N eta — T he R eflexi ve or P assi ve N omi nals di ffer i n sen se acc o rd

i ng to th e n atu re Of the ser vi les empl oyed to make th em u

p . T h os e
wi th the i ntransi ti ve se rvi les resembl e the Deponen ts, or the ver bs
of th e M i ddle V oi ce, and th ose wi th the transi ti ve servi les a re

s tri ctly passi ve, i mplyi ng forei g n ag enc

y .

29 8 . T he se rvi le s are th us arran

g ed accord i n
g to t h e
case s O f th ei r External Obj ects

I . T he D a ti ve Obj ect latera l to p u t at to i ve

E g W ar t o

a p p ly .
 3 02 J C M O PO UN D v anes . 1 59

2 . T he Gen i ti ve Obj ect d

a n } to b ri ng ; m to do ; “ q
to h old ; m fi to p r e ser ve, che ri s h ; m et t o
pl ace ; a to
co me ; t o fe e l . T he verb m at i s vari o u s l
y em l
p yo ed .

3 . T he L o ca t i ve Obj ect W to place stai r t o si t m fl ‘

to to uch m i to a l
pp y .

299 . W he n an i nflect ed n ou n is j oi n e d to a tran s i ti ve

se rvi le , th e s e r vi l e a rees wi th th e u n i n flect e d j
O b ect Of th e
g
nomi nal wfi m fi a t m h e p u t the sh oe s on h i s foo t .

When th e s e r vi l e i s i ntran si ti ve , th e n o m i n al tak es th e Kartari

constr u cti o n i f? W ( fil s he was
‘
ve ry an g ry .

3 00 . W he n t h e p w n o m i nal
i th a n i n fle c ted i s m ade u

nou n th e i n fle c te d n ou n m ay be i n an y o n e of t h e foll o wi n
, g
thr ee cas e s th u s, t he I ns f r u me nt a l — '
V a
l fi i i t l to be an g ry 5
'

573 i to fi ni sh ‘ a
the D a t i ve { Elfl s e t t o be see n t he
l oca ti ve— af fl c
t i m at to we ar .

Obs. — T hi s i s qu i te a ne w department ofM arat hi grammar open

ed up to th e i ntelli g ent st udent o f th e l ang u age, wh o wi l l, h o wever ,
fi nd abu n da nt i llu strati o n and confi r mati o n of t he p ri nci
p l es a n

nounced h e re i n t h e s eech Of edu cated nati ves, as wel l as i n wo rk s

p
M a rathi Di cti ona ry i s
’
wri tte n by the m . M r. M ol eswo rt h s a s to re

h ouse Of m os t valu able i nfo rmati o n on th i s po i nt .

II .
—
V E R EA L C OM P OU N DS .

T h e Ve rbal C o m po u n ds h ave bee n di vi de d acco r

ei h cl as s es,
di ng t o t h e i r s i g ni fi ca t i o n i nto g t vi z .
( )
l th e

P oten ti a l s, ( )
2 t h e P a ss i ves,
(3 ) th e I nt ens i ves (4 ) th e C on
t i nua t i ves an d Fr eq
u e nt i ves , 3
( ) th e D es i dera t i ves ,
( )
6 th e
7 h P er mi ssi ves, an d 8 th e Obl i g a ti ona l s
I ncep t i ves, ( ) t e .

T hey are con u ate d

g j in al l t he te nse s i n whi c h th ei r s erv i l es
are .

l . T he P otent i a l s .

3 02 . T h re e ve rbs are e mpl oye d to m ak e u

p th e p o te n

tial for ms th e ve rbs e a

ar n ?to be ab le, fini al to obtai n, to be

able ,an d fifth t o co me, to be abl e .

1 T he ve rb m to be abl e is u ni ted wi th th e i nfi ni ti ve
of the pri n ci pal verb ; an d th e co m o u nd can be u s ed
p as
1 60 C O M PO UND v s as s . 3 02

W i dely as th e pote nti al de ri vati ve i n at W H a mi l

“
-
ei i ; I can

d o i t, f?ens fi T he co mp o u n d, howeve r, i s m uch

’

or I “ t . not

u sed in co m m on co nve rsati o n , bu t chi efly e mpl oy e d in Offi

c i al transacti o ns .

N ata — T hi s potenti al form i s nei th er u ni di o mati c nor i nelegant

a s i s ofte n all e e d, si nce i t corresponds to t he S ansk ri t fo rm 35
g {r 3
gfi f t I
i am able to do, and is u sed in M arath i P roverbs , the most
i di o mati c expressi o n in th e l ang uag e . For i nstance, i t occurs in
t hi s p ro ver b . wai t fifi fi 3 27 3 W '

m a M M r Go d can not mend

a bl ok e n pear l or an i nj u red mi nd .

2 A m ore i di o mati c e xp re ss i o n is th at m ade u wi th

.
p
was? ga ri n sm t t ag s enter arr
ar - t
s“ ? F
l ski wra vr
rr H rfira
'

y ou wi ll n ot be abl e to l au g h i f I sho u ld
g i ve y o u t wo h ar d
s tr i
p es o n th e back I f?ga r wa s? an?
i m ai g i
g a n
vr
rt 7 11 71 ! I h ave h e ld y o u fa s t y ou ca nn o t n o w g e t l o ose
f ro m m e . B ut th i s i di om i s fa ll i ng i nto d i su s e .

3 . T he ve rb i t? to c o m e, is j oi n e d ei the r to th e p re s e nt

ar t ci i l i n ai or the dati ve s upi n e of th e pr i n ci pal ve rb war

p p e ,

I c an w ri te, or am fissu re as T hi s . co m
p o u n d
v e rb is con s tr u c te d wi th th e dati ve o f th e a n t It ex
g e .
p resse s

( on 1 p .

T he vari o us se ns es o f th e co m ou nd ot en ti al fo r ms W i th i t?!
pp
c an be e asi ly traced to th e o ri i nal si ni fi cati on o f th e s e rv i le ;
g g
'

i rfii to co me ,
u n tO, to-
i e
b e.
p e r f to be known u n to,
or m e d b
y or .

I t e xp res ses p ossi bi l i ty of d oi ng, e speci al ly th e re s u l ti n g po we r

fro m th e p os se ssi on o f ade u ate s tre ng th, weal th , tal en t o r q
a u th or i ty W or W m
W I am abl e to wal k , i e , . .

I po s se ss th e s tren g th n e ce s sary t o walk , newF

argai o r fi sca

m ad I can wri te, i e I h ave the abi li ty o f w ri ti ng or .

ac
q uai n tan ce wi th th e art o f wri t i ng W ari a a m am I c an

g o i n, i . e. I have th e n ee d fu l au thori t
y or free do m to g o i n
-
W fi rm W or W ii i a , I can buy i . e .
, I s h al l h ave o ne
y m
e no u g h to bu y W W W EE ? ff? W m i f?! “ is
c o nsi deri ng hi s ag e I ca n h ar dly i mp u te an
y bl a me to hi m ;
 3 00
p

1 62 C O M POUN D VER B S .

P resent T ense .

P a st T ense .

t fi af rm h e? I was beaten
fi .

m mfi m fi m fi e tfi i
’

1 . .
M r is

m t rma s s s
2 s i e

3 fit mfi ar i m m fi sfi e i fis
'

. .

F ut u re T ense .

f r af f ai r 3 11i ? I shall be beaten .

1 .
i i i e m r a ri a m .

- -
,

aw W mfi e
‘
2 i snt e r le m a re
'

. .

-
3 . fir a ri a m . a H ui 55

3 05 . I n s te ad o f e mpl oy i n g thi s co m po u n d p as si ve
,
the
M a rath i s u s u all
y a do
p t t h e fo l lo wi n
g m o de s o f e xp re s si on

1 . T he a
g e n t,
wh e n k no w n, i s sup
p l i ed W t ’
fl! sr
‘

M Go d wi ll des tro y th e w o rl d at th e l as t day , for

tra ns mi t a men a? th e worl d wi l l be de s t royed, &c .

2 T h e th i rd p l ur al i n di cati ve i s
. u sed a s, s fé W‘
they
say so , for i t i s s ai d
3 . T he per fect an d l
p pu er fe ct i n di cati ve t e n s es of tr an si
ti ve ve rbs , wh i ch are in re a li ty p assi ve s , are e m l o e d
p y w i th
o ut th e i r i n stru m en tal en t t h W e flfi afi an? i t i s
' ' “

a u s
g ; ,

n ar rate d i n th e P u rans met fi ‘

efl th e co w was t i ed u
p
t
afi an ?i t i s sai d.

4 . A n i n tran s i ti ve verb ( th e de p on e nts , § 1 6 7, 1 of

t he same meani ng i s , s ubs ti t u ted fir h e w i l l be s aved,

for a i aT a ri '

a a? R aff?!3 3 : h e was s lai n i n bat tle .

5 . A n ou n o f a s u i ta bl e se n se wi th an au xi l i ary ve rb i s
u sed R ITE" fi n (i f ? h e wi ll be s ave d.
“
 § 3 07J C OM PO UN D vanes . 1 63

6 T he p l upe rfect parti ci ple o f th e co r res on di n i n tran s i

p g
.

ti ve verb wi th err ? i s used 3?fi g ? a ri a i t wi ll be bu rn t u p ,

7T he pas t par ti ci ple i n { a wi th 373 i i s

.
“

use d i
i ? s
-
fi h rm
fi
or (1 ! m an? h e i s sat i sfi e d
3 .

8 . C o m p ou n d passi ve fo rms made u

p wi th n o mi n als ar e

used eq fi art (4 m he was beaten .

Obr . W hoe ver wi shes to be u nde rs too d must not con ten t hi m
self wi th w o rds that mi ght convey the i dea i ntended, but
u si ng

not i n the wa s uch as the n ati ves th e m sel ves e m lo t i

y p y o e X
pre s s t ,

and take c are, to o , tha t th ose words are arran ed i n th e d t

g o r e r o

whi ch the -
M arti thes are accustomed .
” —
Dr S tevenson
. .

Nata — R ead i n con necti o n wi th th e pass i ve verbs, th e Obse rvati ons

on the re flexi ve or p as si ve n omi nals, 29 7 .

N ol a — I n S ansk r i t P rri k ri t th e pass i ve form i s made u p by

and

inflecti on , as Sk .
-
Ferrari T, P rti k afi tfi fi i t i s done T he l e tter a i s
.
' '

i nserted to mak e u t he p assi ve fo rm i n S an sk ri t, wh i ch i s ch an e d

p g
to a i n P rak r i t , and th us t he S ansk ri t a i s the abbrevi ated fo rm

of ! " to go . T he f ull form o f at i s s ti l l u sed i n Be ng al i to pro duce

the passi ve verb as ar I am m ade , m li t .I g o i n m ak i ng In .

s s i ve fo rms o ccu r i d si m
Sansk ri t, co m po u nd p a , bes es the
p le i n a, as

i n Lati n . T he L ati n amal n m i r i to be lo ved, i s li teral ly to be

gone i n lo ve .
— B opp .

3 . T he I nte nsi ves .

3 06 . T he I ntensi ves i ntensify the i n di cate d by th e

s ense

verb wh i ch fo r ms thei r fi rs t m e m be r, a n d w hi c h i s pu t i n th e
l
p p
u er fe c t p a r ti c i pl e as , 3?g m Ear fi ni s h o ff th e se w i n
g
of i t T h e i nt en s i ves ex re ss s tate of co m ple ti on : wh at i s
.
p a

com
ple te l y , wh o l l y q
,
u i te , e ffect e d, as i n th e Eng li sh p h rase s

to cut up , to dri n k up, to t urn u p, to se w u p a rent, e tc .

3 07 . T he s e rvi le s e m pl oye d w i th the l

p pu e rfe ct
p arti

ci
pi c are ch i efly th e foll owi ng
 1 64 C O M PO UN D vs uss . 3 07 “

So m e ti m es th es e se rvi les are redu ndan t, an d a re e mployed

si m l to ro u n d a p e r i o d
py .

nH i wa ft w fi ari d? f f he
“
2 . e ars e W t, =ff has done
all he poss i bly co u ld do he has l e ft n o th i ng u n t r i e d . T hi s
s er vi le i s u s e d i n re fe rence to ma tte rs th a t ar e e vi l or cala

m i to ns ; H i m W M , an ar m su m are?we h ave tri ed

al l s s i bl e re m e di es , bu t to n o e ffe c t.
p o

3 . a m? W 3 11 1 fi fi the water o f the tan k i s dri ed u p

'

m W e walk e d u h h l
“

a? R 211 ?
W E T h p t e w o e w a
y S o me .

t i m es the se rvi le is re du nda n t FR E T W W ? W W 31 TH?

i t i s te n y ears s i n ce h er de ce as e . Em ph ati c i m p e rat i ves are

ro d u ce d b j oi n i n s ni ff t o to th e ve rbal ro o t WM 5 11
p y g o g ,
bri n T he s e r vi le 3
3 1 i is
g i t at i a? g i ve at
o n ce it o n ce .

u se d wi th i nt ran si ti ve arti c i p le s , l i k e th e s e rvi l e alfi w i th

'

p
t he tran s i t i ve ?m
a 313 1 h e i s d ea d an d
g o ne mm W
afar? th ey beat h i m to dea th , or k i lle d hi m .

4 . fir m W WW m rata th e
Er A rabs
p u t the

; fm
‘

R oh i llas to th e s w o rd H ER dri n k i t off .

5 . war F3 53 w r i te o ff th e l e tte r an d h ave i t re a dy F m

qri r W
'
o ’
527 p u t wate r i n th e flo ur an d h ave i t r eady . T he
se r vi le i '

fi cor re sp o n ds wi th th e ab o t e s e r vi le to th r o ws
i n that bo th e xp re ss the fi ni s h i n g of an acti o n bu t
'

a l
ar li i
i ’ ’

mean s that afte r the a ct i o n is co m p le te d, n o thi n g m ore i s t o

be do ne wi th i t w h i le 3 1 3 i i m l i t hat afte r th e co m l e ti o n
, p e s
p
of the acti o n care i s to be tak e n to have i ts p e ffect s r e s er v

0d ifl
'
‘
ll t fi W
’ ’

M read th e bo o k an d be do n e wi th i t ;
w h e re as i f? m e a ns , m ad t he book ca re fu l ly so
th at th e k n o wle dg e ac
q u i re d m i g h t be s e r vi cea bl e afte rwa rds .

6 .
fi n er r -m thro w thi s a wa
y ; ( m i s fi t e rl ra
a
-
c
m t
s ge
a

a? th e p r 1 n ce d r o v e a w a
y th e s o n o f t h e p ri m e m i n i s ter
W fi W ET W Q 3 h h i m i l k d hi m f
'
: e se n t O p a c e o , .

7 {frH ?
.
W
at test h e h as s wal lo we d u p eve ry th i n g , i e , . .

r obbed Fl?firm? an y ! ne w: “ i t , he h as beco m e q ui te i n so l

 1 66 C O M PO UN D vanes . 3 10

N ote. — T he sub uncti ve

j form i n m may be consi dered as de
si de rati ve W “ fi “ (W m (see th e et molo y o f
‘

y g m i , 2 59)
o u r h o no u r m ust come, e I earnestly desi re that you may be
y .
,

l eased to co me
p .

6 . I ncep ti ves .

3 10 . T he I ncepti ve s expre ss th e begi n ni ng o f an ac ti on ,

an d the re ar e two se r vi le s u sed to m ak e up th e i r fo r m s, v i z , .

m a
t to to uch, i f? to be co m e .

( )
1 is u ni te d e i the r wi th the i nfi ni ti ve moo d, or the
dati ve su
p i ne ? 1 rd
a m m m ar he com me n ced
or to
wal k ; a? arm sm
e nte r fi r t ai n w aft w art fire st rai t no

s o on e r di d h e be g i n to read, th a n h e became d u mb .

( )
2 T he verb (fi t i s j o i ne d
to the p re sen t parti c i p le i n H r;
{7 11 ar "
3 e? a r th e m k i n
g b e g a n t o s pe ak m e -r 8 1
3 y o u m a
y w “
1

s e t o ff 3 5! s
et b e
g i n t o g i ve b e
g i n an d g o th ro u
g h th e ac t ) .

7 . P erm i ss i ves .

31 1 T he P er mi ss i ves co m s ed of th e i n fi ni ti ve
. ar e
p o

m oo d an d th e ve rb ifi to g i ve W are?Q T p e r mi t m e to g o ;
‘ '

m er; ea w
F ri t th e w i n d wi l l n o t l e t m e wri te lfl
W ET Ere:
‘

a
W am? I wi ll n ot l et hi m do co m e .

8 Obli ga ti o nal s
. .

3 12 . T h ese co mpo un ds p e x re s s O bl i g ati on or m o ra l

n e ce s si ty . T he se rvi les e mpl oy e d to m ak e u
p th e se fo rm s
are to fall, trr -
’
fi fr i t i s n e cess ary , K m? to t o u ch , a nd

sr fi to b e .

1 . T he l 1 3
s ervi e 1 3 ?i s j o i n e d e i t he r to th e dati ve , or th e

g e n i ti ve s u pi ne of th e pri nci pal ve r b i W W W

W m tW or m a nm a as y o u are s u fferi n
g f ro m
feve r, I am o bli g e d to g o back wards an d fo rwards ; W
W W or W m I wa s u n der th e neces si ty o f walk
i ng t o there T h e ve r b i s co nj u ate d th ro ug h o u t wi th the
p u .
g
su bj e ct i n th e dati ve case bu t whe n th e pri n ci pal ve rb i s i 1 1
t ran si ti ve , the s er vi le i s p u t i n the ne u ter si ng ular , a nd
wh e n i t i s transi ti ve , i t ag re e s wi th i ts obj ect : a rm E irzzrr
atu
Err m o r am t !" we arer he i s force d to g o abou t .
 3 1 2] C M O PO UN D vas es . 167

2 .
m h as be en previ o u sly cons i de re d under th e M o dal
verbs (S ec t I t i s u s e d w i th th e as t ten se o f th e ri n
.
p p
ci
p nl verb ; srrsr {T i flfl
' ‘
m ifi '

qrfi '
i ri t i s necessary fo r m e to g o
to ni ht It e xpresses e i th e r a h i l m oral neces si ty ,
g .
p y s ca o r

and ta k es the sub e ct j ei ther i n th e i ns tru me n tal or dati ve

case . T he v erb wi t h the i n stru m e n tal j
s u b ect u sually e x
pres se s

a moral n ece s si t
y t ar Qfi I ou
g h t t o h ear .

T he ver b wi th the s ub e c t j i n th e n o mi nati ve case e xpres se s

wha t i s nece s sary o r e s se nt i al to a n e ven t, a nd con veys i n te n

s i vely th e s e nse th at a verb wi th the s ub u n cti ve o f su
j m to be
doem wr w fi fi fl éwfl m at ?
a ifi t 57m vrrfi i f we
sh oul d sa
y that h e co mm i tte d th e th e ft, th en h e m u s t e ve n

have g o ne th e re ; hi s g oi ng th ere i s esse n ti al to th e s upposi ti o n

that h e s tol e {IT firm m . e x r e s se s
p a su pp o si t i o n i n a

g e n e ral way .

3 . T he se r vi le ar m is j oi ne d ei th er to the s u b u nc ti ve
j
moo d, or to the dati ve s u pi n e m ar gra
f t snfi mi t
e a m
a re 3 mm m e mi t E ffi e: sho uld h e n o t s u cceed in doi n g
ou r b u si ne ss , we shal l be u n de r th e ne cessi ty of t rou bli n g y ou
-
i m W w W i l n «fi e w e m et?! si n ce Kh an du
“

{ te , t
has r u n away , R amj i w i ll h ave t o p ay the m oney It . s peak s

o f a re spo nsi bi l i ty o r du ty whi ch m ay or m ay n ot be m o ral ,

an d i s u s ed as a c o u r t e o u s fo r m o f u r
g e n c
y t m fi ai ar a ft?
afi m y
‘
o u r h on o u r w i l l h a v e t o
g o S e c t .

4 T he g e ni t i ve s up i ne of th e p ri n ci pa l ve rb is j o i n ed to
-
.

m armi s: errmi
"
the ten s es of the ve rb snfi e 3e y o u have
to g o e ven n o w . I t den otes an i n c u m ben cy by th e
exp resse d

Eng li sh ph rase made u p wi th

“
have,
”
followed by an i n fi n i t i ve,
-
as y o u ha ve to g o t o n i g h t .

T he fo rm be u sed reg u larly in th e s nt an d a t

can p r e e
p s

t en s e s o nl
y
— 1
1 m are“ ? ? I h avan
e to g o W a re" ? éfi I ‘

had to g o i n the futu re tens e , us e i s u sually e m ploy e d m

“

5111 17 3 ”
m h aveIt o g o T h
sh al l
e r e
g u lar fu t u re w i th . wi n:
is u s ually du bi tati ve W W I m a y h av e to
g o .

T he subj ect of thi s form i s u su al ly i n th e dati ve case bu t

i n th e pas t ten se, i t may tak e th e i n s tru m en tal case , wh e n i t
16 8 co n eoo nn T EN SES. 3 13

de n o tes a m oral re s o ns i bi l i ty
p as, t ar 517 3 e if}? I s h o u l d
h ave g one . I t has th e s am e force as the past te n se of th e

si m pl e s u bj u n cti ve ; t af 3 11 ? i t? or m an? fife} .

N o te . T he fo rm may express the i nten ti o n of th e agen t i n an e m

—

p h at i c way ; 3 ant m i a th ey have deci ded to go t o- m

mo rro w .

N ata — I t may de no te what i s necessari ly dependent u po n t h e d i s

p osi ti o n o r natu re o f a pe rson or t h i ng fi r fl F fl ifi m ' ’

m ar h e i s su ch a m an as w i l l s u rel y on e da
y or o th er do m i s

ch i ef im
w m m fir m s w ane m i a g afi t he sto n e

str uck hi s ear , an d it th e ear was ready to break ofl ,

’
bu t th e act

was defi ci ent by a li ttle, i . e. , th e ear was wi thi n an ace of bei ng

s tru ck o ff .

C H A P T ER X VI II .

T h e C om p ound T en ses .

3 13 33 1 .

313 .T he S i m ple T en ses g i ven i n C hapte r XI I I do n o t .

an sw er al l the pu r o ses o f ex res si on , an d

p p co q y
n se uen tl co m
p o un d fo rm s ar e m ade p y bu th e ai d o f th e s u b s tan ti ve ve r b s

T he s u b s tan t i ve ve rbs ar e j oi n ed, e i th er to the arti ci p les f

p o
"
t h e p r i n ci pal verb, o r to i ts s i mp le tenses th u s , a? fi t ter 3 1 13
h e i s w ri t i n g wrath? "Ti -
T arafi w i m? fi fi (fi ll m y m a
fi a sw ‘ ’
t

tern al au nt
g ave m e th i s ri n
g on m y bi r th day . I n the l a t te r
sente n ce th e s u bs tanti ve v e rb is j o i ne d to a si m l e ten s e th e
p
p as t of th e p ri n ci pal verb, an d i n the fo rme r, to a
pa r ti c i p l e

th e re sen t o f th e p ri n ci pal verb

p .

3 14 . B o th th e m e mbers of the c om
p o un d te n se ar e in
fl ec ted i n j
co n u g ati o n , u n l es s t h e fi rs t i s a
p arti ci pl e en d i n
g
i n t he i nh e ren t at as fii
’
ar m? gfi f I w as si tti n
g ,
i f?
I h ad s at . I n th e fo rm er se n t en ce th e parti ci p le ai m is not

i nfl ecte d, bu t i n th e l atter, bo th the ve rbs are i n flecte d .

3 15 . T he C omp o un d T e n ses ex
p re ss M O DI FIC A T I O N S of

t h e P ri nci pal S i m p le T en se s T he P rese nt, th e P as t, and th e

F u tu re .
1 70 OOM P OUN D rsnsns . 3 20

T he P resen t P erf ect i s th e pas t tense wi th the

3 . verb an ?
fl t fl
“

fi l
‘
an? I hav e s at .

4 . T he P resen t H a bi tu a l i s th e p resen t parti ci pl e i n a and

the p re sen t ten s e o f th e ve rb afl fi ; an? H i m raw ar m

fi shes l i ve i n th e s ea .

T h e P r esent P r ospecti ve i s the fut u re parti ci ple wi th th e

5 .

verb 3 11 3 ; I f?Emma: an? I am abou t to learn .

6 . T h e P res ent Du bi tati ve ‘

wi th the p r ese nt

pa r ti ci pl e an d 3 mm ; H? m 3 mm t h e dy i ng .

P as t T en se .

3 20 . l . T he P as t I mp erfect or P ro ressi ve
g i s the pr e sent
parti ci l e
p in i f wi th th e pas t te n s e firm was ; { Elw i n (;as m as;
m at th at i ns tan t a ti g er was a
pp roach i n
g .

2 . T h e P as t P erfect or P l up erf ect T ense i s form ed wi tht

th e past ten se an d th e pa st te n s e Em u nfi t fi mr
-
m first
fi E -t f ? f they had placed h er
fi ifi j t t th e
‘
u t
“
t
reg t ar u s a er on
'

bi er I saw h er efl i re:
'

{trai t sifi she had beco m e cold.

'

3 T he P a st H a bi tu a l i s t he pr e s ent parti ci le i n a an d
.
p
th e pas t h abi tual tense of anfi ; W m « T m fiat m
an : h avi n g e r ected a te mpora ry watch towe r ,
"
that B rah man
was i n the habi t of dai ly si tti n g on it .
‘

T h e I ncep t i ve P a st i s form ed of the presen t parti ci ple

4 .

en di ng i n « h
r wi th t e p a t t n fth ?
v b if “ i n
e
M fi ll
“
s s e o e e r

m Dh ri tara sh tra be an to S eak

g p .

5 T h D u bi t a t i ve P a s t i s fo rme d wi th th e as t t n of
e .
p e se

the verb an d were" ; i t W was" h e mu s t have walk ed .

6 . T he P ast P rospect i ve i s the fu tu re p arti ci ple wi th the

p ast ten se of th e ve rb si li fi m mr 3 I?
fi 3 3 ?m
”
m
I was g o i n g to wr i te wh en y o u sen t th e m an .

Futu re T ens e .

T he F uture I mp erf ect o r P r og r ess i ve i s th e

3 21 . 1 .

p re sen t p ar ti ci pl e wi th W ; If? am W ETg i ft Ell? m afi fi

I sh all be wai ti ng for yo u a t twe lve O cloc k
’
.
172 C OM POUN D r s us . 3 25

Fu ture T ense .

3 25 T he Fu ture I n defi ni te i s the fut u re parti ci ple

. 1 .

H IT wi th t he s i mple con di ti o nal o f snfi fi rs mm m

’

in GT
'

i f ifi i t wo uld have been well i f h e h ad be en g oi ng .

2 T he F u ture D ubi ta ti ve i s th e fu ture l i

arti c i
n WI!
“

.
p p e

wi th arm ; 3 1? i n arm e m ar '

, at an ai m s ho uld h e be

g oi n g, the n tel l m e .

T n s S UBJ UN C T I VE M OOD .

T h e su bj u n cti ve pro pe r exp resse s du ty an d the s ub

3 26 .

j u ncti ve fo rm i n mi , wh e n e mploye d wi th the s u bj e c t i n the

i n stru men tal case , u s ually expre ss es thi s sen s e t an i n? I
“

ou g h t to g o .

N T he sub un cti ve
j wi th the su b ect in th e n o m i nati ve
ata —
j case

ex resses d o ubt or u n certai n t an d d th e du bi tati ve forms of

p ‘ y, pro u ces

the i ndi cati ve T h e si m ple su bj u ncti ve form i s m ade u w i t h t he

.
p
te rmi nati on an? oi n ed S an d the
j to th e si m
p l e v erb ect .

com pou nd wi th th e Ol ned to the

j
su b u ncti ve
‘
au xi li ar
y v erb S1 3 W
j
si m l j
s ub u ncti ve t ar a n éfi I o ugh t t o h ave go n e
'

p e .

N ote . — T he j
su b un cti ve has o th er co mpou n d forms wh i ch are

i u n der t h e M odal h
g v en ver bs (C ap V I I )
. .

$ 3 27 . T he s u b u n cti vej has one com pou n d form fo r the

Pre sent T en se, a nd two for th e P as t . I t h as n on e f or the
F u t ur e .

N ote. — Duty i s ever resent, and t he verbal for ms therefore usually

p
denote pr esent acts of duty A n accompl i sh ed act of du ty may be .

vi ewed as past , but a du ty t h at i s not perform ed al ways re mai ns

prese nt ; and hence th e sub u ncti ve m oo d i s defi ci ent i n
j future

forms .

N ote .
— T he re are h o wever som e futu re forms produced i rregularly
to express th e se nse o f fu tu re O bli ati o n T h e a e fo u r su ch fo rms
g re
. r

W fi fi mi re I shall hav e to g o
-
WEST fi fi mfgfi g i t sh all be

i n cu m bent on me fi wfi gfi
1 0 go h
s a l
3 WIT l h e m y du ty to go a it

ne ws mufi (1 3 8 I shall be u nde r th e ne cessi t

y o f g oi ng .
1 74 P A R A DI G M A S or m ass . 332

C H A P T ER X IX .

P A R A DI GM A S or V ns s s .

g i ve bel o w al l th e te ns es , s i m ple co m
f ul l for ms o f con ug at i on
j
1 . Fras r C ON J UGA rrON
' '

I n tran szti ve Verb .

T ns I N DI C A mvn M OOD .

P resen t T en se .

( )
l T he P r esent I n defi ni te .

d k

S i ngu l ar . P lu ra l .

2
( ) T he P resent I mperfect .

I a m wal ki n g .

m a ari se

are a 3 1 13

3
( ) T he P r es ent I mperf ect E mphati c .

I am wal k i ng .

fi re ar m s a" ? W e“ ?
W “ m “ )
“
a“ f
.

‘
: W I“ RI
w ere? m -
ares mu st
i

. , Ef f t?n w e ,
.

(4 ) T he P r esen t P erf ect .

I h ave walk ed .

l .
-
wrai ths 5 a re
2 .
W i -
tt 5} swim
3 .
W -
e ft ti an?
3 3 2] P A RA DI G M A S o r vanes . 1 8?

Fu tu re T en se .

( )
l T he F utur e I nd e
fi n i te .

I f?m m were I g oi ng to r ead, or I sh oul d

be g oi n g to read .

w u mm m
s n .
,
-
iii
“

m m m m fi fi u u m w
s , w at
s

m m m -rif fs i t n
.
, W .
m , m , w
()
2 T he F uture D ubi ta t i ve .

‘
fi W
z BR EE
? s h ou ld I be g oi ng to rea d .

S UBJ UN C T I VE M oon .

P r esen t T ens e (F i rst For m

) .

I h e N eu t er C o nstruct i on
'

t ar a
r r
-
m i I s hou l d r ea d .

m o r ar m? m ’
a f :

m or
gi
f t n .

u rn E li a ?
T he Obj ect i ve C on stru ct i on
m m I s h o u l d re a d .

S eco nd F o r m .

T he Obj ecti ve C o ns tr ucti on .

m m E ma?i t i s n ecessary fo r me to read.

W or m m .
, fi , n . ma m m m , fil m ,
1 90 P A RA DI G M A S o r va s e s .

III. — N eg a ti ve Conj ug at i o n .

3 33
T he N e g ati ve fo rms
. of the T en se s g i ven u nde r th e
Fi rst and Secon d C onj ug ati on s are
pro du ce d by empl oyi n g t h e
N eg ati ve fo rm s of the ve rbs a
v i t l to be an d i fi r to bec o m e ,

g i ve n u n der S ecti on 25 5 . T h us

I N DI C A T I V E M o on .

P resen t I ndefi ni te .

sfi
'
I walk N eg . i f?m =rr €r I do no t walk .

-
1 . di m a me? s W W W .

2 .
i m am ‘‘
t wfh fi nm m i n a n afi m mfi a
'

3 a .

P a st T ense .

‘
'
" ‘
fl fl TB i i r I walk ed
'

. N eg IIfi a m t .
W I di d n ot walk .

‘
1 . fi m mfi m.
W a mfi r mfl .

3 . a?mm ?
are 3 was? wri ts
F ut u r e T ense .

il
-
it I sh al l walk . t 5 e
! are?I s h all n o t walk .

1 . if ar s
e u
m mi t am t?a re n a fluff .

2 s a re rm W
- T ‘s?a m ur are?
" 33
Q
o
.

3 fii fi f. W ?
i re

3 34 . F ro m th e forms g i ven abo ve th e studen t wi ll b e

abl e to ro du ce fo r m s fo r th e o ther te n s es ; b ut we shal l g i v e
p
b el o w th e Fi rs t P er so n S i n g ular for m for e ach ten se by w a y

of u i dan ce
g
IN D I C A T I V E M O OD .

‘
fi are a l éi I do n ot walk
‘
P r esen t
'
' .

317 are? I a m n o t walk i n g .

i f? wri t I h ave n ot walk e d .

tfi W ne ar I am n o t wo n t to walk .
3 34 ] P an oramas o r vas es . 191

P erf fl qrmfi “ i f I h ad n ot wal ked

'
. l .

H u b (1 ) I R Ifi fl fi r I
( st) w t w t to walk
'
. o r a s n o on .

H u b (2) i f?W
. a? I was no t wont to wal k .

F u tu re I n def fi fi W wri t ( f? 1rd? ) I shall not walk or i =r 1 .

I mp t fi W . H a? I sh all n ot be walk i n g .

‘
I ncep fl fi fi rst!" fr m: art?I sh al l n ot beg i n to walk
o
.

P erf i f 1 mm?fl ? I sh all n o t have walk e d

"

. .

Du b .
i f?m am I m ust no t be g oi ng about to
wal k .

C ON DI T I ON A L M oo n.

D u b HT a rm . w e?sh o u
ld I n ot b e wal k i ng .

P ast I ndef f r N d?i f I sho ul d not have walk ed .

Du b {i f m
. wai ti f I real ly s hou l d n o t have walk ed .

F u tu re I n def .
i fl
'
i f I h ad n o t bee n abo ut to walk .

Du b . fi
a '
m
fi r i f I sho u ld n ot be abo u t to wa lk .

S UBJ UN C T I V E M oo n .

P r es ent I nde
f .
fl ai l
”

so meti m e s “ If 51 W 3 ) I shou ld
“

n ot wal k .

I mp . m m wfi fi or n rr a rm am? I sh ou l d

n ot be walk i n g .

‘
P as t I nde f . W W i t i td or W an d I sh ou l d n o t

have walk e d .

sha ll n ot be boun d to g o .

)w a nd M a n ual =r
W e I t wi ll
not be n ecessary for m e to g o .
l9 2 ru n n arrow s . 33 5

F utur e ( 3 rd F or m ) m mi m
a e
nt an
d?I s hall n ot be nu

de r the n e c e ssi t
y of
g o i ng .

m ri t wm air? I shal l n o t b e
’

sa
u nder th e ne ce ssi ty o f g o i n g .

l u rs su l vs M oon .

1 . fi H T
r-
i wfir i
’
or wf rfl r é am we; was?
“

or af t
shall I not wal k sh al l we not wal k
2 .
i ‘
fi lfw if: do
a not walk 5 3? 2
W W do no t y ou

th ou .
wal k .

3 . i r, t
a le t h i m , i nt en d? =r mi re let t h e m
her or it n ot walk . n ot walk .

I nr mrrrvu M o on .

H
’

w n ot to wal k .

P A R T I C I PL E S .

P resent .
=r W mm m at n ot walk i ng
,
=r 1 .

P ast =r e rratum =r m we s t n o t wal k ed

-h
. .
,

P luperfect . =r 5 471 1 avi n

g not walk ed .

F utur e . =r a m ur
o
,
=r fi re m r not bei ng abou t to wal k .

G s nu s n .

3 W ,
not to wal k .

S UP I N ES .

Dat .
=r 3 17 8 1 q n ot to walk . Gen 3 W . of n o t wal ki n g .

C H A P T ER X X .

T H E P A R T I C L E S O R I N DE C L I N A B L E W OR DS .

T h e A d v erb .

33 5 3 60 .

3 35 . A n adverb is a word whi ch q u al i fies an ad e cti ve

j ,

a verb, 0 1 3 3 0 th” adve rb ‘

ih WIT m ? be i s wi se
’
S“
'
ve ry

W al g o the re ; a rr (
‘ ’

Q w f ! y ou
a t “
s h oul d wal k a l i tt l e
s l owly .
1 94 r m: PA R T IC LES . 34 1

()
1 T he re dupli cate d pre sent par ti c i pl e i n a e xpresses

th e ma nn er of an act ; as , 8 mm (1 mm si tar he came

s tu m bli n 1n the dark

g .

( )
2 T he redu pli cate d p re s en t
p arti ci pl e i n a? e xpre sses

the cu m en cy or co nt i nu e d
'
cou r s e of an act ; as, wraai 211 W
i t film he sle
pt whi l e re a di n g .

( )
8 pli ca tT he
e d p re du
as t
p arti ci le, i n flecte d b
p y m o r Eli ,

exp resses u s u al l
y the c on ti n u ance o f e i th e r a
p os tu r e o r
p o si ti on

of the bo d , or a s ta te o mi n d ; w ear m m fi
’’
f fi fi
'

fi r rgj a fi
'
t
'

y c

as he k ept si tti ng h e fi n i sh e d i t o fi w-
s a m NW T w h ether
‘ “

‘
s tan di n
g or si tti n
g ) a m
r i f?q l fl S l i t sh e u s e d t o be a t h i m at
' '

al l ti m e s ; a t?!M errat a ?ai ri n ! fl i fi fi efl sh e to ld th e story

‘ '

wi th con stern ati o n . S om e ti me s th e an or a?i s j o i n e d to an

ad ecti ve ex re ss i ve
j p o f an a tti tu de W M an ? i t? I wi ll “ “

g o an d co me back i mm e di ately .

N ata — T h e at or El i
“

is an abbrevi ati o n o f t he i nstr u mental case d!

w a f 01 W
i fi a e afi
‘
or

N ata — T h e fo rm i n m s
i so meti mes u sed condi ti onally sit mi :
5 ; a
13 2 n « r iff h e w i ll n o t g o h e nce, do wh ate v er
y o u mi ght .

rfi
'

fi at i s m o re fo rci bl e t h an éfi F z .

()
4 T he r e du l i cate d l u e rfe ct p ar ti ci pl e e x r es s e s m an
p p p p
n er forci bly ; eufi '

W W m s a m ; h e beat hi m se lf most
e E il
‘
cru el ly I fi
W mg?! I g ot t i re d by s i tti n
g e ve r so

l on g .

l si mpl e p re sen t part i ci ple i n a, an d the plu

'

34 1 ( )
5 h ‘
. e

p erfe ct
p ar ti ci ple in m , are u se d adver bi ally , to de n ote the
m a nn er i n wh i ch an ac ti on i s do ne -
i f} t arr s he we n t away

wee pi n g w fir 3 721 5 35 h e di d i t i n ten ti on ally

E m "
W
“
71 ar
3
651 1 ? we sh o u l d do i t u ni te dly ; w W
-
fi res ? we s h ould
r
s pea k co n s i de rately .

34 2 . B y the ai d o f th e g e ni ti ve case en di n s , t he i nde

g
‘

cli n able adval bs are m ade i n to adj e cti ves ; Elfi fl at mfi fi fi fl fd “

'

m ? h ian
s
p re s e n t s ta t e o f l i fe 1 8 ver
y g o o d W fi m?
r

m 1a ? éffi h e shou ld have me t o -

‘
an a
r 3 com e to see day .
1 96 T H E n arrow s . 345

Qfi
'
and ( a
ll? are u sed substanti vel y ; m l
tri l st ar W W W
fi rm arfi you wi ll not see such th i ngs at our house ; gm

m wfi ufi fi wfi w éfi a h ow long wi ll h e stay at yo ur

h ouse
3
( ) T h e u ses of m , saw how much fi rm . sw a m .

s o mu ch , g rew, so m uch , fi rm . W t as much , are

g i ven u n de r

the uses of the prono u ns .

N ol e — alt and an?are al ways co n uncti o ns, j but at and aft are
fii at
”
adve rbs as wel l H t means
.
“
i ndeed
“
bu t,
”
h owever, &c . t

t er m i n m? sfi {rm a a n 85 1 3 att fi I am i ndeed h i s father, an d

ho w cou l d I do s u ch an act
l
i g gfl at m ( 1 3 m i 7
3 11 3 : c h as;
3 11 8 “ i ii 1
1 3 1 51 , Y ou i ndeed ask a lac of ru
pees an d I am but
q fl i r W 3 a? ii may
”
ui te a m at} l “
an
p oo r d eno te s at east . a s (i

S 1 3W? A t least t wo h u ndred ru pees m i gh t h ave bee n exp ended .

345 . On e of th ep ron o mi nal adverbs is re

p eate d,
or

j oi ned to an o th e r adverb, t o m ak e up a dver bi al co m u nd s

p o

T he fo llowi n are comp ou n d adve rbs den o ti ng ti me

g

anfi fl a
fit
'
no w an d t hen , so meti me s
él ssi drag?wh en ever
' ’

w s? r gi al ways
" ' ‘
'
a e a

3 73 3 ?a
nd som et i m es

‘
37 3 5?anfi wh en soever
‘
ai nt Tlfi
‘
n e ve r

som e ti m e o r o th er
fi anti
s o me t i me o r e ve r

emf?at ?n ow an d ag ai n
“

area?amfi i ndefi ni tely

84 6 . C o mpoun d adverbs of p l ace, m an n e r, & c .
, coul d be
pro du ce d i n t he s am e m an n e r 3 p} wh erever; 3 11 3 1 am s par
,

arm so meh ow or oth e r In } 1}

3 3 h ere and the re , e ve ry where , & c .

34 7 . A ny oth er adverbs mi g ht be e mploy ed to m ak e u p

‘
adver bi al com o u nds :
p i fi t dai ly W i r eq y 33 gm
u en tl ; :

a g ai n an d ag ai n .

348 . T he ad ve rbi al parti cl e s are th u s cl assi fi ed

 200 rs s n arrow s . 349

( )
6 A dver bs of R elat i o n .

W wh en ; fl i t? wh eresoever m as fi g?

(7 ) A dver bs o
j D emonstrat i on .

Q5} h ere
; ai r th er e ;
-
Q gf n o w ; W
e
'
th e n , m li k e thi s, so

am li k e th at, so ; gay? hi ther , fi fl i @ th i ther .

()
8 A dver bs of I nt er r og a t i on .

wh e n shit whe re ?m why W H Y? W h ere mi

9
( ) A d er bs I mzta i zon
'

v o
f .

m m m em?wi th a c lang q
u i ck l
, y .
, , bri s k ly .

H , W , W é b Wz
, W fi fi
‘ ‘
m fl p op
‘
, at o n ce .

m y W ;
t it a
-
nr wer
‘
ent ra
t , . m , m at,
r
g u l i n l
p g y .

II .
— P os tpos i ti on3 .

34 9 - . A P os tpo s i ti o n i s
. a. word w hi ch s h o ws the r el ati on

o f a n o un or ro no u n to s o me o ther wor d i n th e sen ten ce

p
‘
é rsm e ar n e w m he t o ok h i s s eat.

N ote . A t th e bo tto m of al l
g en u i n e pos tpo si ti ons at
,
l eas t i n
thei r o ri
g i nal se nse , th e re exi sts a relati o n between two osi te
o
pp
“ “
di rec ti ons th u s ,
“ ”
h ave the
” ”
f rom , before , relati ons
” “
,
o ver, to

th ei r counterpoles an d
” “ “ ” “
u nder, i t owards , fro m, as p oi nts

of compar i son, as t he o pposed to th e left

”
ri h t i — B op p
g s . .

N o te — P ostpos i ti on s , as well as all o the r arti cles , were ori g i nally

.
p

m
"
no uns, ve rbs, &c .
, (l ) P ostp osi ti ons :— 35% f rom sag a s i de
at , ; qui t
i nsi de , f1 om qua i ddle fi smf abou t from raw matter ; as“ by
'

, ,

m eans of , from m E a} to do (2) C onj u ncti ons t— Efi fl fl l

' ’ “
f or , ”
f rom
mm a re aso n
; mga th e refo re e
,
from w ar to say . W hen parti cular
n omi nal o r ve rbal fo rm s become stereo typ ed as rel ati ona l w ords by
c o nstant u se , th ei r o ri g i nal ch aracter g radual l
y come s to be for gotten
and of ten th ei r o ri g i nal fo rm i s modi fi ed . ? at , i s the
T hu s, are cru de

fo rm of an? a si de, and si g ni fi es nothi n

g b ut at , to ,
t owards .
I ts f u ll dati ve fo rm i s, also , so meti m es u se d m 3
to wards th i s m afi a t o wards that .

3 50 . T he n o u n to whi ch a
p os tpo s i ti on is j oi n ed ass umes

i ts cru d -
e for m 88 before th e o s t osi ti o n i n: a ho use,
p p
stru
m ? from a h ou se . T he pos tp o si ti on s erves, i n fact,
 nu s Pa s 1 0 1 3 8 n - 1

203 :

N Gi sh
—
W and M ai
g n y w onl wi thout or except ; m
or qi g g j t ai r do not come wi tho ut taki n
g i t ,
but fi rm expresses

so m e m o re i deas . It expresses besi des, 2

( ) wi thou t or exce pt,

m m
.

in c om
pos i ti o n, addi ti onal or extra u n} m ,

w e? besi des t hi s he sai d so meti n

g else am am?am} dc ~

no t g o wi tho ut m e R m: w or i tfh r w -
e xtra collec ti ons T he .

pos t po s i ti o n Gi ft agr ees wi th fi m i nmll th e senses of fi lm “ . I ;

is u sed, i n addi ti o n, to express t he sens e of excl usi o n, .

wi th certai n

m t to -
ve r bs li k e a do. i fi to “ 13 m m “ : m or e a
m w 3 6 5i "
exce p ti ng me all th e others were i nvi ted . .

N ata —
fi lm! expres ses bes i des »
as well as wi thout or

latter meani ng ; “ m
”
e xc e p t, wh i le W h as o nly the Fi fi

m m ?I h ave
are none exce pt hi m m m m W i l l i}
m m W ar . I have two bro thers besi des these two .

No e
t — T he pos t posi ti on fi al ong wi th; i s neodi 1 0 poetr ;
y

[I L — C onj uncti

356 . A con j un ct i o m m s wo rd: used: to conne ct: the di fi e r

out p art s o f a n e xt e n ded se nte n ce , or t wo a fli r mati on s s -
ai '
s

A nr u n
g zebe , h avi n g l eft B arhan pu r, w e nt to M alwa an d o i n e d j
M u ra d ; can?! as W .
W in fi rm m a ma "
m .

Stat es m an? arc h ; tr ig m 5?W -

m fir ws és mi n at

g naw fi at w , m m fi ,
at he w as
g e n e rall
y l i k e d fo r .

h i s pl e as i ng address, bu t was su s pecte d to have tak e n p art i n ~ r .

t h e g r eat r obbe ri es i n the Ko n k an .

N o tc —
Ere n-
when th e j
co n u ncti o n appe ars only! to c onnect two
-
.
.

w or ds , it reall y co nn e cts two s ente nces . P estposi ti ons co nne ct two .

ac ti o ns con uncti o ns, t wo

j m
p pos i ti o ns . .

357 . T he con
j un cti o ns are th u s c las s i fi ed

T ho se whi ch un i ts se n te nce s r ifn fo rm woll i n mean

’
1 . as ae

i ng , ar e ca ll e d C op u lati ve C onj un cti o ns , W , W , I , m an d

f f 5 th at ; 6
,
‘
, m al so ; w l
a s o, l i k ew i se ; W that is
fi rm nay ; th u s , a
i m m , s i t W sc h y o u a re no t on l
y
a. li ar, but also a th i e f : i t“ I 33 a ho rse an d a n o x .
 r m: n arro w s .

N o te i that, i a used ch i efly i n o ld w ri ti ngs ; hi ?fi sfi fi i t?3 m

— ’
a
'
.
,

m w “ N il W S
ui ,
I t was wri t ten t he re t ha t we sho u ld maké
p e ace and become one .

2 . T hos e whi ch j oi n sen te nc es tog e ther , bu t di sc o n nect

t hei r m ean i ng, ar e call ed Di sj u ncti ve C o nj u n cti on s fi rm w , ar
aft. a mt T h us, u nfi t «ne w em t
i
’
-
s a
P t
‘

e-
i
, an or .
i ars

R a ma or hi s bro th e r m us t h a ve do ne i t .

3 T ho se whi ch bu t e x re s s contr a r i e ty
'

co n n ect s e n te n ce s ,
'
.
p
o f s e nse s , a re calle d A dve rsat i ve C o nj u n ct i o ns : qw fi g , qfi ,
'

m
,

«( fo
bu t , a m a t ? tho u g h , afi , -
FP lTfi st i ll. T h us , in i W T

m Grt
i
"
m w ,
S ha baji as s u re d the m t hat h e w as not

i m p li cated i n i t , s ti l l th e c o ur t o f Bij apo o r di d not be l i eve h i m ;

m m s fssfi fi afi w warm aft arm fi w av m
‘
frt ,

m 773 1 mi l Sb1 vaj i was ve ry m uch di s tr ess ed by t h i s appre h e n

s i o n, bu t h e di d n o t su bmi t t o s u ch a tre ach e ro u s e ne m
y .

4 . T ho se whi ch s tate a r e as o n, o r
p pur os e, are ca l led C a us a
ti ve C o nj u ncti o ns ; 65 ?f t, m m 0
: 5 ? be cau s e , i n or de r th a t
i
m t he re fo re, i n or der -
th a t ; Si tl tfi
'

, ar m m as ft at t h e r e fo re ;
,

swat now , i n p re se nt ci rcu m s ta n c e s . T hu s , at SI N G !i ”

t
ers ?a re fi fe tr
e at , a
m an m u co
g s a ro m a m m
38 3 7 h e ap p reh e n de d that h e wo u ld tak e re ve ng e o n hi m ,
a n d t he re fore h e o rde re d hi m at o n ce to be a s sa s s i n at e d .

N o te i s deri ved fro m m at to

. sa
y, and mean s li te ral ly, th i s
bei n g s ai d, thi s bei ng th e fact . I t has th ese se nse s

1 . I t has th e se n se o f the re fo re m fi réft W

F "W
! 3 1 3 i ?! m 3 be abu s e d me and t he re lo r e I s la
pp d e

h i m i n th e face .

2 . I t h as the force of th e de mo ns tr ati ve p ro n o u n a, us e d at

th e e n d o f. a s e n te nce to m ake i t di s ti n ct a nd m i ne n t ; a?
ro
p
gi t at ? i f W
? W h e s ai d t h a t h e w o u ld co me to y o ur
h o se ; fi fl l W WIT i t“ ? R EE “ If?m an g o i s
C o od fr ui t
’

u S a g .

th e s e n se o f {m call e d
”
It h W
“
3 . as R 5 ;
U
M RN I
th e re wa s o f A brah am , c a lle d I s aac
i n" a so n .
206 r m: n ar row s ; 36 O

fag h !an?! i “ f ! ! m l ( ) h (q a}!

1
s u
s re sa ve e r cy c r e
p r oac : ,
.

‘
s ha me !(d ) prohi bi tt on a a
i i no do n t l h u s h ! (e)
’
or t . ,

i n d zfi erencc : sf: ump h l

5 T ho s e u s ed i n a
. ddress i ng perso ns masc uli ne, s fi , 3
O fe m “ i f, i l O l a. ma sc or form ’

w .
pl us , mas c . or fe m .

wi t O '
.

NO e
t - fi o
“

‘and ?are not respectful

-
fo rms, bu t a re freq
u en tl
y use d

i n conte mpt or cudcarme nt t he same i s tru e of s i r, h at m W

mi m m wh y de s t tho u crfll m y
y s t i lch i ld,
l fl a r k
w m
,

m m 3 3 H T . 0 be l o n di you : w i l l se e
y o ur c h i l d
ag ai n i n th at H appy L and ; sift { a i m m m ? 0 fo ol, wh aash all I
say to thee si n ul ar j u t respect tu l; 3 gm,
g 1 m @ - G od sa ve

me .
whi ch i s plu ral, i s used i n addressi ng su peri o rs a nd o the rs to
o

w ho m we wi sh to bc form ally } W f t Wi lli

i
~
co urteous ; an W !" rs

blh m able an? m E

zra} ; fi ffi m
'

si n, i n th i s h e is no t ,

0 worsh i ppers, prai se God A re li gi ous men di ca nt or teac her, ,

whose rel i gi ons ch aracter gi ves h i m a superi ori ty ove r eve n k i n gs, = -
mi g ht sayr i W , yfi W . 0 ki ng; "my t ho u he hap py ;:but
eve ry o ther pe rson wo ul d use an } , w is us ed fami l i arly, tho ugh »

respectful ly , i n addressi ng a ma n . or wo man am “ If?! m .

a
dfi s nafi all
‘

( O s i r !yo u have fong otte n i t

-
.

$ 3 60 . T he re a re a f w w
e o rds iu the la u g m g e; whi ch : are

n ot n ece ssary to mak e u

p t he se ns e o f a s e n tenc e; but are

so m et i m e s i n se r te d to fi ll‘a fo r o rnam e n t ; f?
“

vacan cy, or I

W W it i n I wi ll j ust sit readi ng ; fi arm

’ '

,
'

w as W .

aW W at?W I q ui e tl
y aro s e fro m h e re , an d we nt

q u i etl y t o hi s i s th i s i n de e d the
t u rban bro u g h t by y o u mi rrq m ?w m fi wrafi ? why,
' ‘

rfi

R amrao, h ow do you T he follo wi ng are a fever -

feel to day
M arat hi e xple t i ve s ; am ; am fi ll; 515 , a: 3 5 W , m
3 111 1 , & c So me ti mes whol e s e n te nces ar e th u s i n s erted; 3 1
7 .
m
“ W l l
i '
an d what sh e lL B saa
y W fi flf
‘"
m m ay Go d,
b les s y o u, & c . So m e of the e xpl e ti ve s have , i t m u st be co n

f es s e d, a force and me ani n g whi ch .

o th e r wo rds h ave n ot,

a nd wi th o ut th em the M ara thi l an g uag e wou ld be de r i ved

p
'

o f n o t a li ttl e of i ts i di o mat i c vi g o ur au di g m ce as i s i llus

, ,

t rate d i n th e above sent enc es w i th em -

’
,
on e s o w n .
 208 ms
3 5 e
s o r na saru t
uni o n . ll 0 0 h
«

PA R T II .

C H A P T E R X XI .

DER I VA T I O N .

T h e Ori g i n an d C omp osi ti on of th e M arathi

L an g u ag e .

361 381 .

T he H i n dus of th e hi g he r clas s es or cas te s are

de n o m i nate d A ry as (no b le s , but e ty m o lo g i c a lly c u lt i va to rs ) a ,

n am e w h i c h i s als o g i ve n to m a n y o t h er ra c es wh o s e a n c i e n t

l ang uag es , l i te ratu re s, a n d re l i

g i o ns are a na lo
g o us to th o s e of

t he H i nd us . A s the m aj o r i ty of th e A ry an n ati o n s i nha bi t

Euro p e an d I ndi a , they are al s o des i g nate d I n do -
Eu ro pe a n
or I n do -Ge r ma ni c race s .

3 62 . T he I n do -
Euro pe an race s a re t he Gree k s , t he
R o ma ns , the C el ts, the T e u to n s, t he S clavo n es, t he P e rsi a ns,
a nd t h e H i n du s . T hey a re de sce n de d fro m o ne co m m o n s to c k,

an d the i r l an g u ag e s co i n c i de c hi e fl i n a rd to voca bl e s f
y re
g o a

p u re l
y p r i va te or do mes ti c n a tu re .

N ol an— I r i s preci se ly tho se wo rds and ele ment s w hi ch t he

“
are

m ost pr i m i ti ve, t he mo st f u ndam e ntal. and t he m os t e ssent i al

pa r ts

o f e ach lang uag e whi ch t hey h ave i n co mmon . I mean , fi rs t, t h ose

wo rds wh i ch e xpre ss the na tu ral r el ati o ns o f father , mot he r, &c .

,
a nd

k i ndred g enerally , seco ndly, t he prono u ns thi r dly, t he pre pos i t i o ns

a n d par ti cles ; fo u rth ly t h e wo rds ei t press i ng nu mber
, and fi fth ly,
t he f or ms o f i nflecti o n - Dr M m r . .
’

3 63 . T he vo ca bl e s of th e di ffere nt A r y an lan g u ag e s
di fi e r i n form , bu t t he i r i de n ti ty o f o r i g i n can be easi ly t raced .

T h ei r vari ati o ns a re s u ch as can be acc o u nte d fo r by s u p

o si n su c h cau ses fo r the m as cap ri ce, a lte rat i o n i s p hy s i cal
p g
ci rc u ms ta n ces, di ff ere n ce s o f e d u ca ti o n , a nd var i e ti e s i n t he
o g
r a n s o f s
pe e c h ,
w h i c h a re
p ec u li a r t o d i f
f e re n t ra ces . T he
fo l lo w i n g l e tte rs ar e e xc l u s i ve ly pec uli ar to S a ns k r i t the

p alatal s q , 5 , a , gr, 31, an d {r the li ng uals Z , 3 , i f

, e, an d l i
t;
21 0 m s c aro m or M A R A T H I . 365 — 4

twi ce
dé dfm to g i ve
burde n to bear
zdda n to be g et
bzi dcm to be

I th i n k

3 65 . S ansk ri t i s re arde
g d as th e ol de s t of th e
A ryan
l an g uag es, an d e xi s ts i n i ts p ri m i ti ve fo r m i n th e Ve das , the
o ldes t li te rary book s of t h e H i n du s I t con ti n ued
. as the
li te ra ry as well th e popu lar lang ua g e o f th e H i ndu A ry a ns,
as

wh o we re e m i ran ts fr o m C e n t ral A si a, u
g p to abo u t 900 B c , . .

after w hi ch i t ceas ed to be th e i r ve rnacu lar, al tho u h

g it con

ti n ne d to be sedu lo u sly c ul ti vate d fo r al l t he

h i g he r p u rposes
of l i te rature Fo r popu lar
an d reli g i o n . p p
u r o se s th e A r
y ans

u s e d s everal n ew di al e cts w h i ch h ad s p r un a mo n t h m
g u
p g e

by a m i xtu re of the i r o wn la ng uag e wi th tho se o f the a bori ~

i n e s amo ng whom th ey had se tt le d T h o u lar d i a le cts

g e
p p .

we re den o mi nated P ré kri t .

N ote . T he word pr ak ri ta came f ro m prak ri ti p rocrea t i ve

nature, and means deri ved, t he se veral Pr ak ri ta di alec ts bei ng

regar ded as deri vati ves of Sans k ri t ei ther di r ectly or medi ately . T he
ori g i nal lan guage fr om wh i ch a h er spr i ng s is call ed p r ak p ti or

s o und. T hu s , H eme C h undra. says, P r ak ri t h as i ts ori g i n in

S ans k ri t th at wh i ch i s der i ved, o r co mes f rom th e latter, i s cal le d
P rakr i ta . T he ex ressi ons
p Sanskr i t and Prak ri t are opposed to each

o th er in another se nse, when th e fo rm er wor d deno tes men o f cu lti

vate d mi nds , and the latter th ose wh o are u ncu lti vated. T h e t e rm
P r ak ri t i s therefor e a lso a
ppl i ed to v ul
g ar and p r o v nic a i l fo rms of
’
eech . —
L assen
s
p
N o te — I n th e S ansk ri t dramas t hat are e xtant , t he wo men and

ser vants are re pres e nt ed as co nvers i ng i n th e P rak ri t, w hi le the

ri e sts , t he k i ng s, and o th e r e rs o ns o f ra nk an d e duca ti o n i n t he
p p
Sansk ri t . T he c hang e s w h i c h Sansk ri t vo cabl es, as w ell as i nfle cti o ns,
have u n der
g o ne i n t he P r ak ri t , ar e su ch as wo ul d be effecte d by
i lli terate peo ple u s i ng th e l ear ned l ang u age . T h us, s tr i became
 3 69 J r ns c aro m or M A R AT H I . 21 1

{si n} r akta became r ak at, and kshatri ya became khal ri ya, khi tti a,
”
o r chh a ttay u .

3 66 . Varar uchi , the a utho r of the o ldes t an d mos t au tho

r i ta t i ve
g ra mmar of t he P rak ri ts , m e n t i o ns fo u r di alect s ,
am o n w h i h h s s i ns the fo re mo st l t M ha a h i
g c e a
g p ace o a r s t ,
r

t he i m medi ate so u rce o f M a rathi I t i s p ar ex cellen ce t h e .

P rak r i t, a nd h e de vo tes to i t n i ne ch apters o ut o f the t welve

i nto whi c h h i s bo ok i s di vi de d .

367 T h e fo ur P rak r i t di alects me n ti o ned by Vara ru chi

.

are d i s ti ng u i sh e d by the names of the pro vi n ces i n whi ch they

a re s a i d to ha ve flo uri s he d . T he M ai zé r éahtri was curre n t in
M ah M ri g ctdh i , i n M ag adha, th e m ode rn Bahar
rash tra t he
a /

t he S aur a s eni i n S f] ras e n a, t he reg i o n ro u n d a bou t M ath u ra

a n d t h e P a i sé chi was the l an ua e o f the P i sa
'

g g cha s ,
barbaro u s

hi l l -
t ri bes .

3 68 . S an s k r i t words u nderwe nt the follo wi ng ch ang e s

i n t h e Przi kri ts
I — T/ze Vowel Chang es .

3 69 . l . T he P rék ri t s us ually re tai n al l the vo wels, e xcept

i t, i t s as, at , I? a nd a d .

( ) a n i
i s ch a n
“

g e d to fl , as fi
r
s t
! a d e b t, P r R w , M {f o
r b u t . .

i f t he ar
e i s c o m b i n e d w i t h a co n s o na n t , i t i s c h a n
g ed t o at , r

or s
'

t hu s , Sk . E ?g “ rass , P r avr, M
. . 3 3 ; S k i t? . s i g h t, Pr .

‘
fi ér, M .
6! Sk 1 3
. seas o n , Pr . 3 1 .

(b) i; be c o m es 1 1 o r an , r are ly o r i ; S k % FSTH , P r a ra rfi r . .

Sk a n a d
. e m o n , P “
r “ i t S k a
? fa te ,
P r 3 r d o r t ea M . . . .

ffar ha m ro duce d i n S i n dh , P r W S k Q 7 } fi r mne ss ,

p . .

Pr f“ ; M fil ' ‘
. i . t .

() c s ai s chan g ed to 8 h“
or are ; s o me ti me s to a ; Sk .

fl aws: yo uth , Pr . s tra t,

i M . 32 m! S k t
il t . a c i t i ze n , P r vs fr,
.

M W IT
. S k 3 31 . m welfare , Pr . f re e or W , M .
m .

2 . at is som e ti m e s ch an g e d to f , q an d a i r:
( ) a S . n : c cck e d, P r
k i .
m ,
M . fi fi
’ '

, ri
pe .

S k a n d a fan , P r
. .
W it ,
M .
m , a fan .

W m ffm
‘

Sk . : a l i ve coa l, P r f fl é r, M . . or i
'
.
 T H E O R I G I N or M A R A T H I . 3 70

b
( ) Sk .
m a bed, P r em . , M as . .

S k I f? a
. creeper , P r . m , M i s . .

() T h
ce i t be co m e s si t when fol lo wed by q; Sk . m s al t ,

P r an , M fi r r sal tu ess i n a soi l

.
v . .

3 . A l on g vo w el follo we d by a do uble lette r i s sh ortene d

S k an}: a way , P r W fl , M W trace, track
'

. . . a .

Sk ( hi : l ong , P r fi rst}
. . .

S k gj , P r gear
’
. . .

N at a — S o meti m e s t h e long vowel i s retai ned, and the j

co n u nct

s i m pli fi ed ; Sk {m m a lord, P r m i } o r fa i l . . .

4 . A s ho rt vow e l follo wed by a co nj u nct i s so m e ti m e s

l e ng th e n e d, an d th e conj un ct s i mpli fi ed S k fi ner . a tong u e ,

P r fi lm, M
. . i f” .

5 T h e sh ort
. vow e ls { an d 3 ,
fo l lo we d by con u ncts, are u s u al ly
j
ch ang e d to Q and si rres pecti vely , r etai ni ng the j
co n u n cts

l u mp P r fie
“

Sk . fi v e: a . M . fie
Sk .
W : re d lead Pr . or fi g: M if
? .

Sk W t he face Pr M all ?
2m
“
. . .

Sk .
W a
p ea rl Pr . M . fiRfl '

II .
—
T he S i mp le C ons onants .

3 70 . 6 . T he si n
g l e con so nan ts tr, W, a , an d at are u s ua ll
y
c h ang e d i n th e P ré k r i ts fo r the two s i bi lants H is su bs ti tu te d ,

O
r for a , an d i f for at
Sk . W 3 a so u n d Pr . t ra it M .
m
Sk . s x : a e un u ch
i
Sk .
wit a ri ver Pr .
o
r !
“

N ata — A t R atnagi r i H f i s the word for aft, a ri ver.

Sk .
m g l or
y Pr . afi r
Sk .
W : 8» de mi -
g od Pr .
m M W t! ex cee di n l
g y
o ld an d i n fi rm .

7 . T he aspi rate s are ch ang ed to g

Sk . ( In! a m erch an t P r erg . M .

m
Sk . a
l to be Pr i t . M .
i t be come thou
 tru e ca l o w o r maaarm '
. 3 72

as Sk . bel ly , Pr .
W , M .
i i ! si de of th e bo dy ;
Sk .
h a fi el d, P r . 31 , M W .
; Sk .
W a p ond, Pr .
m ,

M mm
14 .
( 0) Of two di ssi mi lar s tron
g l e tte rs, the las t di s l a ces
p
th e fi rs t
ear I
'

8 st W
' “

m or w = fl
w or w =
r
W or m W
15 . T he s i bi lan ts, c o m bi ne d wi th the we ak l e tte rs,
r e tai n a l ace i n the modi fi ed co n u nct j W WT, W
p ; i n, , , “ 3 5,
a, &c . (a .

16 .
() e T he weak le tter i n con u ncti o n
j wi th i f i s so me ti mes
ch ang e d to th e anusv r, an d a i t to H
Sk . an ; a tear , P r . ai d , M . s fiq
Sk .
wfi '

a tou ch, Pr . m , M . su m -i
z t
3 72 . W e g i ve be low a fe w addi ti onal words t o i ll u s trate
th e above ch an e s
g
S an sk r i t . P rakri t .

a fi re s
p ectable

5 3 7 651 1 35 a p o tter

su
p e ri o r, bank e r
g ear dry
m t o u tsi de

e mi t : o xen

£ 501 : a p i llar

W a te mple
( arm a
pl ace

fi rs t t u rme ri c
 § 3 73 ] ru e ome n: or xanarat . 2 15

W : da rk ness
s wan s e l f, n o m i
s ng . arm , wn
a ar m a fathe r

a : who fit
W to s
pe ak fil m?!
n: r i pe fi i flfi
‘
i
'

5 3 73 . N ot o nl v Sans k ri t wo rds, bu t the i nflecti ons al s o

unde fi ve n t chan e s
g i n the Pr ak ri t
De cle nsi on of the n ou n B u ddha .

S i ngu la r . l '
al

Sa n s k r i t P r ak ri t . San sk ri t .

m
. .

l .
33 :

2 .

m m
3 ae
r :
are
Sa the 6 th S ame th e 6 th
éz
n as as
4 .
i a e Si ,
“

a 3
13 33 .
or
s af r
e
si s
C onj ug ati on of th e ver b 3 5 to
A C T I VE C ON J UGA T I ON .

P resent T en se .

S i ng u lar P l ura l .

S an sk r i t . S ansk ri t .

1: serfs
2 .
( «i s

I M PER A T IV E M o on .
224 m s ome ns or ma nu al . 3 81

A dj ecti ve m l ubri cous, s lack ;

m oi ly ;ga r i m
ot e n t.
p
V er b as“ to sli p su dden ly ;3 685 8 3 ; to cra wl abou t
g g as

!wlfi fi i to besmear wi th g re ase .

A dver b 3 3 53 65 or art co nti nually dri ppi ng .

5 -
Or m s A N Y A DES A J C m ss
. .

R oot Ar . m a h orse -
shoe .

Der i va ti ves .

m m .
, m a sh o er of h orse s ; “ f , a sor t o f
p alk h i
m m , a set of h o rs e -
sh oes w e?f the pri ce fo r s h oei n g
m
. .
,

a h orse m a -
horse sh oe n ai l ; a fami l i ar ter m

for t he beare r of a pa ti cu la l i n th e M oh u rr u m
r r
po e .

R oot P ers fi fi lfi t tem p er, fas ti di o us ne ss

. .

Deri va ti ves .

A dj ecti ve m —
tfi , m fasti di ou s .

3 8] T he vari o us elem e nts whi ch e n ter i nto th e com

p o s i ti on o f M arath i h ave
i ts pe cu li ar u se each
T h e I m i ta .

ti ve P arti cl es an d th e Désaj wor ds occur chi efly i n th e s pee c h

o f t h e lo w e r cl asses , an d g i ve th e i r tho ug h ts a n d f e e l i n
g s a .

bodi ly fo r m and expr ess i o n . T he T ad bhdvas are e m ploy ed by

t he h i g he r clas se s for all popu lar pu rpo ses, wh i le th e T a ts am a s
e n ter copi ou sly i n to th ei r fo rmal an d learned di scou rs e .

-
T he A nya Des i l ang uag es (the A rabi c an d P ersi an ,
t hrou g h

th e Urdu ) co nt ri bu te a larg e nu mber of valuable vocable s

r e lati n g to th e arts an d i n sti tu t i o ns o f ci vi li zed li fe, an d i m p ar t

to the lang uag e i n to wh i ch th e y are i ncorporated, si ng u lar l i fe
an d e n erg y . W he n a fo rmal di scou rse of a s ecul ar nat u re i s to
be s u stai ned wi th cou rt esy an d di g ni ty , m anly pas si on to
or a

be e xpressed wi th vehe men ce, Urdu words an d phras es a

freely u sed by th e M arathi s I t i s n o exag g erati on to say that
.

Urdu i s re e mi n en tly a k i n g ly l an g u ag e
— I t s h ras eo lo
p gy h as a
p .

di g ni ty and a maj e sty, and, wi th al, a fi re an d e ne rg y th at no

o t her I n di an vernacu lar p o s se ss e s . B orn an d c radle d i n th e

ca m p, i t h as a l wa
ys co n t i n u e d t o be th e lan ua
g g e o f t h e C o u rt
an d th e ca m p , c om m u n l c a t i n g i t s m an ly f or ce a nd v i g o u r t o
 3 83 ] m u ral Damvs rrou 227

C H A P T ER XX I .

T H E P R IN C I PL ES or M A R A TH l DER I VA T I ON .

see —
s4 3 1 .

3 82 . A ll th e M aréthi words whi ch cannot be traced to a

si mpler fo rm i n the lang uag e , no m atter what be the o ri g i nal

lang uag e from whi ch th ey are deri ved, wh ether San sk ri t,

P rak ri t , A rabi c, P ersi an , or Eng li s h, may be denomi nated
M arath i roots 3 79 .

3 83 . N e w words are formed from th e M arah i t roots in

the fo ll owi ng seven way s

B
( ) y
1 m o di f i
y gn the radi cal vowe s or consonan ts :
l l
' ’
hslfi to
bi nd ; t i ar a dam ; t han a shape fi an an eye ; m an eyel e t or

a li ttl e hole ; Wfi to fall q rfi to fell w ai t to tear

W to tear ( tr a ns .

() y
2 B m odi f i n
y g both t he rad i ca l vo wels and con sonants

5
2 i to g t l n i
oose, u loose ; di g t to l oo s e
3 e .

( ) y
3 B j oi n i ng letters or
par ti cle s e i ther before or afte r a

word : g fi to break 31 + u nbro ke n ( m an e r

g
m + §z = t rl fi z p assi onate . T he parti cle before a wo rd i s
w i arti cl e after i t, a s uffi x (m )
called a
p re fi x ) (a a t , an d t he
p .

()
4 B y do u bl i ng the si mple word q
fi g rai n , « ? g rai n
at
,
&c .

( ) y
5 B u ni ti n tw o words to expre s s one n oti on, bo th words
g
retai ni ng a
p lace i n th e compoun d : w black and afar a cat

= anm i at a p ol e cat .

u ni on of two words so that o ne of

( ) y
6 B t h e the words i s
l
so mewh at o s t as oi l an d (w ll
i wate r = fiwr fl
v Sl i m: sour an d

m s m e ll = sfi w rm
() y
7 B t he u ni on of t wo wo rds, wh i ch, wi th out enteri ng i n to
formal co m p o si ti on , expre ss o ne si m ple i dea : as gram an

assi stan t .

N ote .
— I n formal com posi ti on t he i nflecti ons i nd i cati ng th e re lati on

exi sti n
g be tw e en t he two uni t i n g wo rds are dro
pp ed : a m m
ki ng s h ou se , ( m
’
m
a palace am ?are ?red earth J i n anfl red -
earth T he geni ti ve Q T of a m
. and f of are omi tted 1 n the m
com ounds
p m and m .
 23 0 l l ABA l B l' ‘ nsax
va nou. '
3 93

39l T he causati ve an is assume d by some i ntransi ti ve

verbs , chi efly the ne uters, after they have by a chang e of th ei r
radi cal form become transi ti ve ac ti ves ; th e form made up wi th
the an th en becom es stri ctly cau sati ve ; th uS, 1 1 5i to g raze .
1 1 1 i to feed, and unfi t to caus e to feed .

3 92 . T he form whi ch the i n trans i ti ve

radi cal chang es of

n euter verbs underg o are of two k i nds ; lst, th e l en gthen th ei r

y
i ni ti al vo wel , as 'R i to fall, i n tran si ti ve (111 i to fell, tran si ti ve ;
and 2n dly , they both le ng th e n the i ni ti al vowel, as well as

chan g e a radi cal consonant, as firei to g et loose, i ntr an si ti ve

h i to l oose, transi ti ve . We g i ve belo w some M arath i verbs

of bo th th ese k i nds

l T he verbs that len gth en only the i n i ti al vowel

In tr ansi ti ve . C au sa ti ve .

M to dro p m i te strai n 3 113 1

73
!to cau se to s trai n

qfi to g raze 1 11 i to feed fl rl
'
fi to cause to fee d
ant i to pas s by s e
a s t to re move 3 76 7 ? to c au se to re m ove
at ? to”
fl o at , or be save d
i
art t to save ‘ i
s trat t o cau se to s a ve

«i i to be cru sh ed mi to c r u sh ( N ri
a to cau se t o c r u s h

vi i to fall magi to fel l m i to cau se t o fe l l

In l
fi l to di e qrt i to k i ll qrrzri to cau se t o k i ll
(H i to re move { mi to re move m i to cau seto r e m o ve

2 . T he verbs that m o di fy bo th the i ni ti al vo wel an d th e

r adi ca l co nson an t

Intransi ti ve
'
. T r ansi ti ve . C ausa ti ve .

i i l ai to break an zi
’

to break z to to br eak
'

z
' '

cause
g
We i to g e t l oose fi n i to loose i mri to cause to l o o se

s zi to br e ak mi to break min i to cau se to br e ak

ai to g e t loose i
t he r to l oos e “ Hi to to l o o s e
g
'
cau se

3 93 . T he g rammati cal con s tr uct i on of t h e cau sal deri vati ve s

di fi ers a ccordi n t t h ei r ori g i n
g o .

1 . W hen th e ori g i nal ve rb i s tran s i ti ve i ts s u bj e ct i s , p u t i n the

i nstru me ntal case g ove r ne d by th e p o s tpos i ti o n ari a, an d

ano th e r s u b ect j is u se d wi t h i ts cau sal form (H T W ter m?

R ama eats bread ; C ans .
‘
H i Ir m a W M , I cau s e
 3 99] M A aA r m na mm rl on . 23 1 ?

R ama to eat bread . I n the cau sal sentence , t mr i s p ut i n th e

i nstrumen tal cas e
g overn ed by m , an d se
parated from al l

di rect control up on th e causal ver b, an d a forei g n ag ent is

i ntroduce d as th e di rect j
su b ect of t he verb.

N ote — I n Sanskri t, also, th e sub ect of

j th e si mple verb becomes i n
strumental wh en the verb assumes th e cau sal for m; t rfii un i m
R ama abandons hi s w i fe Causal -
fl i !
t
W W ( He mak es
R ama abandon h i s wi fe .

2. W hen the ori g i nal verb i s i ntransi ti ve, i ts j

s u b ect is
made the ob ect, e i
j the r acc usati ve o r dati ve, of i ts cau s al fo rm ,
and a forei g n ag ent i s i ntro du c ed as th e di rect s u bj e ct of t he
fl rfirm ? R ama sle e ps; C ans E l? ( m ar fifi rfi fi r
"
causal for m ; as t r
‘
.

he causes R ama to sl ee
p .

3 94 . I n both th e cau sal con s tr uc ti o ns

f orei g n di rect ag ency
i s i mpli e d, but th e addi ti onal i de a of i ndi rect a n i n eces
g e c
y s

saril
y i m pli ed only when th e ori g i nal ve rb i s transi ti ve, no t when
i t i s i ntransi ti ve .

3 95 T h e A nomalous Verbs are li ke th e i n transi ti ves i n

.

re ard to thei r cau sal constru cti on as (Ti r

g r R a ma l ear ns m
Cans i ii m m fi l
. m
he teach es R ama .

3 96 T he i dea of i ndi rect ag en cy can be e xp resse d by th e

.

causal fo r ms of th e I ntran si ti ve and A n omalous V er bs b j o i n

y
i ng an addi ti on al at to th e m E lli ( mm W W
by R a i ; W fi m m w
'

H e got R ama seated

H e caused R ama to be taug ht by H ari .

3 97 . W hen an addi ti onal er i s j oi n ed to the cau sal fo rms of

the si m le
p tran si ti ves, th ey beco me do u ble ca usati ves wfi
i
«ri m W mm W g o t
hi m puni sh ed by the teacher throug h hi s fath er .

3 98 T he . causal verbs, n o m atter what be thei r deri vati on ,

or cons tru cti on are all transi ti ves , an d can be conj u ated
, g
re ularl
g i n th e Seco nd C o nj ug ati o n ( S ect 220
y . . .

II .
— T he P otenti a l Ver b .

39 9 . T he P otenti al Verb expresses the a bi li ty of the

 M A RA TH I DER I VA TION . 4 05

3 : bad
W a bad deed m a had thoug h t .

Far a long ti me ; m fo r a lo ng ti me ; m a daug h ter .

3g , had a bad q ual i t

y W e vi l practi ces .

=r n ot m an ath ei st.

W vari o u s m m vari o us .

fi t i nto, downwards fl i rt cond ucti ng fir m fallen down ;

m absorbed in .

firz, fi g, Em wi thou t fi fi '

fl blamele ss ; fi mwn: formless

c
'
.

qt an othe r m a stran
g e r M vrnhr an o the r
. vi llag e .

m back , away
w h avi ng the face turn ed back ;m
'
t

de feat .

q
fi '

ro un d vi a? walk i n g rou n dabout.

m after W N W re
pe n tan ce .

a
g r a ai n
g gai n ! re
g enerati on
m a rem arri ag e .

w as se aratel ;
p y m s eparati on
3 6 1
74 13 vari o u s , mani fo 1d .

tr before I
Q ! th e bei ng before, a l ord ; w ra ‘
a mi ni s ter .

qfi t back , ag ai n m : a reflected beam su

g a r a reply.

‘
was o u t i fu lt
'

adu ltery .

fi r apart ai r! di sj o i n i n g ,
F ? separati on fi rm!a wi dow .

a wi th R afi ! h avi ng li fe “ If?!o f th e sam e caste .

at! g o od M a
g ood acti on m a vi rtu ous p erso n .

{1 1 tog ether wi th i tl l? g oi ng wi th,

'
a j uncti on (li qa con
n ecti on .

at w i th , to ge th er w i th m i nterco urse .

w l l d-l k i r
u n d th ou g ht
a e as g ? o o o o n g g t a
g oo .

; wfi r own
’
nati ve
’
at o ne s own a coun try a s?
] one s

i nte ll ect .

i
a r o f o ne
’
s sel f, s
pon ta neou sly w i self-exi stent “ W
th e choosi ng of a hu sband .

II . P refi xes .

4 05 . El m P . defi ci ent ; amcf i t weak

'

.
§ 4 07 ] ‘’
M A BA I B I naarva rl os .
'
23 5

311 (A ) s oth er m a mi su nderstandi ng ;fim i expenses

in an i mproper way .

Qt , Qt H . each m ever
y m o nth mm dai ly .

m W fl m i
'

A a di sapproved
‘
ar
‘
. n ot or e e n ate .

i t“ P . be fo re, a leader m Pesh wa .

n P . bad m a bad de ed m m adj . i nfam ous .

fiw H . wi tho ut m1 ; wi thout a mi stak e Fm

wi th o u t o p pos i ti on .

i P . wi th out firm wi th ou t re medy i f!

“ shape es s, l
cl u m sy .

m: H . head W th e head S ubh édar .

S urmxns .

§ 4 06 . T he s u ffi xes u se d i n M arathi are m or e n u me rou s

th an the prefi xes, an d are de ri ved from vari o us lang uag es .

T hey are di vi ded i nto th ree classes , acco rdi ng to th ei r o ri g i n

SA N S KR I T , M asi r ni and Us p u .

I .
-S an skrt t S ufi e:

A bstr act N ouns .

4 07 . S an sk ri t words ass um e the s u ffi xes at , a , an d a to

m ak e u
p abs tract n o un s, an d the se p ar ti cles are affi x ed to
n o u ns as wel l as ad ec ti ves .
j T he abstract n ou ns formed wi th at
are fe mi ni n e , an d those en di n g in a a nd a are n e u ter . W hen
a w ord i s modi fi e d by a, i ts i ni ti al vo wel i s di splaced by “

gfi v o we l o r
p p
r o e r di ph th on g 1 8

f t
i r
s s u b. a fri en d fi l fi fll
‘ ‘
or or M fri endshi p .

g t: ad j . heavy m r, or
or f a W h eavi ness .

{ I ad j . h ard f e ar, m , or ( a
r i l h ardn es s .

m ( su b. ) a B rah man ; m aror ( i f,

'
or m Brah mani s m .

N ata — T h e abst rac t no uns, d eri ved i n th e above man n er , are used

i n M arathi poetry to denote an i dea of pl ural i ty or m ul ti tu de as an

a town, m a mul ti tude of towns th an a fi el d, a n umber of m
fi el ds th us, for i ns tance, i n the foll owi ng l i ne m means a multi tude
of l
p p
eo e
23 6 s w arm DER I VA T I ON . [ 6 4 08

"f t m m , m , m a ! ? mm .
— M oropan t .

A dj ecti ves .

4 08 . By afli xi ng at , t, I t, Er ma W , : ad e c ti ve s are
j der i v
ed fr o m n o u ns, to den o te p er tai ni ng to . W h en afli xi ng th e s e

pa r ti cle s , the follo wi ng ra di cal c hang e s tak e place i n t he

n o un

1 . T he fi nal 3 , s. or i i ?i s ch ang e d to 811 .

2 T he fi nal a , an, 1 ‘
i i s droppe d
"

. or .

3 . T he i ni ti al do uble letter i s di s sol ved, an d th e fi rst co ns o

d
'

n an t , if o ri g i n ally u n i ted wi th I t, assu m es Q

'

, an d if u n i te

wi th q ass umes Si t
. .

4 . T h e i ni t i al letter, i f n ot a co n un ct j con tai ni n g a or tr,

i s di splace d by i ts correspo n di ng
W vowe l.

at i
f; a R i shi + w= nffi
> a de sce n dan t of
w ; rg
z Y ad u ,
W : 1 773 8 Vas i sh h
t ,a m 8 th e
”

so n o f Vasi sh th a m th e
wi fe of Daéaratha, th e s on o f S u mi tra L ak sh m an

(Q ) m
'
k i ng Daéaratba, m pe r tai n i n g toDaéar atha ,
hi s w t h e g od Kr i s hna, amévr pe rtai ni ng Kr i sh na
'
so n ;
g re to .

at
) trfr t he R i shi Garg a + q= mi r th e so n o f Garg a (El?
th e n am e of a
g i an t wo m an , $ 027 th e o fi s pri ng o f Di ti m a

vi llag e , W be lo ng i ng to a vi ll ag e, W th e pal ate , W

alatal .
p
( m ) am
a a R i shi , W arm W the son o f Kata .

i( ) H E brothe r + fa rqh the s o n of broth e r vi a

’

l l T a = ¥r a

a mou ntai n , WW mou n tai n o us .

N ofa — So me words do not lengthen th e i ni ti al vo wel wh e n modi fi

ed h
y t he above s u ffi xe s ; wa;
s a m ou n t ai n, qi flu p
s ertai ni ng to a

mo un tai n h , fl a w l ; m
f d
”
H Q t e e r e ati n g to th ee s an e n ,

i i an e nd ; f h n ; dental
'

per ta n ng to a
r a toot , i .
 24 0 11 11 11 11 1 1 1 1 ns nrvarl ou. 411

a l !beco
l me ; was beco mi ng or co n s ti tu ti ng a vess e l ; m
becom i ng a tro uble ; m beco mi ng a reaso n o r occasi on.

beco me by ,
”
A lso, affe cte d wi th the p ri nci pal word modi fi ed
“

by i ; m i tt beco me, cau sed o r occasi o ned ; W beco me, W

oved o r evi den ced.
p r

c tr li k e or re se mbl i ng ; firm li k e a fath er A ls o , . of t he ve ry

form an d es s e n ce , com pose d of

-
Ermac w of the fo r m of a
;
‘
devi l , fi endi sb at “ li k e a m an , hu m an .

-
1 51
5 voi d ,
desti tute of
W des ti tu te of weal th W
&c .

rk s ; m a : e mi
m bold ; e mi ne n t for q so me w o uali ti e s or
y
n e n tly li beral ; m ; W
( t ; W at
l ; m a r & c .

m that stan ds or res ts ;

W on e who li ves co mfo rtabl
y i n

man ; tmrw trave l ler ; m

’
a h o u se, h ence a
g en t le a s ta n di n
g
in a vesse l.

( a s tr uck ,
de s t roye d W ai l?! de pri ved o f l i fe ;W m ; fi t lfi fl,
( H ai r85 0 .

gr, m , m that sei zes , carri es ofl

'

w ar a thi ef m ,

fea st ; 3 3 5m
“

M a airrm S urrrx as
'
.

I - N arms .

1 . A bs tr act N nuns .

4 11 . M arathi A bstract N o u ns are deri ved fro m adj e c ti ves

by a ffi xi n g W and tro
n ; ar a had,i mi n o
r or -
vn
v badne ss .

T ho se abstract n ou ns whi ch e nd in W are neute r, a n d th os e i n

W are masculi n e .

W hen the s uffi xes W and m

j oi ned to adj ecti ves en d are

i n g i n 8 11 , th e an i s chang e d t o It ; s li m g oo d wh en” o r q i tr ;
'

5mm g oodn ess W h onest, 31 31 1

1 or fi l
rwr hones ty a lum i s

m
.

c hang e d, al so , to w l ? i n th e abstract
i l n o un or

T h e s ufi xesW an d i ro
n can be l i e d i ndi scri m i n a te ly t o
pp a

ev y
e r M ara th i adj e cti ve , an d, o pti onally, e ve n t o S an sk ri t
j ti
ad e c v es ; as r S
( ) m . cr uel , hi m , or fi ng r
e
or . .
-
qu
o

c ruel ty .
 414] M A R AT H I DER I VA T ION . 24 3

a re: ah a bri be, S i m a bri be -

re ce i ver alt a beati n g ,
m that co n s ta n tl
y r ece i ve s a beati n g .

W ;
'
fi Z th e be llv, ' aH ’ -th
tt at s tu ffs h i s b el l y .

II [ . Ver bs .

5 4 1 3 A fe w ve r
. bs a r e de ri ve d i n M arat h i fr o m n o un s an d

adj ec t i v e s i n th e fo ll ow i n
g m an n er

1 . A g reat many n ou n s a n d ad ec ti ve s
j are con ve r ted i nt o
verbs by affi xi n
g th e g e run di al te r m i n at U
i on r as a zar p ai n ,

515 5?to ai n
p m a di rty. 35 5
5 5 2 ?to g et di rty .

I f th e n o u n or th e ad ecti ve
j e n ds in 3 a, th e err i s dropped
before a ffi xi ng n : m , a flap , {11 11 3 6 1 to de spatch arm" nak e d,
m afiato s tr i p {m a r 1 3
des e, £ 5 ?to desi re
i .

2 . S o me verbs are deri ve d fro m n o u n s a nd ad ecti ves

j by
addi ng unfi t : may a man , m to beco me h uma n ; aa r
mad, m
at to beco me m ad fir? a belly, W to cla m
p t o th e

belly .

Vote —
V e ry val uabl e v erbs are deri v ed bv addi ng 3 12! 0 1
‘

III .
— H 1 N nus m m S UF F I XE S .

I . A bs tr act N ou n s .

4 14 . mi ; sta r h on es t , staff h o ne s ty ; i t! ho ld ,

bold ness .

W war m ,
11 W 01
‘
“ W T ? or arl fr warm t h .

ar m fi le s wee t, fi tara s wee tn ess .

ness ak a a k
fri e nd a a?fri e n d s h i p .

fi i
; a l i a' fl W ET t flfi t fi di n g
’

I a r a s av SLI V108 a p ass, se n

'
e .

off .

2. N ou n s o
f A g ency .

(ti lt P W un us t, j m afi I t
’ ’
a wi ck e d do e r .

at P a fi a a s addle , PM a s addl e r .
weapons M an offe nce ,
m a n o fi ende r .

art P ; as!a provi n ce ,

.
W th e head of a p ro vi n ce .

m a -
h orse shoe , arai ia farr i e r .

3 . N ouns den oti ng fi

o ce, cond i ti o n , 3
c c.

i m a. bank er, F I NE
? m o n
y
-
c h a n i n
; e
g g .

fi rfi W a slave,
gra n te d sl a ve r
y .

( Ni ; i f“ a bl ack g uar d , W black g uar di sm .

4 . N ouns den oti ng p l ace or r eceptacle.

ant P .
g as a fl ower, W a
g ar de n .

M ;m m
‘
ara or a
p e n, fi ra box fo r h ol di n g a
p en

-
W a r os e,
W a. ve s s el for h o ldi n g r ose wate r .

aura an t a rave, i i i ?“ a
g rave - ar d
g y .

a
st r w P ; fiat . H y de r , § a
1 1 a| a th e ci t
y of H y der, or o f li a r s .

W EM T wo rk , a m t a factory .

II — A dj ecti ves .

Den oti ng f a ll f
o or a boundi n
g .

rH h 55 am h u n r
si .
13 u n er,
3
g gr g y .

i ; m rt
a a ba z aar, al a rf rp ert ai n i ng to a bazaar .

an: P .
m fai th, { W fai th ful .

1 11 ; w as sense, m afia s e n si ble .

si ft stren g t h , afi t r
‘
W at strong
’
.

I I1 — R edn p li ca ti ves .

415 - . T h e R edupli cati ve s p yb do u bl i nare

g t h e m ade u

i i l w d ffa r t d l i t d f m i f t
'

o g
r na or : t a s on e , u
p c a e o r , G t“ s o n e s
‘
and all oth er su ch thi n g s ; m fl ar en t bread, & c
‘
.

T h ese words are form ed fo r th e p u rpos e of i n te ns i fy i n g th e

m ea n i n g, o r m a k i n g t h e w or d m o re i m i ta ti ve T h ey m ay b e .

ar d e d a s a s
pe ci e s o f th e C o
p u la ti v e C o m p o u n ds
re
g
.
24 6 § 4 20
‘
M A R A IH I DER I V A T I ON .
'

m d enote i ndi vi dua ls of a gr onp or class sep a r a te l

( ) I t
a a y y ,

fi rs t ; h o us e an d h o u s e afia, , . m m m
mm , & c a w a r.e ?“ Iva r ai ? e fl e w? I v i s i t e d m w
e ve r
y h ous e s e parate ly , bu t n o body g ave m e any th i n g m
m
0

W W Su m an i s by natu re di ffe ren t , t mfi

fi e ve ry

m gm R ama search e d e ve ry t re e separately ai a afi i é

f? ain t tak e o u t every m ang o s eparat el y fro m t hi s
'

el .

I t m ay
b
( ) se
p arate a g ro u
p of i n dvi duals fro m o th e r in
di vi d ual s fli t i m am the w o me n we re si tt i ng
the re by th em sel ve s ; 3 1m m i fi m? at ri a o nly the br o th e rs
h ave se
p arat ed; m EM
“

? i f? on ly th e Brah man s h ad m et ,

o th e r caste s A dj e ct i ve s m ay be s i m i larly
“

no t th e e m plo e d a
.
y ;
M afi m m v fiv fi m fi w m m fi rm am {mm
m the pe o ple that are
of as s e m bl e d all th o se th at are w h i te
are Eng li sh, an d th os e t hat are bl ack are A by s si n i a ns .

() 0 S om e ti mes th e re d u pli cat i ve h as o nl

y an i nte ns i ve
fo rceW F
R ET W g m t h en sh e
p e r s i re d fea rfu ll
p y a n?

a n? M
“
EFF? h e re du ce d hi m to » e xtre m e di s t res s an

M 37W aflfi fi r h e ti r e d the h o rs e m u ch tha t i t

'

so

fro th ed te rri bly ; wfi 573 5 h e

“
c ut hi m t o p i e ce s ;

5 mm 1 fi aqfi zar afi f r
m t he dres s was t orn to s hr e ds .

(d It ex
p res ses m e asu re or s ta n da rd di s l r i bn ti vely aura
“

fil m Eli as
‘
ar m?he di s tri bute d th e ri ce
"
, g i vi n g a p ai li
m 3 é f rér h e s teal s cl oth
‘
to each ; fir fi zai z
'
each ti m e of

meas ur e of a fi ng e r breadth
’
the s .

T he re du l i cati ve m ay be exten ded i n de fi n i te lv to

() e p
co n vey an addi ti ona l i n te n s i ty of m ean i n g ; qr qr qr;
fist s ? a?i n i n i n m m
”
.

rm rm rm rm we} arm m .

I n th i s way an
y o th e r
p arts o f s
p ee c h may be re d u pl i cate d .

n a n n rea e h e ia e h ai a

4 20 . 3 . S ome t i m es a letter i s i nserted i n th e r e du pl i cati ve .

( ) Tahe
p r i vati ve v o w e l 3 ? m a
y be i n s e rte d t o ex
p re s s a

d i ffer en ce or an al te r nat i ve W WI? wo rthy an d u n wo rth

y
§ 4 20 DER W A T I ON 24 7
‘‘
M A BA I H I .

W ri
g h t a nd w ron g “ m ma a fi t to eat a nd o t h er wi se ;
m st ra i t?!a l both worthy
l — an d u n w o rth
y
h ad co me . S om eti me s the pri vat i ve parti cle a i s i nser te d ; sa
fe r
alf
' '
mit i s o r i t i s not ; W t? i
! t s o r i t i s not
i — m g u meu t ;
strai t mm M N H ?M anu re me et fi at , W 3: m are
“ Te ll , y o u h a d an ar
g u me n t wi th hi m ye s te rday and wh at was
de ci ded at las t T hese are u re ly S an s k ri t f o rm ati o n s
p .

M arath i e
q ui vale n ts a re ( fai r y es or n o 53? Eat, i ? 3 1 73 7 , & c .

()
b m i s i nse rte d to ex
p re s s th e se n s e o f p ro m i scu ou s acti o n

ca rr i e d on v i g o r o u s ly ;W a vi g o ro us s t ri k i n
g wi th
sl i
ppe rs am o n
g i n di v i dual s u n i ted in a mas s wi th o ut 01 de r
m : th e j oi ni n g of by many p e rso ns ;
m any t hi ng s or

Gr i mm ac ti ve an d b ur1 i e d
pack i ng u p o f m a n
y t h i n
g s 0 1 by
m any p e rs o n s . T he fi nal vo wel o f t h e red u pl i ca ti v e m ay bl
di s place d bv i ’ -
warmaft warm? ,

()
c 3 3?may be 1 n se 1 c ed to ex
pr es s th e s e ns e o f u n i vers a l

m
O

at
y; h e we n t t o e ve ry to wn an d vi llag e (a t
«a?t akes th e l oca ti ve te r m i n ati o n

( )
d a m ay b e i n se1 te d to de n o te th e se ns e of a bu nda nce .

W w ww y o u se e an
y amo u nt o f h o us e s e ve n

whe re a 3 1TH?am a
? "tak e n o w any am o u nt o f m o n ey .

( ) T
e h e
g e n i t i ve te r m i nati o n 5 T m a
y be i n t ro d u ce d to

ex pr es s th e i dea of a bu nda nce o r com let i o n fi ri fi

p lr h l
' '

m
wri t (fi t the wh o le vi llag e ha d co m e t o s ee i t ; Far?
.
m

m ma ny armi es pe ri shed i n that war .

(f ) T he letter =r m ay be i ns erte d to ex pres s the se nse of

co mp le ti on . W W W g a
-
s(3 m I p ai d e ve ry pi ce of hi s

(9 ) i f i s i n tro duc e d i n the r e du l i c ati ve, the s eco nd me m

p
ber bei ng a word of a s i mi l ar so u nd to expre ss th e i dea of

dari n g , or fi rm resol u ti on ;fl i t Eh? the h ead or the

bun dle, havi ng th e force of the Eng li sh e q u i val en t by hook
or by crook .
”
 24 8 M A BA T H I DER I V A T I O N .
§ 4 21

h
() an; i s i n troduced to e xpress t he sen se of ev e r y

o ther are SI N are e ve ry o t he r y e ar fl are a"; Q qq e v e r y

ot he r day at m at e ve ry o ther h ou se m1 gj qqi a mg ' '
3 17 3
m t h at? e very o the r t re e i n t he h e dg e i s a B abbo ol t r e e .

i
() wi t-
r i s i nser te d to e xpre s s the fo l lo wi n g i deas :

1. S up eri or “ St i ff fl i t ifi r i of a l l th e ci ti e s

B ombay i s th e b es t .

2 S i m i lari ty : d?W fil W fffl lfl fin he i s l i k e a chi ld

‘
.
'
'
31 ”! ' ’ "

amo ng ch i ldre n , a n d a n a dul t a m o n g a dul ts .

3 . In addi ti on to ; be si d es — i n di cati ng m ulti pli cati o n o r

s uc ce ss o n i in a se 1 i e s : 65 mi n ai m mt i ai m do n ot or d e 1

wo 1 k on work i a g:13!so rro w

(ar o n s o rrow ; In fra (aw e xpe n s e
o n expe n se .

(j ) T h e fi r s t m e m be r i s p u t i n the d a t i ve ca s e t o e x p r e s s
- m
s i mi la ri ty , o r eq ua li ty m an ar 517 3 1 fa g a ; 3
"
5
“

3 ? ;fi fi g
}
“

wh e n I fi n d a h o rse e xac tl y l i k e m i ne, I sh all h arn e s s

a
pai r ;w m ar w ari f? I wi ll tak e a ru
p ee fo r a ru
pee .

( )
k T he de m o n s trati ve ai r i s i nse r te d fo r em
p has i zi n
g t h e

i nheren t n a tu re o r cha ra cter o f th e pe r s o n or th i ng de n o te d b y

t he fi rs t m e m be r ; an a } an , aura? m fir rmr a v wh o
' '

: ca n

q ar fi ai
'

e ual o n e wh o i s a re al fath e r ; raga rag a

g g .

4 21 I m i tati ve parti cle s

. are re dupli cate d, and no u n s

for me d, as aria, ma k i ng m bot her

"
a
“

are .

R edu p li ca ti ve A dj ecti ves .

4 22 . A dj ec ti val r e d upli cati ves are p ro duce d i n the follow

i ng way s
4 23 . I . T he A dj e cti ve i s si mp ly re
p ea ted ,
or a w ord of

si mi lar i mp or t i s j oi n e d to i t ; w e 0 1 aft er a m ve ry r e d ,

li t .
-
r e d re d ; mfi n si tr3 27W ar m m hi s en d 1 s q ui te n ear
;
m ve ry wh i te at: ve ry s wee t mi l k . T h e se £ 0 1
mati o n s

( )
l i ntens i fy th e s e nse of th e o ri
g i n al ad ecti ve .j
()
2 T he y m ay e xp re s s g ra dual p r og res s i on ;
W 2I W E
W read a l i ttl e at a ti m e ; m e? W e a?!
the m orni ng sh adow beco mes g 1 adually sh orte r .
250 11 11 1111 1 1 1 1 DER I VA T I ON . 4 27

;W 1 hos e words express compr eh ens i venoss

'

W , etc . .

()
8 Som eti mes the verb 1 s si mply doubled wi th i t s ubs ti tut
ed for th e i ni ti al syl labl e of th e secon d member ; W ,

N M , N M etc . T hese expres s th e se n s e of com

p reh e nsi ve ne ss .

( )
4 So meti mes m i W or
y be j oi ne!ma
e d to t h e verb ;
- -
W M ; f rme nt t m am ( t e ta
e a G i t i n tou
—
; . W
si fi es th e si n i fi cati on of the verb to wh i ch i t i s con o i n ed, or
j
g
si m l
py serves as an expleti ve wi th out an S eci al m ean i n g
y p .

A dver bi al R edu p li ca ti ves .

§ 4 2 7 . The A dverb may be si mply doubl ed to i n tensi fy

i ts se nse ; W W 1 117 6 ?t h e p u l s e be ats ver
y s l o w l y f
i rm
-
vrh fl
W ar m W fat ti er W s o me cr eat u re s move
-
,

very sl owly and some very fas t ; i f? 3 1am armr h e came

qu i te close ; i f?3 fil i m
ti s m m "
8 11 ? h e h as q ui te

recen tl co m m en ced to com e to m e

y .

4 28 . So me ti m es s om e p arti cle i s i n se rted be twee n the two

m embers of th e re dupl i cati ve W q
u i te i n th e m i ddle
m m
‘
rath er b elow o r u n der ; arri t r i m medi ately after or

b ehi n d ; 51 m u
p t o t h e m o u th or bri m i n s erti n
g si t; W —

W or M f r n f
face to ac e , f o t to ront i n ser ti ng an
— .

4 29 T he i mi tati ve parti cle s fo rm man y a dverbi al r e du li ca

.
p
ti ves W den oti ng sh arp s o u nd W t de n o ti n
g t h e s o u nd
of teari ng or bru shi ng alo n g th e g rou n d W d e no t i ng th e

s ou n d emi tte d by boi li ng l i q

u i ds .

4 30 W h en th e n as al i sed an is affi xed to th e re dupli cati ve,

-
.

i ts sen se i s i nte nsi fi e d m , m ag i , i ro ni e tc .

43 1 . S om eti m es both th e n u mbe rs of the re dupl i cati ve are

mo di fi ed by el f or an nt btt i ,
‘
m , m .
 4 34 ] C OM POUN DS. 25 1

C H AP T ER XX I I .

T H E P R I N C I PLES OF M A R A T H I DER I VA T ION

con ti nued .

IV .
-
C ompou nds .

432 4 51 .

43 2 . A compou n d is a u n i on of t wo di sti n ct words ,

e xpressi n g i dea (w battle i f? a fi eld t qgfq
'

on e : as a
-
b attle fi el d .

433 . T he elem ents whi ch e n te r i n to co mposi t i on may, or

m ay n o t, re tai n a l ace i n th e co m o u n d. S o me ti mes t wo

p p or

m or e w ords m ay expres s one n oti o n, wi th o ut for mal l si m le

y p
e n t e ri n g i nto co mp osi ti on H e nce the re are three g eneral .

c l asses of co mpo u n ds , vi z. , th e Obvi ou s , th e Obs cu r e, an d t he

A pp ar ent
l Obvi ous Compounds m a tabl e for rolli n
g o ut cak e s

t hat} a cak e a t able .

2 . Obs cur e C ompou nds : m th e s m ell of s i n e d

g food
.

434 . N on e b ut words o f co nate ori g i n

g sho ul d be co m

bi n od , th ou g h th e re are not a fe w co mpou n ds i n M arath i of

l ong e s tabl i sh ed u s ag e, wh i c h do not fo llo w th i s r u le

W s trai n e d thro ug h a clo th = m S + 1 rrar M

. .

-
m ma cow s
’
mou th a m M u t m S .

W a bon d t i fl
' '
S .

M a j u dg e ’
s H .

N ote .
— l t may not be sup erfluous to add that val uable as composi
t i on i s i n e xp ressi ng our tho ugh ts wi th brevi ty an d vi g ou r, i t i s i m pos

s i ble to condemn q
a de u atel
y th e bad taste wh i ch woul d i mpose l on g

compo unds, co nsi sti ng of moreIthan t wo wo rds, upon a o

p pul ar di alect
.
deri ved as i t i s fro m Sanskri t P rak ri t by a ri g i d process of eli si on
an d . .

Even S an sk ri t, th ou g h i t i s capable of stri ngi ng tog eth er h u ndreds of

l
s vl ab es l i n to on e mo nstrous word, does not q
ui etly s ubmi t to su ch

dan ti c concei t .
pe
25 2 C OM POUN DS .
U 4 35

4 35 .
T he M t i co m p o u nd
arah s are e i th e r o f p u r ely S a n s

k ri t, or p urel
y M arat h i o ri g i n I n c om p o u n ds o.f S an s k rit

o ri g i n , more words may be co mbi n ed, bu t i n th o s e

t wo or

deri ved fro m M arathi , o nly t wo wo rds are u ni ted

S k fl arfi .

m
s th e H i ndu T ri ad m Fwy m
m a sch ool .

M . swi m fat he r an d m other u nfi t a h o u sehol der .

4 36 . T he co mpo u nds may be S UB ST A N T I VES, A nmcrrvns , '

or A nvs as s .

1 . TH E S UB ST A N T I VE C OM P OUN DS .

4 87 . In the s u bstan ti ve co m po u n d, (1 ) t wo w o rd s m a
y
be p ut tog e ther, the former de scr i bi n g o r deter mi ni ng t h e
s ens e Of th e l atter ; o r (2
) t wo w o r ds m a
y be p u t t o g e th e r

wh i ch are u s ual ly u ni ted by the c onj u n cti on an d T h ese tw o

c lasses of s u bstanti ve co mpo un ds are de si gnated Determi na ti ve

and C op u la ti ve re s
p ec ti vely

l . T he Deter mzn ati ve C omp ou n d

’

m m meas uri ng b y
r ul e= 1fi rfi ffrfl '
fl .

2 . T he C op ula ti ve C ompound W sh awl an d tu rban

(1 ) T he Deter mi na ti ve C ompound s .

5 4 38 . T he q ual i f i
y gn or det ermi ni ng word i n th ese com

p o un ds m ay be a n oun , j
or an a d ecti ve .

1 . W hen th e dete rm i ni ng wo rd i s a n ou n, i t m ay i n di cate a

-
cas e rela ti on in refe rence to the n o un whi ch i t pre ce des, or it
m ay be u s ed a
pp os i ti ona lly .

T h e determ i ni n g ad ecti ve
j may be ei ther an ad ecti ve o f
j
q u a li ty, o r Of nu m ber .

H en ce th e de termi nati ve co m
p o u nds are di vi ded by th e
San sk ri t g ram m ari ans i n to th ree c l as se s . vi z. th e T atpurus b
-
( hmi s m an K m h é m E 5 m and Dvi gu fi
( g
‘

d
'

ai a r a y a li 1

two oxen

S439 I n th e T atp wrush C o mpo un d, th e fi rs t word e xpresses

.

a -
case r elati on as fi rst l i t thi e f-
fear z i n: fear .
m
25 4 comm u nes . 4 41

bei ng dropped and hence i t i s not al ways easy to determi ne what

p arti c ular case i s i mpli ed by th e fi rst word

relati on T h us, the wo rd .

m a school fi 1 n k nowledge 3 178 ! a p lace. m ay m ean a

=

p l ace f or k no wledge. or a p lace of k no wle dg ,

e o r a place o btai ned by
k nowledge, o r a place i n whi ch fi at or k no wledg e i s commu ni cated,
&c , . and i t may therefore be a dati ve, a
ge ni ti ve, an i nst ru mental or a

los s ti ve T atp u ru sh compou nd.

N ou n
— T ho Karmad kdr aya m ay be vi ewed al so as a T a tp u ru s h
m m ay mean k nowl edge whi ch i s l i ke a treasure. or th e treasu re
o f k nowledge, or a treas ure Obta i ned by k nowledge I n the las t tw o .

sens es, i t i s T alp urus h an d i n th e fi rst Kar madhéraya .

N a
ol — I n the Karmadbéray a as i n the T atpurusb, th e fi rst wor d
d rops i ts i nflecti o ns ; as m re d tlri fi '
earth W
N ote .
— In the Sansk ri t com po unds i ntrodu ced i nto M ar ath i th e
fi rst word of a T atp u rm h Karmadlui raya, may come las t
or .
-
T atp u
r ush o
.
m ki ng of the g eese, i ns tead of ; so als o w ho a
m
m an li k e a l i o n, i nstead of (ag ar ; fi rm the fore par t Of the nigh t ;
Kari n . 13 mi n th e lowest Ki ng , W 31 8 th e best B harat .

( )
2 T he C o u l a ti ve
p C omp ound .

44 1 .
-
T he co ordi nate r el ati o n e xi sti n
g between two wor ds
is u s ual ly i n di cated by th e j
co n un cti on an?! and , b u t wh en t h e

j
c on u ncti o n i s drop pe d, a nd th e wo rds are u ni te d, th ey fo r m
‘ co m door =
th e co pu lati ve d h ou se
‘
1 s; QR
“

or pou n ; R
E a a

are": h ou se an d o th er rt sn i mt i arents
'

p ro
p e y p .

N ata —
In Engli sh th e -
co o r di nate con uncti o n
j is no t omi tted r i ce

and curry the re i s bread a nd butter fo r the chi ldren . I n M ar a

thi somet i mes a f rag ment Of m and exi sts i n a copu lati ve r edu

ve ; W fé fi qfi fi
'

l i ti e?Ffi fl every sh red of a rag .

' '
ca s
'

p or s

442 The r e du
l i ati ve C om pou nds, wh i ch fall u n der t h e
.
p c

class of the C opulati ves, are co nsi dered i n detai l u n der th e

R edupli cati ves . 4 15 )
2 . TH E A J
D EC T I V E C OM POU N D .

4 43 W hen th e w lzo.l e co mp o und i s u se d p re d i cat i vel y of a

ll
s u bj ect , i t i s ca e d a n A dj cti ve C p
e o m o u n d, o r a g nts P
e o s

fil m fi fi ll of a h orse
‘

m u ch ri ce havi ng t he face
’

s e s si n g

£ 5 awai !(W l
t al th e K i u n ars we re bei n
g s w i th th e face s o fho rse s .
 447 OoM POUN Ds. 25 5

444 . T he B a hum i hi i s '

usually deri ved from a su bs tan ti ve

co mpou n d . I n fact, whe n a s ubstant i ve co mp ou n d i s u sed ad~

j ecti vely or p redi cati ve l y, i t beco m e s B a hu vr i hi K a r ma .

ar m eye s l i ke a l o tus Ba k u m u .
-
lot us eyed
”
a? m
W m ? ha ve y ou see n t hat -
l otus ey e d wo man 3 57q
fi "!t
m rm ,
fi mfi a co ck is a bi e
p ,d n ot a qu adru
p ed st alk?

T a tp u r ush m head m?
’
i g no ran t an el ep han t s Baku . t ra

th e el e h an t-
h eaded
p .

4 4 5 T h e B ahu vr i hi i s
. u s ual ly deri ved i n M ar ath i from the
s u bs tan ti ve com pou n ds by a mo di fi cati on Of th e i r fi nal vowel .
,

1 . I f th e fi nal v owe l i s u , the w i s ch an g e d to ?or w i n the

B a hu vri hi fl
ag a
”
fo ur faces, wgi efl fo u r -
face d ; W m
'

c r o ok e d- -
n eck ed
-
= = famfl
q m ; W t W O to n g u e d ; 6 1 3 m
l ong n os e d . I f th e fi n al wor d i s of Sa nsk r i t o ri
g i n, th e or is
su
p e rse ded by i ; m frag ran ce , W e? frag r ant . S o m eti m e s
t h e at may n ot be c h ang e d as s ing l t
e -
h o rse face d .

2S om eti m es th e g e n i ti ve ter mi nati on Err i s affi xed to th e

.

c om o un d
p R an di b ol dn e s s i n an a s s em bly, a tt a
r afia r h avi n
g
‘ '

b ol dne ss i n an as s em bly .

3 . W ords Of San sk ri t deri vati on afii x an an d o th er

par ti cl es ;

fi rm cau s i n g bi le O ne p rod uced i n th e eg

g {mar
ro du ce d from a l o tu s
p .

4 46 . T he B a hu vr i hi co mpo u n d s ta nds
f or the j
ob ect

wh i ch i t de s cr i be s , an d g sug es ts i t T h u s, 1 mfi
. = r th e ele
ph an t

h e ade d, coul d be u s ed
p re di cati vely , as ?1 mm
a an? h e i s
-
el e ph an t h eaded ,
or it co ul d stan d fo r th e person u s ually de s
cr i be d or su g g es ted by i t , i . e .
,
h i -
for W i tt w o s el e ph ant h eaded .

A l so " -
Ph at ?l o n g care d i s ei th er an ad ecti ve, or a n ou n
j den o t
i ng an ass , t he an i mal p o ss esse d of l o ng ears . T he Eng li sh
- -
q u i val en ts are l eft h anded, hi g h mi nded, &c
”
e .

3 . T H E A DV ER B I AL C OM POUN D .

I n the A vyayi bhaoa or A dverbi al Co mpounds , the

447 .

fi r st w or d i s an adve rbi al p ar ti cl e , an d the s ec ond u s ual ly a

s u bs t an ti ve , th e who le be i n g u s ed adver bi ally W e! e very

day = q
r fem «i ts dai ly .
26 6 nun s o r oos oo ananos . § 4 68

N ata — N evertheless wo rds made emphati c chi efly by the

are tone
i n whi ch th ev are u tt ered sel dom o r n ever b
, y any g ramm ati cal con

structi o n .

§ 4 68 . The M ara
th i se n ten ces , of whatever na tu re, wh e
th er as serti ve, i nterrog ati ve, i mpe rati ve, or exclamato r are
y
con structed in a u ni form way , the di sti ncti o n be twe en them
bei ng denote d si mply by the tone of the voi ce .

A sser ti ve : amt m m H T? my swor d 1 s i n the ro om .

N ata— I n the i nterrogati ve sentence the i nterrogati ve parti cle s or

words may or may not be em lo

p y ed .

1 . W hen the q
en ui ry refers to the bare asserti on o r neg ati on of

a fact o r event ,the i nterrogati ve sentence i s g eneral lv u sed wi th ou t any

i n terrogati ve parti cle Huff mm m
an? I i s my swo rd i n the

room
g i
ft w i ll i n ? “
are y o uWh i s f ath e r w ar w e fi n ? “

wil l i t rai n to-day Opti onal ly the i nterj ecti o nal parti cle a m wh at ?
m ay be put at t he end of the sentence 3 11 q 15 mar 3 11 3 ?m ?
q
are
y ou hi s m m 551 2: will i t rai n
u ncle

2 . W hen the enqui r

y refers to any o th er
p a ti cu l a r r ,
s uch as the
nam e , p l ace , ti me, manne r, & 0 , vari ou s i nterrogati ve words are al ways

employed to make u p the i nterrogati ve sentence : W an m ?

what i s yo ur name, Si r q
i f? ( nah where do you resi de
.
m
m ? wh en di d you come i t th at s
?u ffi e
c wh o brough t i t

4 69 . T he verb i mpli e s acti on , an d an acti on has an a ent,

g
an d i t m ay h ave also an ob ect j . S ect 1 80
. .

§ 4 7 0 T he M arathi
. verbs, tog eth er wi th th ei r i nfle cti o ns , are

et
y mol og i cally ei th er a cti ve or
p assi ve, an d th ey co n se q y
u en tl
h ave a t ende ncy ei th er to the s ubj ect or to th e o bj ect
rm emi t R a m a e at s ; m fi W ms? R a m a t e b read T he .

e ty molog i call y pass i ve parti cle ar h as an affi ni t t o the o bj ect

y .

T he passi ve ET ceases to be attracted to the obj ect, i f the

4 71 .

obje ct s i nflected
i — ch ang ed b
y a case en di ng I t i s th en draw n - .
 4 77 R UL ES or c ons o uDA no s . 26 7

ne i the r t o t he s ub ect , j n or to the ob ect j but ta k es a (116 0 t

,

co urse — it as s u mes t he ne u te r s i ng ul ar fo rm , whi ch i ndi cates

i ndi fleren ce o r n e utral i t
y . Sect 21 0 . .

4 72 . T he verb may therefore be cons tru cte d so as to ag ree

wi th the j
s u b ect, o r the j
ob ect, o r wi th nei ther . H e nce th ere are

th ree C ons tr ucti ons —

th e S u bj ecti ve , th e Obj ecti ve, and t he
N eu te r — th e m ,
th e w th
i a nd th e ma . S e ct .

4 73 . W he n t he ve rb ag re e s wi t h a nou n, as s umi n
g i ts g e n
de r, n u m b e r a nd
p e rs o n, t he n ou n, wh e ther the j
s u b ce t or the

be i n an u n i n flected case. T he u ni nflec te d

j
ob ce t, o u
g h t to cas e

of th e s u b e ct j i s th e N omi n a ti ve, an d th e u ni n fle cte d cas e o f the

j
ob ect i s th e A cc usa ti ve .

4 74 . I n the S ubj e c ti ve co ns tr u c ti o n, th e s u b e ct
j i s i n the
Nomi na ti ve ca se, a n d i n the Obj ect i ve co ns tructi o n, the j
ob e ct

i s i n the A cc usa ti ve cas e . B o th t hese cases ha ve u ni nflected

forms .

§ 4 75 W hen t he s ub ec t j is i nfl ecte d it tak es ei the r th e

-
.

I nstr u menta l , or t he Da ti ve cas e r m at? I di d ( m ar W 3

R ama i s . a bl e to g o .

4 76 W he n th e o bj ect i s i nflecte d, i t tak es

. o nl
y t h e Da ti ve

tflfi W fl fi fi he cau g h t th e th i ef
' ' ' '
case .

T H E S U B J EC T .

T he Ki nd s of 8 a bj ects .

4 77 . TH E S UBJ EC T M A Y BE A wo an, A B s aA s E, on A s an

T EN C E

A wor d af t m m ? t h e ri ve r fl o ws .

A phr as : h i nfr m a !
e
“ i i ? mi l she di d n o t escape
puni s h m e n t ; W E T a ffi rm s W i t i s i mper at i ve

that I sh o u l d o be y m y pare n ts .

- - mt: 3 e
A s en ten c e a ?
n ! ra i s e s llh rs a car?i t i e3
r : Qa a
tri a

i t i s t he pa r t o f a lo w man to la ug h a t a ny o ne fo r h i s bad
Clothe s 3 ii
; i r t fifi rH fl i fl wri-
gt a?
t ai rfi e
l
ds“ ?anti !
'

Fm W ' '

M w hi t m t rm ?havi n g h eard i t,
m M sari
fi rst wh a “
Durgi wi she d th at N ant mi g ht prai s e her more than B hag ti for
‘

her g enero si ty, and h e r re adi ness to co n fi de i n her .

26 8 R UL ES or C ON C OR DA N CE . 4 78

N A phrase
ote . — m m ) is a combi nati on of words
wi t h out t he fi ni te verb .

N ata — T h e fi ni te ver b (m or
m !) i smt h e fo rm
of th e ver b l i mi ted by t he gender, nu m ber and pe rso n of t h e su bj ect

o r o b ect .
j
4 78 . W he n a s e nte n ce i s u s e d as th e j
s u b e c t, a de mo n s tra ti ve

p ro no u n li ke a th i s, i s i n serte d i n a
ppo s i ti o n , wi th or w i th out
a n ou n afi fi fi . m m g€ w N i ger
t
a ? i f W 3 ? ho w c o ul d y o u th i n k t ha t y o u sh ou l d rathe r l i s ten
to that w i c k e d wo man th an to y o u r m ot he r ?H T ( R i ga I !" vi al
“

m 5 1mm an? fi ' fi ! Elf !3 11?i t i s tr ue th at th e re i s a way

’

t o g o to the m o u n tai n th ro ug h th i s g ate .

W he n t h e de mo n s trati ve i s e mploy e d by i tse lf fo r t hi s p u r

it is a l wa i n t he n e u t r s i n u l ar b t i f i t i d wi t h
p o se , y s
g u s u e
e
s a

n o un , it a ree s i n
g g e n de r a n d n u m be r wi th tha t n o u n , a s i ll u s

t rate d i n the a bo ve s e n te n c e s .

479 . T he nou n s e n te n ce mi g ht be us e d af te r t h e ve r b

to be , a s a n o m i n al p re di cate 4 85 wi th as i n En g
li sh gi ft “ 3 1 3 11? i f ?w fi zrl éfi i r q sfi i s i t yo u r de s i r e t h at
'

o u s ho uld s u ffe r t h e to r m e n t s o f h e l l I n Eng li s h th e n o un

y
s e nte nce , a s i n th e abo ve s e n t e n ce , is c o n s tr u c te d w i t h t he
i m per s on a l p h rase is it th at, & c .

T he C as e o
f the S u bj ect .

4 80 . TH E S UB J EC T OF T H E V ER B 1s US U A L L Y I N T H E No
M IN A TN E CA S E W ! W t g e g m an? Go vi n d i s a oo d boy .

m m fl t 1 13 5 (Tatho us an ds o f p e opl e h ad a sse m ble d there

i r 3 7 .

s u bj e ct i n th e n om i n a ti ve, o r u ni n ecfetl cas e , i s calle d, b

T he fl y
way of di s ti n cti o n, t he N OM I N A T I VE .

§ 4 81 . I n t he fo llo wi ng i n s t ances j
t h e s u b ec t o f the ve rb

does N OT tak e t he N o mi nati ve C as e

1 . W he n th e tr ansi ti ve ver b is u se d i n the pas t tense, the

su b e ctj i s i n th e i n s tru m en tal ;m wfi at 33 5
52 the
'
ca se

ro bbe rs pl un de re d h i s h o u s e w i
rt a m fi mrffi l he
'

call ed me .
27 0 R UL ES o r oo uco anA Nos . 4 83

rl ns ou fl a
i rs W qfl frai l fl uff I wen t to hi s h o u s e

y ester day
i
I El i I ?awn: m w hy wi ll y o u n ot tak e i t 3 W E?
‘

gfi qm th e ch i ldr en hav i n g s e e n t ha t, be g an to cry ;

W W W we a re
p oe mm fl m fiw m fi fi
‘
fi
we sh all all t og et h er g i ve hi m a co n tr i bu t i on .

1 . W hen an i n di vi du al i s s p o k en o f r esp e c tfully , th e n oun

den o ti ng the i ndi vi du al I S co n s i de red to be 1n th e l u ral nu m

p
be r, an d t he ve rb 1 s acco rdi n ly
g p i n th eut
p l ur al , W W
{fi an ? Gopalré v cam e do wn stai rs , anemi a W W
'

ar m trra
'

w ar we s hou l d
g o back as th e lady m o th er bi ds us ;
-
W n«W ? m
i 3 1 33
g
1
W ar 1 7 m ifi
'
th e re was a
g e n t le

man l i vi n g ln A u ra ng a ba d o f t h e n am e o f S i vara v .

N ote T he si ngular n ou n o f di g n i ty r efe rri ng

—
to females may be
-
.

O pt i o na lly pu t i n th e n eu t er
pl u ral mi mea a? n
au r i mi
fig 3 113 the lady wo ul d h ave co me, but was pre ve nted mi , i n g?
i i i ?3 3 “ mi m adam, y o u are ve r
y consi der ate T he n eu ter
g e n d
.er

is u su all
y u sed i n t he K o n kan i n s eak i n
p g of ladi es of hi g h ran k ,

s uch as t he wi ves o f c h i e fs, k i n g s, &c .

2 . A n o u n o f ad dres s i s fo ll o we d by a ve rb i n t h e s e co n d
w h e t he r or not a s e co n d rso n al ro n o u n i s i n s erte d
p e r so n, pe p
mi a
(T , r
NT m i fi f rfitfi '
51 857 s la m ? w e l l , R am a w h e r e d i d y o u ,

g t -
o o day i
'

sT W “ i t“ , fl at? arm 3 5 m
R eva, c o m e away
s oon wh at a re
y o u do i ng th e re

N ote .
— P erso ns of ran k are addressed i n the thi rd perso n , and th e
verb is co nstru cted i n th e t h i rd p lu ral { metres 3 7 6"
gg
a e m afi a
?m m fi m k I am W i ll i ng t o h ono u r may
‘
a u l ai : si l y , ac t as o ur bi d
me an an? t r !" fra t w e l l,
wh e re di d y o u r l ady sh i p g o

4 83 . T he s u b e ct o f
j the ve r b 1s s o me ti me s o m i tted . It
is o m i tted i n t h e fol lo wi n g i n s tan ce s

W hen th e ve r b i s n
st a danor i mp ersonal ; m -
f i gi a m
q
fi I fee l s i ck i sh i t i s day break T h e verb i s co n
.

s tr u cte d i n the B have -

co n s t r u cti o n , ca lle d th e B hé va kar t i ts
s
i n wh i ch t h e s ub e c tj is n ot s tr i c tl
y o mi tte d, bu t i m pl i e d i n
t h e ve rb .

2 . W h en th e s u b e ct o f
j th e ve r b de n o tes i n defi n i te ly, i n th e

W
"

cond i ti o nal c la us e , so me on e or s o me bo dy t an . i ii
 4 84 R une s o r GON co nm uox . 27 1

M m M afi a wfi m m m who told y ou that

i f you wen t that w ay y o u wo u ld g e t ri d of y o ur load m
W W R W m t m d i f on e sleeps on
i
a da mp
g ro u n d , he i s affe c te d i m me di ately wi th r he umati sm . T he
v er b is co n stru c te d i n th e n e u ter si n
g u l ar .

3 I n the pas si ve p hras e s , t he su bj e c t

. u n de rsto o d bei ng
th ey a re N a]? m i t i s cal l ed a di cti o nary li t .

t h ey call it a di cti o n ar y 3 fl fi '

m m H fl fifl fl
'
flfl
'

w
W fi rst ?!mi m mi l! whe n s u ch i s the cas e, why do
n ot th ey fi ll u
p t hi s m u ddy place i n th e road cur t ri ai m
T I Nl -W m al l thi n g s are sold i n thi s town by wei g ht .

3 05,
Nata — T he Eng li sh p assi ve fro ms are usu al l
y ex ress ed
p i n th e
ab ove manne r i n M arath i ; the se ntence is co nstr ucted i n th e o rdi nar v

way, the s ub ec t of t h e ver b i n th e pl u ral n u mber o nl y bei ng o mi tted

j
I t tr iq
i a 6755 ad “ R f W m p p
e o l e sel l al l thi n s
g i n th i s

to w n by wei g h t, whi ch i n th e passi ve fo rm wou ld be exp ressed

wi th ou t the s u bject as, an w i t h H i Wl
‘ ‘ l al l thi ngs W m
are sol d i n th i s t own bv wei h t S uch i di o ms are fo und i n man
y
g .

Eu ropean l angu ag e s ; th e i ndi cati ve l ur al a cti ve bei ng u t i m

p p
pers onally fo r the pas si ve ve rb . T h u s. for i n stance , the follo wi ng
G reek s en ten ce : n v
j Wxfi v crov (i rra tr o ii o w
'

81rd a ov the y q
r e u i re thy li fe

q e Engl i s h
“
h m
”
th y li fe i s re ui red T h. t ey i s i p erson al I n .

Engli sh th e same i i o m i s se meti mes

d u s e d— they call hi m a gentle man,
call ed a man al so commo n
”
fo r “
he i s g entl e . It is in H ebrew .

4 84 . S o me ti mes the su b e c t j is n ot o mi tted, bu t u se d in

th e n e ute r si n
g ular , an d th e ve rb a
g r e e s wi th i t i n g e n d e r

an d n u mber T hi s con s tr ucti on is em

p loy e d i n the fol lo wi n
g
i nstances
1 . W hen the a
g e n t of an act is n ot k no wn, or is su
pp os e d

to be l QTEF af fi ?e h , w ho i s call i ng o u t to
i , 8!
u nk n o wn N
me h as ; afiwfl fi rsta are? i t appears s o m e bo dy i s s le ep i ng
'

t i n a?wh o com es there GEN ?311 1 6 3 5 so me h u man

there ; a
bei ng i s com i n
g .

2 W hen a most g en e ral s tatemen t i s made saw i ts} W

.

i m w h o s o e ve r h a s ey e s wi ll se e ; W ET u ni s; i ? fi r m
wh osoever u nder stan ds wi l l teach.
27 2 R UL ES or OON OOR DA N C E. 4 85

3 . When the h um ble co n di ti o n of a pe rson i s des cri bed

wi th del i cacy ; fi W m m W fi m
ar s ar e m s ure ly , S i r, th at p erson who tak es so m uch
pai ns t o g lean corn for food, m ust be poor T hi s con s tru cti on .

woul d not be u se d i n referen ce to th e hap py or hono urable

co n di ti on of a
p erson ; i 1 3 3 ! at f i r eman 1 171 ?
“

m w
o ne wh o fee ds y ou m u st be su
p e ri o r to y ou .

4 85 . W H EN TH E SUB ST A N T I V E v ans
“
T O BE 18 FO L L OW

ED BY A N OM I N A L P R EDI C A T E, rr A GR EES W IT H rr s S UB EC T J AND

-
,

r m w i Sui t r o n
i
i
N OT W I T H T H E N OM I N A L P R EDI C A T E ta r a a ts
y
are a ve ry h one st wo man i m m
a W ET su
pp ose y o u

h ad be com e a boy ; ti W ram m a

t at r ai y o u o we m e fi ft
y
R upee s .

N ote — W hen the verb “

to be is constr ucted wi th a n oun or an

ad ecti ve
j to m ake th e predi cate, t he no un
up or th e ad ecti ve so u ni ted
j
is called th e nomi nal p redi cate, and t he ver b to be i s den omi nat ed
th e copu la or li nk .

N te. T he verb to be when u sed as th e ula , may so meti mes

“
— Co
o p
be o mi tted
I . I t is usu all v o mi t te d i n the i nterrog ati ve sentence cons tru ct e d

wi th th e i nterro gati ve pronoun ai m sf ; fl lq m ?w hat i s you r nam e ?

’ ‘

2 . In answer to q uesti o ns li k e th e above ; Su

fi all! r im my
name i s Go pal .

3 . I n em ph ati c sentences ;i f ? 15 “ y ou are i ndeed fooli sh .

-
4 . I n defi ni ti ons ; m um s a m nt ra ga s: a di cti on ary i s a

book con tai ni ng a coll ecti on of wor ds .

I n prover bi al exp res si o ns ; i fi t fi qfii t 11 m

'
5 . wherever th e re
'

is a vi l l a e th ere exi sts a ward occu pi e d b th e M ah a

g y rs .

N ata — In n e ati ve sentences

g are?i s eq u i val ent to 3 4 -
3 173 ,
and th e
i s th erefore i nh eren t i n ma
' ‘
verb I n th e Ko nk an , however, arrg i s .

"
ad ded to are?t o m ak e u
p th e fo rm o f t h e
p f
er ect d efi ni te di sti n ct fro m
the p ast he di d n ot come a
"
? W ET a l p as t ; he has not come fi r w
W W 3 11 i f t defi ni te
“

,p
er ec .

N ote . — B esi des the verb to be wa

f and i ts forms some other verbs
i
,

have a C opul ati ve force .

v
T he verb e i l to becom e i s one of them ; i f?

m m be h as become wi se . T he neuter passi ves

m to look ,
27 4 R ow s o r C ON COR DA N C E .
I: 48 6

fi el s ; at mg? m
d fi m ant : m m
i r
m an: then w e
sh o ul d no more have had th e wi n ter an d su m m er .

Som eti mes, h owever, a

p lu ra l verb may be u se d wi th t h e
l ural of the a d e mo nstrati ve p ro n ou n
i ti nal st rai t I l l i
’
s
'

p p o
p
'
o

i r“ 3 "t w aft Q?i n?our co w, h orse, and g oat h ave di e d T h i s

la .

co n st ru cti on i s u s u al ly fol l o wed, wh e n i t i s n e ce ssary to di re c t

th e atte n ti o n to each o f the nomi nati ves separa te ly za mt rfi n

v
} 81 3 ;
m W QW W m m m m for yo u wi l l fal l
i nto l ace wh i ch bu rn s wi th fi re an d bri ms ton e ; mi arfi , ai r r ' '
a t
p ,

enfi r tha t i W
tfi fla th e ch i ef du t of man i s th e p u rs u i t of
y
rel i g i on , wealth , l ove , an d salvati on fi ( a t 5 13
“

er mqwrafl '

m Q?m W m he r pl easi ng face an d add res s s

p e ak

fo r h er resp ectab i li ty .

4 . W h en th e s ub e cts are o f
j di fferen t p ersons, the ver b i n
the pl ural n u m be r, ag rees, in p ers on, wi t h the o n e i n th e
fi rs t

i n p referen ce to th a t i n th e s eco n d or thi rd, an d wi th the on e

i n th e s econd i n preferen ce to th at i n the t hi r d

l st an d 2u d person s 3 i arrfi rf fi ni a l ": that y ou an d I s ha l l

di stri bu te to th e m .

h ow happy m y si s ter an d I ar e .

2n d an d 3 rd per so ns é
‘
r nf r
a fi
i sm?i fiirsi -
mi fi rIi sh e an d you
h ad both co m e .

In s u ch a con s tr u cti on the p ro n o u n wi th wh i ch t h e verb

a re e s i s p u t l ast I f t hi s o r der i s n o t o b ser ve d a n a p p os i t i o nal

g .

de m o ns trati ve m ay be i n se r te d ; fi t, 1 ,
su fbr a? 3 T?! a rw I ,

o u an d h e sh all g o, o r Sfi r3 11 W ! s u ch we,
-
o r st i r W W figa
»

y
a re?s u ch we th ree p er s o n s sh al l o
g , m ay be s ai d .

N Uta — W h e n th e s u b ects
j ar e connected by a di sj u ncti ve con ane j
ti o n , th e v erb ag re e s w i th th e ne are st gtBR E T 3 8 0 sh aft W
-
qfi su m at n
a t
i ?m
“

a as t é
ray ? re
a ? y
i f ou or an
y ot her p ers on s houl d
come to o ur hou se, we wou l d n ot act s o.
 4 92 J R UL ES or C Oit C OEDA NC E . 27 5

THE OBJ EC T .

T he C ase f
o the Obj ect .

4 87 . T he o b ect j is e i th er i n th e -
zi t cus ati ve o r th e Dati ve

§ 4 88 . W hen the obj ect of the trans i ti ve ve rb de no tes a

l i feless th i ng , i t i s e A ccu sati ve case ; m

u s ua ll
y i n t h ( 1 3?
m ar m R ag h u co m mi tte d a sh am e ful ac t y esterda
y
W fl lfi i f !are? at fi rst h e ate th e s weetm eat .

4 89 . W he n n ou ns denoti ng i nani mate obj ects are emphasi ze d ,

t hey m ay t ak e the dati ve an WNW !" W fl

‘
t Eh ri l
'
case : '

W hat s hall I e at thi s r o tte n m ang o ?

HtF
I GH T fl fi rst “ ?
h ow s h ou l d th i s wo rl d be m anag e d I n H i ndi th e s ame

i di o m i s u sed ; an W eft m he li fte d u

p th at s ton e (dati ve ) .

4 90 W he n the obj ect of a t ra nsi ti ve verb is a

p erson it
-
.
,

is u sual l
y p ut i n th e dati ve cas e w rit ( W ET ( ti T h e dro ve
a wa
y R am a .

4 9] I f th e pe rs on ex pre sse d by the obj ect be re pr ese n ted

as des ti t ute of li fe , li berty, or p o we r, i n fact, re du ce d t o th e
—

c on di ti o n o f an i n an i ma te thi ng , th e o b ect j i s th e n c o ns tr u c te d

i n the accu s ati ve case ; 1 58 ,

i f?g a r Q éh
' ‘

{F IT W W c o m e a wa
y,
I wi ll sh o w
y ou a k i ng — sh o w s o m e th i n
g l i k e a
p i cture — a

n ew s tran thi n g ; bu t a m 3 1 m"!{T a m a m- c o me

"

ra li
“

g e T on,

we s hal l
g o an d s ee t he k i n g . So al s o HN fi
’

at e mit w
t he ti g er ate te n m e n gm i
s t rrer wi ll W W P W i ll
y o u l oo k o u t a
g oo d s e r vant and fe t ch h i m ?

N ata — N ou ns deno ti ng i rrati onal a ni mals are u su ally p ut i n th e

qrsm m (fi t an bri ng t he cat h ere ; nan m m
’

dat i ve case ;
'

sme ar faqfla r g r
am a reas? a crow ate u p you r sparrow
'
o
.

T h e personal pro nouns o f the l s t an d 2nd p ersons ,

w h i ch e xpress p ers on ali ty m ost e m ph at1 cally , are al way s us e d
11 t he dati ve i n p rose , th o ug h th ere o ccur n u mero us exce
p
t i o ns i n poetry ; gm afi fl fi W ? W ho told y ou w gmi q ‘‘

y o u
y o u rs e lf tol d me .
27 6 R UL ES or OO N C O R DA N OE . 498

N o te. — Some pu re transi t i ves m ay tak e ei ther an accu sat i ve o r a

object ; and when th e acti o n of t he verb aflects th e o bj ect
'

dati ve
qui te s up er ci all y,
fi th e dati ve ob ect
j is used, but when th e ac ti o n

c han
g es i ts vi tal i ty or i ts essenti al state or form, th e accus ati ve is
u sed

( ) ufi 3
1 t 6 76 7 he s tr uc k t he boy ;
a ll ?
“

{ as W !he ki lled th e boy .

2
( ) “ IT ?W he cau
g h t th e t hi ef ;

mfi fi l l “

m h e de tected the thi ef .

wfi
( )
3 “ I f?“ I lfifi he ti ed th e co w ;
'
u
p
u ni mi ( th at?h e fa ste ne d th e co w whi ch h ad brok e n l oose .

Nata -W h en the n ou n is separate d from the acti on of the v e rb by

i ts dati ve -
case term i nati o n , i t a ssu me s a ch ara cte r of i n depende nce
and di gni ty, bu t i n the accusati ve, whi ch i s the most depen de nt case ,

i t holds a osi ti on of absol u te s ubj ecti o n

p .

T he R ela ti on f
o the Ob
j ect to the Ver b .

49 I f th e j
s ub ect i s i nflected, an d th e ob ect j is u ni n

fi e cte d, then o nly th e ve rb ag re e s wi th the o b e ct.

j T he ver b

can n ever ag ree wi th th e ob ect,

j i f th e s ub e ct
j is u n i n fi e cte d

W WW mi?R am a eats
( bre ad t wfi m t ta m? R am a ate

bread ; ( F IT “ TEE? terri er R am a w i ll e at bread {F i fi W («i t

R am a o u g ht to e at bread ; m ar 3mm: ( waft tnftfi R am a m u st '

e at bread ; W or t ram mart m m R ama can e at bread .

4 94 . T h e ve rb can a
g re e o n l y wi th an u n i nflecte d o r accu

j
s ati ve o b ect, n ever wi th an i n fl ecte d or dat i ve o ne ; as tfi fi
aw fil m the k i n g g ai ne d a vi ct o r
y (T 5?! ( m m the
k i ng ro bs hi s s u b ects .
j In the for m er e xam ple th e verb

ag rees wi th th e obj e ct , i n the latter i t do es n ot a

g ree W i th i t .

N ata — T he a nomalou s verbs, wh i ch are essenti al l r efle xi ve, and

y
whi ch , therefore , u sual l ak e t he su b ecti ve constr u cti on , may
y t
j
some ti mes be used as
p ure transi ti ves i n t he ob ecti ve or
j neu ter

c on s tructi on, to expr ess the comp l ete sub ecti on of

j th e ob ect aj a?m
sh e W0 11 th e g ame ; a t?
!H i t i ta n fi lm he won all the

marbles
th e dog bi t
mm
and ch ewed
a larm
th e sti ck
th e dog hi t hi m, but m m a n d}
.
27 8 R ULES or OONC OBDA N C E. 4 97

srra m 3: e w a s t! i t a ?R i g a wf at arm ? s ho u ld we a b a n don

al l wo r ld l y
o u r re lati ve s and i t fifi co mforts ? i i i ? q
‘
ri r, w
-
.

-
,

W WW . s tatfi . ait, i th , ts uff s m ll frat a

i B a w w s s f
ta f r
e sa g r
«
“

i fi aff'
t hey h ad alrea dy p laced the re g r ap e s, l emo n s , sh ad
-
dock s , pi ne apple s , po meg ran at e s , plantai n s , fi g s , g uava s , and
se vera l o th er. s uch k i nds of fru i t ; mfi m ‘
, fi rar
'

wri st
g ar, t?
31 e h e bro u g h t s tones , bri ck s an d mortar .

N te.
o — 1 . W hen th e obj ects a re connected by a j
di sj uncti ve c o n unc

ti o n, th e verb a rees only wi th t he last word , rq

fi aq a
i w i ll
'

j t a a
'

g r [ g r

g a rfl ag an wi f,
r r f $
31 1
1 { feral E wen “

y ou w i t hh el d her
bas ket bec ause yo u cou ld n ot g et m oney or t o bacco fro m h e r .

4 9 7 T h e transi ti ve
. ve rb m ay tak e two o b ects j i n di ffe ren t
cas es —
one i n the A C C US A T I VE, a nd the ot h er in t he DA T I V E c ase

( W i th? a n: (N i a ?g i ve fo u r R u pe es to l t fi mj i . T he accu sati ve

o bj ect i s u s uall
y th e d i re ct (wean ! o r
), m and t he d ati ve,
th e i n di re ct or
p ers onal or
W E EK ) o b e ct j .

4 98 T hat . ob e ct
j i s d i r ect wh i ch i s i m medi ately acte d u
pon

by the ve rb, and 1 8 essenti a mp let e i ts s ense an d t h at 1 8

l to co ,

i ndi r ect wh i ch 1 s acte d u p on by t he ve rb re m o te ly T he i n .

di rect i s call ed a
p e rs o n al o bj e ct , wh e n i t de not es a
p e rs o n .

4 99 I t i s su ch ve rbs as e xp r e s s th e i dea of g i vi ng, wh e ther

.

re a l or i m ag i n ary , th at tak e t wo s u ch obj ects— a ccu sati ve and

d ati ve . T he g i n o un
ven i s
p den oti ng th e
u t i n t he th i n g
a cc usati ve case , a n d th e n o u n den oti n t h e rs on t o wh om
g e
p
th e th i n g i s g i ven i s u t i n th e da ti ve cas e
p t m 3 ? H i m S l i m
Fear R am a g ave a mang o t o S adu ; Ef f? ! WET Q éh fi re.
' ‘

-
ma mrts m rwfi i m
‘
H ar i to l d m e a s to r
y; fl u
tte r a as: a
T he Gui k awad M ah ar aj sen t a prese nt t o t h e Q u een .

S o me m ore s u ch verbs are 3 1 1 3 ! to

1 1 beg , fi fi fi to teach, M '
to
a sk , e t c . T h ese ve rbs ag re e w i th th e accu sati ve o bj e ct, and

th e dati ve ; a rm wrt a?(an

'

n ot i fi rarfi re he t au g h t hi m al l
“

t he su bj e cts .

N oteT h e postposi ti on q
.
—
rffi and
'

are o ften i di o mati cally

s u bs ti tu ted fo r th e dati ve termi n ati on ; ma m aai ry tell i t to
i hi m ;
mm 3
“

g i ve i t to h i m “ 3 3 1 55 f arm
“

3 11? h e h as been
s e nt to me .
 505 B UL as o r oos conm uos . 27 9

5 00 . Wh en th e di r ect ob ect
j denotes an acti on, th e dati ve
s u pi n e is u s uall
y u sed ; If?i f m m he wi sh es t o read
-
it tfl m u m! fi rmFt sh e l earn s to wri te . T he i nfi n i ti ve m ay ,
al s o, in so me cases, be u s ed to ex e s n ]?i s: “ i f?
a cti on ; a
pr s a

h e desi res to co m e .

501 T he dati ve su i n e m ay h ave i ts own j

ob e ct : it
p 35
'
.

fi al
' ’

m fi a
rrr fir h e l ea rn s t o re ci te p o e try .

5 02 . T h e da t i ve s upi ne a n d
the p re sent parti ci pl e 1 n aT o r
am are u s e d as th e i n di re ct obje ct to co m plete th e s e nse of th e
d i rec t ob ect j whi ch 18 a noun or p ron ou n fi lm W as

fi fi fi fi fi th ey ta ug h t h er to wri te T h ey tau g ht h er wh at ? T o
‘ —
.

w ri te m 3 a n m mW -
mi l 36 I saw R am a swi mm i ng .

T he ver bs o a u thori fl ffi fi mffi i to

‘
1 .
f ty, s u ch as to te ll,
‘

t e ach, m afi a
?to com m man d, m at to i nfl ue n ce
, &c .
, tak e th e
-
su
p i ne as a com l e m en t o r
p i n di r ec t ob ect ; j “ ”
e r (f
f ar m
m I g o t hi m t o do i t I n En g li sh th e . i nfi ni ti v e i s u sed

as th e co m p lem e n t i n s u ch ca s e s .

2 . W hen what a p e rs o n is a c tu a l ly eng aged i n i s to be ex

p res s e d,
th e
p re s e nt
p a r ti ci l e i n ai
p or ai m al o ne i s u se d as the
mft ai fl r t zn qrffi t
'

c o m l e me n t o r i n di re ct o bj e c t W I sa w
' ' ' ' '

p
h i m beat i n g fi at trra imW I h ear d h er si n i
g gn . T he
v e r bs m g ? to se e , Qafi
'
to h ear, &c .
,
tak e t hi s parti ci p i al
c om l e m en t
p .

5 03 . S o m e ti m es th e tr an s i ti ve ve rb so acts u p o n t h e di r e c t
o b e ct
j t h at i t p ro d u ces s om e cha ng e i n i t, a s wh e n w e s ay ,
H e m ade th e wa ter wi n e S u ch verbs are call e d f a cti ti ve
.

m
‘

ver bs . S o me of the fac ti t i ve v e rbs ar e to m a k e , fir to

sa
y o r cal l , 3711 5!to a
pp oi n t, « a
fl t to u n ders tand o r con s i der,

M ai to th i n k .

5 04 . F acti ti ve ve rbs ta k e two ob j ec s — t th e o ne on wh i ch

th e v e rb acts , an d th e other wh i ch re s u l ts fro m th a t a ct vi i ty .

T h e l a tter i s cal l e d th e f a cti ti j

ve o b e ct .

5 05 . I n S an sk r i t b o th th e obj e cts are acc us a ti ve , as i s th e

c as e i n E n g l i s h ; bu t i n M arat hi on e is ac cu s ati ve , and th e
o t h e r , dati ve ; -
W W (T i IT $ 3 th e frog s m ade the
W ,
 280 B um s or oo s conm s cs . 506

o s tri ch k i ng ; 1 17 m m fin m I re
g ard hi m as my
fri en d ; m tfi fl w fi lm?I con si de r y ou t o be m y father .

T he di rect o b e ct
j i n thes e exam pl es i s dati ve , an d the i n di
re ct or facti ti ve, accu sati ve .

§ 5 06 . T he facti ti ve verb a
g rees wi th i ts di rect j
ob ect ,

an d if th e di re ct o b ec t j is in the dati ve ca se, i t tak es th e

N e u te r con s tructi o n ; a ri d? mm W fl they m ade hi m a

servan t .

th at t he ver b i n
“

N ata — It i s certai n s u ch cons tructi on s ough t to

be si ngu lar n euter as both th e sub ect j and the di re ct j

ob ect are

i nflected .

N o te .
—T h e most sati sfact ory m ode of determi ni ng th e di rect obj ect
i s to co nvert t he i nto t he passi ve verb, an d the o bj ect that be
acti ve

co mes th e subj ect of th e assi ve ve rb i s th e di rect o bj ect T he

p .

i flg ifi fi l
ve o f u m as wou ld be fi r m m m ( rm
' ' '

pas s ar
firm h e“ th e o stri ch was made k i ng by th e frog s, not M y (fi n

5 07 . T he con s tru cti on o f the facti ti ve verb m ay be m o di

fi ed, an d the g ve rb th e n a re e s wi th th e facti ti ve j
o b e ct i a?
ar

m m i ah 37 6 1 th ey m ade a slave of the k i ng ; t erm ?fi rm

' ' “

{i f}?35 3 they m ade i r o n i n t o g ol d W he n th e co n vers i o n . of

l i fe less thi ng s i s s
p ok en o f, th e i di o m g i ve n last i s u s ual ly

fol lo we d .

'

5 08 . T he accu sati ve n o u n wh i ch fo rm s th e facti ti ve j

ob e ct,

s ub st i t u te d by an j
a d ecti ve ; fi rfl fflf m a? 3 75
'

m ay be the
'

e ar

p p
e o le m ade h i m m ad ; W § § ai q m ai rfi th e p ru den t
o n es o u g h t to m ak e th ose wh o ar e fooli sh wi se .
W h en an

j
ad e c ti ve i s th us u se d as a fac ti ti ve o b e ct, j it a r ee s in
g
n der an d n u m be r w i th th e di rect o bj e ct ; bu t i f th e d i re ct
g e

o bj e c t i s i n fle c te d i e , i s i n th e dati ve ca se, i t i s u t i n the

,
p. .

hi s
;
n e u ter s i n g u la r as i n th e ab o ve exam l es T he ad e ct i ve s
j
p .

an d ?
first ! are n e u ter si n u l ar
g .

509 . W he n th e di rect ob e ct j de note s a l i fel ess th i ng , i t i s

u s ua ll
yp ut i n th e a ccu sati ve case , an d th e n t he fac ti ti ve ad oej
ti ve ag re e s wi th i t i n g en der an d n u mbe r aafi W M 55 6 ?
h e m ade the wall bl ack .
282 T H E A T T R IB UT E . 51 1

51 1 T he o b ecti ve s e nten ce u s uall

j the wor ds
.
y r e orts
p o
f
the sp ea ker I n M aré thi the wor ds o f the S peak e r are si m p ly
.

qu oted, a nd i n troduced by s uc h p arti cl es as a

f t, o r fol l owe d by
i r é,
“

s uch
‘
w ords as st , gr go
, &c I n Eng l i sh a di fferen t m o d e
.

o f co ns tr u c ti o n i s follo we d . T he M arath i s e nte nc e, i f g fi qt ? '

-
i i i q511 3 i i?war m li t .
“
he sai d to m e, th at I wi l l co m e
,

to y o u r h o u se , wo uld be re n de re d i n E ng li s h thu s : h e sai d t o

”

me that h e wo ul d co me to m y h o u se W e g i ve bel o w a fe w .

mor e e xam pl e s

-R ag h u s ai d that h e was i ho m e, M
( g
En .
g o n g ( ar .

mm ? f?an fi , li t R ag h u sai d that, I am oi n h o me

“ ”
r
srr
'

; a
s I .
g g .

Eng .
— I tol d h i m th at h e was th e m an that I w i sh e d t o
-
s ee (M ar .
)fi a w atti red?aft 5 211 113 8 1 11 3 1 ar m a?{ i s asi r Fi t
li t . I t ol d h i m t h at, “
y o u are th e m an I wi sh t o see .

E ) -Y ask e d
hi m wh e re y o u we nt y es ter day, (M a r )
( ng . o u .

1 2W fi flfi d f ?i f 8 11 6 d , l l i t k d h i m t h t
‘
i fi u
'

o a
y s e a .

wh e re di d I g o ye ste rday
Di rect (Eng I s ai d to h i m, A t ai l or ? M
”
.

) — re y o u a ) f?
( ar .
I

mmw a?
s or N TaT ( i
T ‘
ffrfi SIT ?
“ I ndi rect (Eng )
'

I ask e d hi m i f h e we re a tai l or .

CH A P T ER XXV .

T H E A T T R I B UT E .

T h e A dj ect i v e .

51 2

51 2 . TH E A D EC T I VE J IS US ED EI T H ER B EFOR E A N OUN to
' =

ouamrv rr, m s rr W I T H ”
o n ar T H E vans TO BE a s A ras urcar x
vn
-
arfl qfi
‘
m m l earn e d m e n are re s
pe cte d i t «fit m en t
he i s ve ry k i nd . I n t h e fi rst s e n ten ce th e j
ad e cti ve is u s ed

attri bu ti vely (W ) , an d i n th e las t, predi cati vely (fi r?

fri m )
’

513 . T H E A DJ EC T I VE A GR EE S W IT H T H E N OU N I T Q UA LI F I ES m
G EN D ER A N D N UM B ER ; i f?fi ne r 3 11 ?he i s g oo d .
 51 7 TH E A T T R I B UT E . 28 3

514 . T he decli nable ad ecti ve

j i s i nflected to i ndi cate i ts
a
g re e m ent i n g e n der an d n u m be r w i th th e n o un whi ch i t qual i

but n o t s o th e i ndecli nable ( an a i m an?(em W W

-
fi e s,
li
qf W it wrfr R am a 1S i n deed g oo d, bu t n ot h e althy W fi

5 1 5 T he de cli n able adj e ct i ve s i mpl y as s u me s

. m or (I before
i nfl ecte d fi (6 WW W? l fil I w i ll n ot
'' ’
an n ou n ' i
; v

t h en S p e ak w i th lo w p e opl e ; vi i ar am
-
q - -
f a li resi t
'

o at { t

an ? I h ave fal le n i n to y ou r h an ds at th e very o u ts e t . Of th e

t wo form s , that i n an i p s re fe ra ble , b u t fo r th e s a k e o f vari e t
y,
b oth fo rm s m ay s o m eti m e s be u s ed mfi z q ‘
r g affi
-
3 11 t erm

firm t e rs
h fi t da
y o f s ch o ol -
h o l i da s
y .

N ata —
Someti mes th e i ndecl i nable j ad ect i ve m ay be i nflected for
t he sak e of em p h asi s ( sui ts ? er
-
a n d? rma
a I
i
-
?) m ter ma r ar ( h e
l ook s at hi m )co nte m pt u ou sly
O t h o u
p o o r fell o w ! 7 1 qm m
GM T, 3 1 1 11 51 Q THT a m fi e 0 m y w o rt h y u n c l e
, y
o u w i ll re al l
y
f l ? T h e ad ecti es r fl d -q
p ard o n m
y au t s
j v t i r a n {
I s a r e i n fl ec ted .

N ote - A si ng ular no un of di g ni ty bei ng u s ed i n th e pl ural n u mber,

.

t he adj ecti ve q ual i f i n

y g i t as s um es
p l u ral i nfl ecti o ns fi m
r era

{a ft G O pal rao i s i ndeed h o n est Em 6 f l atfi rst?! am th i s g en tl em an

i s th e father of th o se t wo bovs .

51 6 . W H E N T H E A DJ EC T I V E I S US E D A T T R I B UT I V EL Y T O r wo '

-
O R M O R E N O UN S , I T A G R E E S W I T H T H E N E A R ES T : gra i nm a i m
q ifi , ms th
'
i s G er
g o o d c o a t, t u rba n an d p lai d m gfiaai rW
’ ' '

q efi r t m
tr ( i f s eg a th e b ea s t s an d b i m
rd s Of th at cl i mate are fo u n d
h ere ; 3 T W fi
arr ’r
3 8 mW 31 1? s ure I l i k e thi s g oo d boy
an d i rl
g .

51 7 . W H EE T H E A DJ EC T I V E D
I S U SE P R ED I CA T I V ELY T O T WO
OR M O R E N OU N S , IT F OL L OW S TH E R ULE S OF C ON C O R DA N C E GI VEN
B EL OW

1 . W hen b oth th e n o un s den ote p e rs on s an d are of th e s am e

n de r , th e j
ad e cti ve is u se d i n th e p l u ral n u m be r f i
st r br
f
g e
1
m M (TEN T?you an d I ar e con s tant ten an ts of th e fo re st .

B u t i f th e s ub ect s
j are of di fferent g enders, th e predi cati ve
28 4 ru e A T T R I B UT E . 5 18

ad ecti ve
j i s i n the neu ter
p l ural : a rm m 3 Sfl f m i ii ? W
i n? ! hi s fath er an d m othe r are very g oo d pe o ple .

2 . W he n the s ub ects j deno te i nan i mate ob ects,

j th e pre d i
j
c ati ve ad ecti ve al way s ag rees wi th the l as t mfi i fi ré “ If ? i
‘
. ! f?

i n? m i ts head an d beak were l arg e ; Bfi affi fi é

' '

m W ‘

W arm , a mi w fi m r «i ' ’'

v
m a m m m r m:
m t he flo w g e n tl y here an d th ere, an d mak e t h e
s tr ea ms

h ll s n
i a d l o w v a l ley s l o o k v er
y g re e n T h e de mon s trat i v e .

p ron o u n gr th i s, m a
y b e o p ti onally i n serted i n th e n eu t e r

p l u m b fi fi m fi ‘
fl fi fifi sfl i fl .

§ 51 8 . S o m e ti m e s two or m or e ad e c ti ve s
j m ay quali f
y a

W W a a re are Tlffi ’ I
‘ saw a tall an d thi ck tre e ;
“ '
n ou n a t
W qrt rlfi
‘
‘
m fli i gi cfi
' '

th ere were Ol d a n d
'

ff o nl to r n
'

g a a y
t urbans there .

519 . W h en two l
p y oor
e d, t more
h e ad ecti ve s
j are em

d em on strati ve pr o nou n BR IT s u ch, i s el e g an tly i n serted betwe e n

th e adj ect i ve s an d th e n o u n they q u al i f
y ga ! R I T Q F W
'

r B E

W 3 1m m
smi war a h an ds o m e an d n o ble y o uth s u dde n

ly a
pp eare d o n
p th e s ot W QIET IT $ 75 5 ? armQ ‘
e
‘

hr

( tar ar H am i “ Ti ?we
i i n th e co m of a r u de and im
‘
t ar e an
p y
u de n t g e n tl e m an
p .

W he n th e n ou n i s i nfle cte d, th e de monstrati ve p ronou n is

o ften i ns ert e d i n th i s way, an d th en the dem o n strati ve a lo n e is
i nflecte d to a g ree wi th th e n o u n , a n d n ot th e j
ad e cti ve s, as in
the s e con d o f th e abo ve e xam l es
p .

5 5 20 . T he ad e cti ve
j m ay be u sed a s the ob ect of a
j trans i
t i ve verb : SE W Eff? ER ? F a; i f? 66 11 ? we S h ou l d n ot do
h arm an y bo dy , bu t on l oo d
y g .

W hen th e decl i nabl e a dj ecti ve i s u se d

by i tself as t h e obj ec t
of a tran si ti ve v erb, i t as s u me s i ts n e u te r S i ng u lar form uran
rgfi H i
'

fi a
r fi , ( 3
'
1
1 ? mi l w e
“
tol d h i m th e tru th, n ot u n truth .

5 21 . W h en th e decli nable a dj ecti ve i s u s ed al ong wi th

an other o b ect , e i ther a n o un or
j p ron ou n, i t may be con stru ct

ed i n two way s
286 T H E A TT R I B UT E . 5 2 4i

PR N I CI PA L N O UN DO ES N OT I N DICA T E ON E S I N G L E OBJ ECT B UT T H E '

WH OLE C LA SS OR S PE C I ES o r T H A T O BJ E C T i ii a ? g m m m
5 11 ? h e i s th e w i ses t of al l the boy s , l i terally , h e tha n a l l th e

boys wi se i s .

N ote .
-
W h en th e co mpari son i s on l
y be t w een t wo o r m ore i n d i v i
d ual obj ects, the com pari so n i s s ai d, in Engl i sh, to be o f t he comp a r a t i ve
deg ree, and wh en the co mpari son i s betwe en an o b e ct o r Ob e c t s
j j an d

t he whol e cl as s o f th ose obj ec ts, i t i s sai d t o be of t he su e r l a ti ve

p
deg ree, and th e t wo degrees together are calle d degr ees f
o co mp a r i s on

W W W afi i :
’

N ata — T he S ansk ri t parti cles o f com ari son are

p at an d in fo r th e
co mparati ve deg ree, a nd as a nd
g, fo r t
“

h e su
perl ati ve as
g
a
a p u re ,

am: p urer , w as p urest Even substanti ves are co mpared i n th i s

“

3 0 .

w ay d }a wo man, ti tan more of a woman a

! a man , ra
g m : a th o

ro u gh man
I n P ersi an the parti cle s are at an d afi a, whi c h
.
in
Z end the pa rent of P ers i an, are at and El
m; 3 3 g oO d, agar bette r, and
aged]? bes t T he root of th e se parti c les of co mpari son i s a to s tep
.

beyond. I n Engl i sh H t exi s ts i n the for m of er, an d g i n th at of es t;

small,
” “
sm all er, - smal l -es t .

N a
at — T h o ugh p n one of th es e
a re e m lo ed i n M ara
p y t hi arti cl es

a fe w S ank ri t wo rds ex ressi ve o f th e hi hest de ree of

p g g q y re of
u ali t a
co mmon u se i n the l an uag e l l t, va n best, q
Gi gi ! x
ffig m ost
“

g e ce e n ’

r el i g i ou s, fi g h i g h est, i ts best , tr fi rs t T he P ersi an word 3 m:

3 .

better i s also n at u rali s ed i n th e l an ua e

g g .

N ote .
—
T he s uperlati ve is someti mes made up wi th ou t th e su la
p er
ti ve p arti cl es i n the sa me wa as in M athi bv m eans of t he lo cati ve
y ir

c ase
m m i l?( t i t amo ng poe ti cal com osi ti ons th e D rama i s t he
p
m ost pleasant S o meti mes th e g eni ti ve i s al so u sed t reri or I ‘
.
fi m g 5
er
g i
a th e blm
ack among th e cows
g i ves th q
e l ar est u anti t
g y of mi l k .

5 24 T he follo wi ng o th e r m etho ds ar e , al s o , e m l d f
p y
.
o e or
m ak i ng u
p t h e fo rm s for th e su
p e rlati ve deg ree
1T h e p ri n ci pal n ou n m ay be ut i n th e l o cati ve case
p
.
, g ov

e r ne d by th e p o s t o si ti o n Sl i t- q i t, i ns tead o f i n th e ablati ve
p r o r u
,

?sq
i n fle cte by F or 33 1i ; gr a s
d i sq
i a fi ar an?thi s i s th e larg e st
‘ ' '

m an g o a fi mfi era ai m fir{ rerun he i s, i n dee d of al l m

' “

, en the
wi se st
 528 T H E A T T B I B UT E . 2 8?

2 . T he s up e rl ati ve adve rbs at fii

‘
, 31 m ?! e xtre mel
y , ?
au ra
‘
utterl y, &c .
, may be j o i ned to th e ad ecti ve
j W ar s mzfi m
g ar
ter ear ? th at h e to ok the s mal le s t o f th e pi e ce s .

3 j
T he fi r
s t g re a t an d i m
a d e cti ves
H g o o d m ay b e j o i n e d
-
.

fT ESE
to th e adj e cti ve : sur Fi fi Eli ff f wi ll M rh e h el d a v e ry
'

‘
long rod i n h i s ha n d a} i nf g! an?h e i s very wi ck e d é r afrar
‘ '

m m l i a r;ai ai m m ? h i
'

he loo k s a
g reat
'
3 11 e s a ver
y
lear n e d m : an?h e i s a ve ry wi se m an W C

fi W r m afl i
‘
o ur co un try is
y fe rti l
v er
e
i
e ther ai m ,

Evas ?
'
at r i a y o u are ve r
y r u de, ve r
y i m p u de n t .

4 . T he ad e cti ve
j m ay be doubled, o r an o t h er n o u n or j
ad e c

ti ve of co g n a te s i g ni fi cati o n j oi n e d to i t {fr arm are: 117 3 7 he

“

becam e ve ry re d or afasr GTE

”

m a r, l i t .
, h e becam e red re d

d l i ke th e gm fl ower
‘
or ér a
arr
ys a fa r,
l i t .
, h e becam e re or

i f? m { 17 8 1 h e beca me of a bri g h t, flari n g r ed a n?! di e

a i f h be co m e ve ry blac k , or co al
'
351 2s fl at err h s ac e as

black w
i at rEsra whi te wh i te , wh i te o r tr im
'

very

whi te as cry s tal, e xtre m ely wh i te .

N o te . — I n th e l ast th ree pa rag rap h s t h e com pari s on is no t di rect .

5 25 . B ET W EEN O B J ECT S I S D EN OT ED B Y T H E US E
EQ UA L I T Y
or T H E D EM O N S T R A T I VES ma n an d g ea r S UBST I T UT E D FO R T H E
h m art { Gram m fi mi r he l oo k s as
‘
POS T P OS I T I O N { a or a
' '

y o u n g as my s el f
g aff { ai m Ei i ari a i n“
? th e m o o n i s n o t s o f
'
ar
' '

as th e su n .

N ata —
W denotes mag ni tu de o r q y g ai n , bo th quan u ant i t , and ~

t i ty and n u mber “ i f w i t W “ E
T?!I do n ot w an t so m an
y
ru
p ees m n or
a W ?ma so m u ch ri ce .

5 26 . S i mi lari ty of
q uali ti es is i ndi cate d by th e words
-
«IEtar m m, fi r t li k e. &c 3 “ e tfi
qri mi ss: m
’
s
,

the: I , li ke y o u, l i ve h ere o n th e ch ar i ty of o thers .

5 27 . A s mall deg ree of

q ual i ty is e xpress e d by m odi fy
i ng the by m o r at {fr m
ad ec ti ve j or m M h e

l oo k ed so m e wh at black o r the adj ecti ve i s m o di fi e d by th e

adverbs a rr fi rfiaq , SI RE & c :i i} ar rSH EET an?h e i s a li ttle dark
. . .
,

5 28 . W hen an ad ec ti vej q ual i fi es a n ou n , ex ressi n

p g th e

S ense of p l ur a li t , i t i s
y us ual ly r epeated fi t 3 6 ! 5751 ! SIT ?
288 T H E A TT R I B UT E.

ih g reat m e n h ad com e t he re m tr i fl e i f; or t -
i Tfi ‘
hat?
t

i f at r a i th e re a re larg e ho u s e s i n that to wn ga r m wiv

F uT W W W 3 mm m m y o u m u s t h ave re ce i ve d m a ny
e xcel l e nt p re se n ts . I n M ar athi as i n the oth er I ndi an v e r n ac u

l ars , t h e adj ecti ve of q ual i t

y i s th u s u s ually re p eate d, W h i le i n
Eng li sh i t i s u se d si ng ly .

N ata — By g m
affi xi n th e adj ecti ve h as the sam e sense th a t i t con
‘
veys i n i ts redu l i cat ed form
p a n m tflz fi } o r eff a tri a
‘
a .

5 29 . T he re dupli cate d adj ec ti ve e xp re sses th e fo llo w i ng

a ddi ti ona l se n s e s

1 . It ex
p re sse s th e se nse o f th e ad e cti ve
j di str i bu t i velg
«Tar qa; Ira: a rts
: W g i ve a cak e to e ach o f the m al l ; a?
wre r t m a m h h ? t at they all a te , bu t e ac h to ok
'
e t o

o nly a q uarte r of a cak e .

W
" "
d fié W
‘
2 It ua l i é z
f d
'
. e xpre sses gra p ro
g ress on zr r ea a

li ttle at a ti m e m i ?M ami e Bri n s fl i t arr

g fi rEmm a
-
s it
al l ? El i th e shado w of th e mo rni n g beco mes g ra d u all y
sh orte r an d th at of th e eve n i ng lon g e r .

3 . I t e xpre sses i n tensi ty l?857 8 a re;

E g mr h e became very

r ed ;1 m 3 1? W W arrest hi s e nd is qi t
ue near .

53 0 . A dj e cti ves o f op pos i te o r co

g n ate si
g ni fi cati o n are

com bi n e d to e xpres s th e s en s e of co mp rehens i veness : M i f?

W m w i m: (73! th e re
l d and old,
0

r e: ge
re ,
n c u i ng th e y o u n g
fi ve th ou san d me n p resent ; fi n ? fi nal?staff 5 3; W u i
d
"

‘h e h ad i n hi s hand flowers — reen l l w &

fi sfl g , y e o , c .

53 1 . W H EN A N O UN I s J O N E I D T o A N O T H ER N O UN T o EX

P LA I N O R I L LUS T R A T E I T , IT Is S A ID T o B E US E D I N A r ro srrI ON ,
A ND

T H E VE R B A N D T H E A DI E C T I V E A G R EE W T H I TH E A P POS I T I O N , A ND

N OT W T H T H E I OR I G I N AL W OR D : a$ 3 6 (T m , m , a m
i,W EN ? fi ai l ffi fi at that ti m e R am rao Kr i sh
’ '

fl H g ,

n arao, an d Si vi tri bai , the chi ldre n o f Davlatr a

i v, we ret ere ;W
fl a m m a w m wfi flwm w further on I
an o ld m an au d a boy ; gi f t 3 ! 3 7 5g?fi tt wi fl lr
'

met two pers ons,

W (fi t N i 3 F fi
‘ ‘
s fit? m t he i sland of B o mbay was n ot so
larg e w he n i t was i n the p os se ssi on of the P or tug uese . I n the
 29 0 rno u oUN s . 53 3

N eta —
1 . T h e edi tors o f newspapers, representi ng the publi c, ha
bi tu al ly u se the fi rst person pl ural zsl n fl bani} an ?m fi mmu
a
' '

q
nj q? 1 1 76? m an ?we h ear th at th e G o ve rn men t h as eflected
'
the

transference of i ml atdar P u bli c

the ma ofii ci als i n thei r offi ci al ch arac

m
.

ter may u se th e pl u ral number stu ff a" i m fi e";

n
at
we shal l consi der the p eti ti o n of t hi s pri so ner .

N ata —
2 . A perso n m i ght , i f o f ack nowl edged di gni ty , use th e fi rst
p erso n
pl u ral whe n speak i ng of h i msel f ai rwi a sl i t qfi
r I th i nk so,
' '

li t .
, we th i nk s so sm i a"?
‘
fl rfi I sh al l n ot be able t o come W '
.

N te
o —
p . 3 . W hen ex r essi ng di spleasu re at th e conduct of another,

chi ldren , as well as g ro wn-up pecple, so meti mes assu me W W e ;fi H i

eff s r 81 mm am are?si re s , eate r amt m i ?i t i s all tru e, but I

fl

I do to th at P and} 7176 51131!

cannot bear j es ti n g ; hat
w can
M
3 11 g ) away, I won t sp eak wi th you
’
.

N ote .
— 4 . A person mi g h t modestl y us e W for 31?” a ra m
w 33 6 I li t yo u and I
. sh al l th i nk abou t i t .

53 3 . IN A D DR ESS I N G A P E R S ON , T H E S EC ON D P L UR A L r o am I s

USUA L L Y U S E D : (th e k i ng s ay s ) é fl
'

affi?
x fl i
t t W
‘
, mi all
”

W it h
gfi W 23: i r n o
«rift I have g i ve n thi s to yo u whi ch i s but
li ttl e I beli e ve i t i s n o t e n o u h to afford ou co m l ete reli ef ;
; g y p
an ?
-
as !" zi r t
‘a a
vw r g r wa r fi sh m m er
.
m m { an
c mi ?
ai l mm
‘

fi rg f f fi fi fl a a fi a
'
I am ver m u ch grati fi ed at
' '

t li
'

g y
y o u r g oo dn e s s , m adam . What are
y o u r wi sh es ? What can
I do for y ou r pl eas ure

1 . In a ddre ssi n g i nfer i ors , s uch as ch i l dren ,

y ou n g er rela

ti ves, m e ni als , c ri m i nal s , &c the secon d si n u la r

g is u s ed : ( to

m
.
,

the pag e ) fi li f, 3 h 8 m EN T ER W 3§ ifl 3fl i i th fi m
i fl fi at 31 28
'

,
ai m Eff? wt n o, ther e i s n o occasi on for i t y our

m other wi ll co m e to y ou , sh e wi ll m eet you only here . H ave

p ati en ce for a m om ent .

N ata —
l . Bu t th e chi ldren of persons of e ual o r superiqor s tati on

may be adressed i n th e pl ural number mm m 31 m m i chfld

do y ou want t hi s sweet meat ?S ervants alway s u se the pl ural fo rm .

N ote .
— 2 Eq
. ual s , fri ends and rel ati ves , mi h t use t he si n ular
g g
nu mber to o ne ano t her, i f the degree of fami li ari ty between them
ad mi ts o f it .
 534 J raoNouus. 29 1

2 . B UT A LL om ens, or wns ravaa ST A T I ON m ar MAY nu,

S H OU L D B r A DDR ES S E D rN r nr s
'
m ear . N un s s a. T he ki ng th u s
add re sses the pag e
’
s brothe r who i s , an offi ce r i n the army : an
m , ari a mi G oo d m orni ng , si r ; pl ease wal k i n ui t t hi s ? q
t
W “ If !a? at i t? y ou r fath er was a man o g rea
“ f
i n teg ri ty an d courag e .

N a ta —
l W hen the k i ng i s di spleased wi th th e same o fii cer and

w
.

re ard s
g h im as a cri m i nal , he uses th e si ng u l ar number m
m a r W art . w ?
er e m w m ‘
afir m fi del i m

y o u r s word over to Dalpatrzi v . P ut h i m i n pri son for a month . In

th e fo llowi ng sentence the p lural pronomi nal form (W ) wi th th e
h on o ri fi c s ub uncti ve i s
j used sarcas ti call
y : s mri l
“

" (W m
m
.

you may go now, si r, to your

p ri son.

N o te .
— 2 . T he si ng ular may someti mes be used i nstead of the plural
in e xci ted moments of tenderness . T he k i ng c hang es the plu ral to
w hen much
’
the s i ng ular address i ng the pag e s m other, bei ng very

affec te d by h er tender lan g uag e : W fl , Ii m {m it m m

wi r; 3 , W {
e 3 0 m y m o the r do not tmh o u g i ve m e so m uch re

s pec t A ri se and stan d up

. T he moth er i s u su al ly add ressed by th e
.

nati ves i n the si ngul ar n u mber, but the father, i n the pl ural .

N ote .
— 3 . In addressi n
g the D ei ty t he si ng ul ar number is used

m
.

31 7 Hf! m,
”

m m 81 0 God, th ou only art my Savi ou r .

534 . In addressi n
g
’
one s o wn m asters an d
p erson s of di g
ni t
y , as well as e q u al s who are S
p ok e n to i n a f ormal way, t he
re fl exi ve
p ronoun W is s ubsti tu ted for th e secon d p erson
p l ur al m i ni s saver ar m was sure ?W s i r, we are

del i g hte d at y ou r mag nan i m i ty . W i th a

st r win the n omi nati ve
cas e , the verb i s i n th e s ec o n d pe rso n
pl ural, as wi th W .

A s ti ll m ore poli te form of address wou ld be wi th s u ch

ho nori fi c e x res si ons a s m a

(T r H er mi e, m &c u se d
p , , , .
,

i n the pl ace of smrw an d t fl co nstr ucted wi th th e verb i n the ‘

g
thi rd person pl ural T hi s i s a most i nd i rect, and th ere fore a
.

most res
p e ctfu l mode of a ddre ss . T h us , th e s choolm aster
,

s
pe ak i n
g t o t h e k i n
g ,
s a
y s ) : r fl fi fl T !
? W {I W W I w W
S ho u l d do wh at wo ul d
p l e a s e y ou r M a est
y th e s ui re i s thus j q
addresse d
W m m wrsi afi i
’

m w m afi w
W I wi ll tell i t to yo u that yo ur h onour m ay k now that I
292 PR ON O UN S . 53 4

am
qui te helples s i n thi s matter ; 1 m:P
r m
a af fi rm W3 W ( waft
(T m I am behi nd the ti me o f paym en t a few days, an d you ,
si r , m i gh t th ere fore be an n oy e d .

ObsI n Engl i sh , th ou gh ti tl es are substi tute d for the seco nd per

.
—

sonal pron oun i n addres si ng s u peri o rs , t he p ronoun i s no t e nti rel

y
di spensed wi t h the h ono ri fi c nou ns are
j i
o n ed to th e g e ni ti ve o f the

pro no u n as y ou r excel lenc ,

y y our h on o ur, &c . I n M arath i t h e fo rms
of di rect address are enti rely j
re ecte d a t (” fi g ( m arra y

w whit m il i ffs m
r e rg as I sai d to my sel f that p erhaps
our honou r was an noyed and t herefo re y ou sent back t h e h o rse
y .

N ata — I n more fami li ar i nterco urse, or i n mo me nts of stro n g e mo

ti o n, the si mple gi f t you m i g h t be u se d i n stead of armr o

,
or the

h onori fi c T h a e s moth er, wh en o ver o we red wi t h a

ex ressi ons .
’

p e
p g p
of g rat i tu de and affecti on for th e ki n g s m os t wonderful k i ndness
’
sense

to her an d her son, thus addresses the k i ng :

W m W fi fi m
fl W W W W W W fi HI $ 311 1 wi ll eve r
p ra
y t o God
th at he m ay ever bless su ch as are li k e yo u, gen ero us an d k i nd to the

p oor. So also the o ld beggar wh en blessi ng th e sq ui re u s es the

si ngul ar n um ber :
m m
g atgfl ( rj
a ?m a
y Go
’
d ble ss yo u .

N ote —
In addressi ng e so ns by name, t he n ames of males s h ould
.
p r

wi th th e hon o ri fi c ll i t i st Q T, arsi t,
’
be used su ffi xes (TH . ( W i , ,
l
,
'
&c , .

and the names of females wi t h aft, mi , &c thu s W m fln t

'
o r s .

arm si t w
-
m G o palr i
z v, wh ere ar e
y o u g o i ng
? T h e fo r m
M i s m ore res pectf u l t ha n t hat i n rm T he i f: and at ar e o ften
“

assu med by t hose who are n ot B rah man s, thou g h GT i s fre ely ap pl i ed
to th e nam es o f the po pul ar gods , as (1 3 1 m t he g od Khandobzi , M ar
i
t h e go d V i th obz B ra hm ans ch i efly tak e q
.
’
a , u nless they h ave stu
th e S hast l as, or are o ffi ci at i n am ta K
'

di ed any of g as
p ri es ts ,
t
e ro
pant

(a 8 00 0 18 1
‘
B rah man) ; l TW l Gfl R’
a m S i stri ( a B rah m an ve rsed m the
Sastras) ; W OT QM M ahade va bh at (
a B rah m an pri est) .

Nata — T h e forms of nam es are so m et i mes m o di fi e d w hen the

{fi g a m an s na me i n i ts si m ple fo rm, be i ng
’
honori fi c su ffi xes are u sed

ch anged to w a
s . Ni s an . {fi g s fi m . t fis m fi ft so also (EL
R ag hu Q ,
‘
U di a tum . ( fi rs t. t re
s s , ( ga m rg amrra ,
Sw

Obs ,
— T he safest co u rse fo r the Eng li s hm an to fo l lo w i n thi s m at
ter i s t h e follo wi ng —
A n Eng li shm an may be cal led by (1 ) h i s C hr i s
ti an n ame, or by 2 hi s su r n a me, or by 3 hi s surname wi th M r .

efi xed, or () T he M ar 1 thi si mple na me wi th

’

p r 4 addressed as si r, di e . .
294 P aoNoUN s . 53 6

5 3 6 W h en the pe rsonal p ro noun s tak e i n fl ected nou n s in

m
.

i i
a p os t o ,
n th ey u su a l ly a s su m e t h ei r c r u de - fo rm s:m
p
‘
1 ?m m M ? w h a t ca n w e s a y a b o u t u s
p ea s a n ts ? W 1 T
l rq
{ai rm en mi y i i f m
N

o u o u
g h t t o g v e a
g t to e ,
a
p o o r m an ;g
'

m {1 5 5 W m ti f f?wh at person s l i ke y o u
, to
com e t o th e hou se of u s eopl e
p oor p
T h e fi rs t an d s econ d er son al no un s as su m e thei r i n s tr u
p pro

men tal forms, and n ot th ei r cru de for ms, before n ames i n the
i nstr umental cas e : W T WWW lF EI
‘
fi '
m Eat
“

fi re mfi mall ' '

su m?mfi mg?unfi ? wh e n I , th e l ord of the vi l lag e, as k e d a

thi n g of hi m, sho ul d h e h ave refu se d to g i ve i t to me 2

g m
-
( mi fi t W ar:t at yo u , g entle m en , S ho ul d no t act s o .

N ol a — W he n th e nou n is u n i nfle cted , th e pronou ns are also u ni n

m am ?
“

flected t fi at}: aré

'
wh at can I , p oor man, do P

T he I ndefi ni te P erson a l P ronomi e .

53 7 . ar m and m : ar e s u bsti tute d for all the p e rs o nal

‘
p ron ou n s (S ect . W N W !13“
m ari a ' Il Bl
'

W
m he h a vi ng k ept m e o u ts i de , s at i nsi de tal k i n g a wa
y
m arm awri r what shall we do n o w?a rm?
’

l ei sure ly ai 3 1
arr

m m , at m fi afi fi wa f
v ‘
i ? I f I sh oul d ser ve h i m th en
'

who S h o ul d l ook after my affai rs ?

53 9 T hey have
. u su ally a re fl exi ve fo rce, an d are use d to
f?m
"
e mph as i ze th e p erson al p ron o un s : I : i t 35 5 I mys elf di d
i t ; gar tame r fi i fi where can y ou
y ou rs el f s ee ?
53 9 W . is al way s s ubs t i tu ted
for the pe rso nal p rono uns ,
wh en th ey r efer to the s u bj ect of the sentence, an d n ot o therwi se .

— “ I wi ll re m ai n i n m
h l
”
T h e En g li sh sen te nce y o wn o u s e wi l b e
‘
i n M ar ath i , tfi w e !" ( n o t m m ) ari a ( raw; th ey h ave g on e
i n th ei r o wn boat ; 3 m e an ( n o t w h en ) afi a fi at ri a h e
h as r ob be d h i ms el f , W o
rm? wqfi ’’
e
c .

§ 54 0 . W is n o t s ub sti tu ted fo r th e person al pronoun s

th ou g h they may r efer to th e su b e ctj if they f orm a p art of
the su bj ect ; th u s, R am a an d h i s wi fe ca me y e ste rday fro m P una,
W arner M am ?
as ( n ot s m rfl arm m m
rre a ma .
 54 5 P R O N OUN S . 29 5

If m was p ut for t ar , -
fl it w oul d m ean n ot R ama s w i fe but
’

that of t he pe rs o n s peak i n g . Bu t rm 3 111 151 m W 35TH

W W ET R am a tak i ng h i s wi fe w i th h i m cam e
y e s terd a
y
fro m P una i s um?m ay
) “
co rre c t ; l
s 53 71 fo rm s a di s ti n ct clau se

by i ts e l f, i n whi ch th e pro no u n i s j o i ne d to th e j
ob ect .

54 1 . W hen th e pe rso nal

p ron o u ns do n ot re fer to th e s ub

j ce t , t h ey cann o t be s ubs ti tu ted by 81 m I w i ll g o to h i s

vi ll a e
g , a?W st if f i
art s t ; y o u S h ou l d n o t tak e my book ,
1
ari i g m i ts? ai r . B ut y ou w en t t o y ou r own vi l lag e
”

wo u l d be no t a n ) ifi
'
t rz
"
m .

54 2 T he
. re du pli cati ve fo r m armat wm each hi s o wn , i s di s
fiw ?gsaéi ; i tem SITE ? th ey cam e , each bri ng i ng
' ’

tri bu t i ve as

hi s own book s Ga
-
l a a n s wer?greet emfears; all li k e the i r o wn

doi n g s .

T he for m arm or w am on s t
g ( o u r-yo u r ill
th ei r ) s el ves i s u sed to expr e s s m u tu al relati o n gaff m
, in
" -
i f? can yo u di vi de i t am ong y ou rs el ves ; ar srrtmi a vi i e s: th ey
' ‘
'
“

q u ar rel led am on g th em s el ves ,

54 4 . W may be s ubs ti tuted for 3 11 1 3 ? i n th e fo ll ow i n g

S pe ci al sen ses

lA person m ay s peak o f h i ms el f i n a s tyl e o f di g ni ty ,

() . .

and the n u se e i th e r st a ff o r swi

m i n th e p lu ral n u mbe r for hi m
self srr
; qw srfi G ri m
? o ur hon ou r or ma j est
y th i nk s so .

( )
2 I t may be s ubsti tu ted fo r e mi t w e , i n th e se nse of

I tog e th er wi th w G WEN fi fl 6 3 ? at an ? we
“
”
o th ers a
st r t 1

y o u an d I Sh all do th e wh ole day whate ver we li k e st n orr

-
fi tsi a stra W '
ar mo
r 11i
3 w e fo ur ar e i
“
-
n vi te d t o da t
y o

di nner .

A p erson , wh en s peak i ng modes t ly to anoth er of hi s

’

( )
3
i nte nti o n or abi li ty to do a ce rtai n t hi ng , m ay u s e arm fo r i f
I , i n th e se n s e o fg i vi n g th u s theI p e an d
r s o n y ou —

addressed th e l e a re of feel i n th at th e m atte r u n de r c o u s i

p s u g
derati on cann o t be p erfor med wi th out h i s assi stan ce : srrq q
W
”
I (li all u an d I ) wi ll co n si der
'

W t “
it
'

as t: er y y o .

W may be su bsti t u te d for gas? when a p erson i s

54 5 .

addressed most respectfully ; 81W "!w ar w e R t 3 11 ?

1 m
29 6 P R O N O UN S . I: 54 6

I f y o u r ho no u r wi ll or der m e , I s h al l bri ng an d show i t to y o u .

W hen S
p eaki ng co urte o u sly to a
g e n tle m an armor i s al way s

u se d, u nl e s s th e h o no ri fi c p h ras es “ w ri t ,
etc . , a re u se d .

( S e ct .

54 6 W - . m ay be s u bs ti tu te dfor th e thi r d perso nal p ro nou n ,

i n th e sen se o f th ey wh en s pe ak i ng o f an abse n t pers o n i n a
r eve r e n ti a l s ty le ;W W a 55 6
”

I s hal l do w hat h i s
H i g h n ess or H o no u r w i ll o rder .

54 7 m is e r ron e o u sly u se d fo r st-

rqq; fi m m (f
‘
.
t o r

W )W 3 1r d?(Ti t I have co me to s ee y o ur H on o u r .

54 8 .
u
str m i s u se d ofte n as an e x le ti ve ; t
p fiW WW '

3 3 851
”

df m M 611 3 31 5?I j us t
g ot u
p f ro m here an d we n t
s tra i h t t h i h ou se
g o s .

N ata — T he H i ndusthani p ron omi nal form 01W self, i s so meti mes
used amt i t r ? ll w l l i f l f b w l l I t i h w v
'
l 3
g fl 3
'

r t 1 a ar e e se e e s ,
o e e r , .

ofte n u sed i n com oun ds i n t he sense of ou r W b

’
n s own y
p ,
o e

m gq fi wn wi ll W ’
’
o ne s own han d fi f h i wi lful pranks
'
o s o

-1 (q-
q afi volu ntari ly ; o f on e s s elf
,
’
.

N ote .
-T he fo rmati ons an tl er a -
rm r and arm 1 11 W o ar e adverbi al ,

and denote acco rd of i tsel f é W ei r“ ! fi qfi i i t

“

of on e s

mar i t w m !armfi m rfi
‘
f
’

out of i tsel f sta f arl tt

‘
g o t o =r a ar

m G a ff at last before any o ne call ed ou t to them, th ey of t he m

sel ves , go t up q u i te exci ted .

N e ta —
31W is anoth er adverbi al for m h avi ng the same sense

a m m 5 3 8 I t w i l l get loose o f i tsel f s ontaneou s l

, p y . T h e i de a of

s
po nta nei ty i s expressed, al so
,
byj oi n i ng th e l
p pu erfect p arti c i ple W
to s m t ; i f?3 1 t
u
‘
si ta r h e came of hi s o wn accord I t may .

mean also ersonal l .

p y

3 . T he R elati ve P r onou n .

54 9 T h e . rel ati ve is u s ed to i ntro du ce an at tr i buti ve cl ause

w h i ch de scri bes o r e x l ai n s
p the n o un , call e d i ts an te cede nt

m su m fi r
-
maira?Fi fi ‘ i
afi sta rrw St ri
fi r aga r “ ri f h
ow nu
'

fo rtu nate i s that m an wh o di s obey s hi s pare nts T H E A N I Ec n .

' '

D EN T I s J OI N ED T O T H E R E LA T I VE , AS IN TH E V
A BO E E XA M PL E

a
g
ent m an , i s j oi n ed to fi r who , i n 313 8 2: the man wh o , li teral ly
who man
”
.
 5 54 J P R O N O UN S . 29 9

th at was g i lt, that w as but recen tly made,

c h ar i o t and whi ch
c os t m e two th o usan d r u pee s I n thi s s e nten ce th e n o un m is
f o l lo wed fi rs t by a p re po s i ti onal attr i bu ti ve phras e, n ext by a

p a rt i c i al o n e , an d lastl
p b
y y a relati ve c lau s e A g ai n , ra . m
a mi , G a
farcfi
r ne ! m , mm
t? m m u, m m
‘
l
‘
nH r h o w u s t a n djco n te n te d h e w a s i n hi s d i s
pos i ti on , w h o se

v al o u r was l i k e th e val o ur o f a l i on , a n d m e ek n ess li k e that o f

th e l a m b T hi s i s a m ost pe cu li ar constru cti on , an d th e re

l at i ve clau s e is m os t el eg an tly u s e d .

fi f mfl m w wfi fi at « rm
F
’

r flt a 11

M orop an t .

N a
at — W h en the relati ve clau se does not e xpress th e sense o f an

a o si ti onal or attr i bu ti ve clau se, i t sho u l d neve r be u sed afte r a co m

pp
l t se nten ce co ntai ni n t h a nte cedent . T he relati ve cl au se is so m e
p e e
g e

t i m es u se d i n En g li sh i n th i s way , bu t even i n that l ang uage th e rela

t i ve h as, th en , t he force of a conj u ncti on , and i s eq u i v ale n t t o and

wh o
”
I n t ran s lati ng th e con u ncti o nal relati ve, t he M arath i dem on
.
j
fi t i s s u bsti t u ted for the rel ati ve pronoun
s tr a ti ve . T h e re was a
y ou n
g
w o man t here watch i ng the fi eld, who s ai d, &c ; Ri .
m N a(Eff M
'

ma s m fl tt ? s m ast
’

W t ( t il ) n
"

a a u o a ; a e i t “ e

m w
.

{a ?(no t a t) awflq
t} c
a?
“
i W ?
n e“ h er m o th e r returned

h o me and sh e i nq
u i red wh ere D ur a w as ; i fi i
'

, g c an n er fl t Ear gi n
r
"
z fl first?“ the re was a cave the re, i n whi ch I slep t.

55 3 . THE R EL A T I V E A GR E ES W I T H T H E A N T EC E D EN T I N G EN

DE R A N D N UM B E R : i tw m if“ ? W w h ate ver

in j ur
y was to be s us tai ne d h as bee n borne ; a?fil m W
3 11 3 1 ri tt en (i t w m m: af t h
w ow m i serabl e is that man who
di so bey s hi s paren ts .

5 54 . W H EN T H E R EL A T I VE
V ER A L noun s
I s FOLLOW E D B Y SE ,

IT , LI K E T H E A DJ EC T I V E A G R EES W I T H T H E n o un N EA R ES T I T : m
,

u -
m s si m i an m I n ga am m wwfi fit m that
, , ,

wh i ch i s u sef u l i n i m parti ng k n o w le dg e, as , fo r exam p le , th e

S cri p tu re s , a le tter, a m e s se ng er , a
g u i de , &c , i s . called a n ey e .

So me ti me s, h owe ve r, the relati ve may ag ree wi th the last

word i n t he sentence , parti cu larly i f i t be th e pri nci pal o ne
 3 00 P R ONOUN S . 55 5

n eg lecti n g th e wo rds m u ; f qmfi , am

i t n eares t it: e q'

m
a n QT ? 3 M t! a g ob l e t, c u
p , a nd o th e r s mall d ri n ki n
g ve s s e l s

are cal led upup é tra T he pri n ci pal wo rd s tan ds, as i t we re, i n
.

o ppos i ti o n to all th e othe r an teceden ts , i n th e way i n whi ch

t he demo ns trati ve 3 1 thi s, an "s uch , & c , are u sed
. 56 6 ) .

‘
555 T he rel ati ve m ay be o pti on ally o mi tt ed :I n? i ah sni f f
.

3 s?
'

Perr y? sm atte rf?a? 1mm "

?fi g s w ri t: I w i l l tak e o u t w ha t
e ve r ol d d resses I may ha ve g o t i n my bo x ;
g a i n? fi m t i
r m
q q y
"
fi fr fi i Qi fi ch i ldre n sh o ul d ui e tl i o what t h ei r e l de r s
’

a z l t t
'
' s e n

t e ll t he m . In co nve rsati o n t h e r e lati ve i s ofte n drop ped .

55 6 . T he e mph ati c s e ns e of t he rel ati ve is ex

p re s se d by
ti ng afi m
"
eati n g i t, by u ni fi wi th i t : 517 i f? u n?i f?i n? {i t a?
t
“

r ep or

or fit i } fi
an trm i ;
s ; w hate ve r t h i n
g s h e a s k e d w e
g ave h e r

sh eta
-
o
ft fa na
u 3 1 7 8 ff! h e t h a t b el i e v e s sh a l l be save d T hi s .

e m phati c s e ns e m ay al so be ex
p re ss e d by th e o m i s si on of th e
a n te ceden t n o un : s 8 h 3
3 1 11 7
"
5 31 m
a 3h fi
"

fi fii
a
’
err ? whatsoe ve r
is in j u ri o u s h as al on e been forbi dde n u s.

4 . T he Demonstra ti ve P ronou ns .

55 7 . T he demons tra ti ve p ro no uns are a th i s , fi

E th at ,
'

st ar

s u ch, et c .

T h e prono u n g r thi s de n ote s s o m e thi ng that i s (1 )

55 8 .

p resent, or nea r i n p lace o r ti me, or (2) s o m ethi ng u s t m e n t i on j

e d, o r 3
() th at i s j u st abo u t to be m enti on e d ; a ri a? W i
m 3 3 8 3 ? E 353 6 m
wh en th ey h ear d thi s th ey wer e con
fo unded ; w ta3 mari a arr as?a t W ar m a amm w e were?
at a} W {Tam m but bear thi s i n mi n d that i f th e m aster of
t h e h ou se had k n o wn i t befo reh and, h e woul d n ot h ave k ept
sl eep i ng .

g 5 5 9 T he p ronoun a?th at u suall y refers to a p erson or

.

thi n g pr evi ous ly menti oned ; mfi fl 3

‘
W TIT ! m W m “

a m when they h eard th at th ey wer e very ang ry a t R amr

W i i ?i f ! m h e g o t bette r fr o m th at ti me .

B ut i t i s ch i e fly u sed
i n opp osi ti on to 3 1 thi s, or by way o f
di sti n ct i on , and i n such cases, 3 1 t hi s eneral l f t t h at
g y r e e rs o

whi ch i s n e arer, and i i?th at to what i s m ore re mote ; ST W ,

3 02 P rt orzo nxs . 56 3

befo re the con g r eg ati o n ) T ak e thi s n e u t . si n g . and ea t

reme m bra n ce of th e L o rd
”
it in .

56 3 . B ut i n a
p i li k e thi s m a y
r n te d n arrati ve , a s e nt en ce
-
o ccu r ; W i
t ra t ta n? m was sl can H a rare :the n
ti s a
’

rs?ar f
,

he poi nted to the chai r an d s ai d, T ak e th i s (fe m ) fo r yo u t o .

s i t on . For , i n a n ar rati ve bo th t he n o un an d t he de m on s
t rati ve a re u ttere d at o n ce by th e reader .

56 4 . T he de mon s tr ati ve 3 1 m s u ch e x pr e s s e s k i n d ; an"

amfi i ’
what sh a l l we do w i th s u ch (wo m e n
) ?

56 5 . T he De mon s tr ati ves fol lo w th e R u les of C o n cordan ce

g i ven u n de r the attri bu ti ve Ad j e cti ve s .
(Se c t .

de m on s trati ve s an d o fte n used

§ 56 6 . T he QT SR " are
a pp os i ti on a lly, an d se rve th e fo l lo wi n g u s es z

1 .
g r t h i s, i s o fte n u se d in a
ppo si ti o n to th e s u b e c t, j wh e n
th e n o m i n al p re di cate de fi ne s or ex l ai n s
p th e lat ter : rm 3 !
‘
W m star R em e was th e s o n of Gopal rav g ?
ar i
W SITE B om bay Is a c i ty .

2 gr an d am are us ually i n s e rted i n

. ap
p osi ti on wh en t h e
ve rb h as t wo o r m o re s u b e c ts ( FIT W j ' fifi fl i
' '
at?! m
fi éfi b th R am a‘
d G i daw t t i h t i t n m m
“

o a n ov n e n s s s (ra
o e e g
W Q W 3 11 i?fl?
fi fim w f u rth er o n I m e t tw o
p e rson s ,

a n o ld m an an d a
g i rl . Or t hey m ay be u sed wh e n th e s ubj ec t
is co mpos e d of t wo or m o re wo rds : rfi fi smé r $ 3 1135 a?
3

Govi n d S astri L ele h ad co me .

N ote .
—
a mr e xpresses k i nd or sort, an d 1
3 p oi n ts ou t i nd i vi d uali t
y .

W h en the dem onstrat i ve use d in apposi ti o n i s follo wed b

y an o th er

n ou n, it a
g ree s wi t h t he l atter gr fi r m 31 m “ (i f i f?!
m
.

m (Ti t that p m
the h ap i ness wh i ch we ob tai n at last from
th e wo rshi p o f Go d that alone 1 5 salvati on am .
m m mast , g

3 . T he app os i ti o n al t r i s i n fl e cte d i ns tead o f the n ou ns for

whi ch i t stan ds W ll ? “ If a “! ?
a i r: fll l T W
‘ ‘
i
“

E ’

v t
, g e g ra s s o

t he el e
p han ts ,
h orse s , an d oxen (TNT, Wm m m afi
m an ?Sak hi i s cle ve rer t h an R ama, H é ri , an d Gopal .
 56 8 P aononn s . 3 03

4 .
g r i s i n se r t e d i n appo si ti o n wh e n an ad e c ti ve
j is p re di
‘
cate d o f two or m ore n o u ns anti fi
z i i i i ! fi fitfi éhfi h i s
l
head an d beak w ere larg e , “ i ft, stu f f “ I !arm? 8" fi rm “ QT
f“

U
q m ra Gavri , M ath u raan d K55 1 m e ve ry w i se .

5 .
(T o r an " i s al s o u sed , in a
pp osi ti on, wh e n a se n te n ce ,

u sed a s t he su bj e ct o r o b ec t j o f t h e \ e rb, i s p lace d be fo re I t

{l eft as g ar t au a un ti e as ,
s wf
it ?me at mm chi ld, tak e
a
t h i s , I h a ve g i ve n it t
o y o u fo r bre a k fas t so sa i n
y g, he
wal k ed a way m
M S IT Em We
? 1W
3 “ If E fi
é 3 3 3?

affi n i fll fi
'
‘
, 3 W m Fif i ? how can y ou sa
y t hat
th e m o th e r of t ha t w o m an i s n o t a b ar , or th a t t he g i rl has

no t t o l d a fal s e ho o d m qm n
‘
fi swu ng? F
,
arm i i !"
3 5 ‘
ltar
a m a
t m 873 i t fit m a fia mt?he do e s n o t co u si
de r t h a t so m e are o bli g e d to be g by o ld a
g e , s i ck ne ss o r mi s
fo r tu n e .

56 7 . T h e de mon s trati ve u se d a
pp o s i ti o n a lly to n o u ns

ag re e s w i t h th os e n o u ns i n g e n de r an d
i n? o n ly th e ox en an d th e b uffa lo e s we r e th ere . W h ere
th e di ff e r i n g e nde r, the de m o n s t rati ve i s u s e d i n th e
n o un s

ne u te r l u ral ; wfi sm lé ER , u fi ?
‘
t
- m
’

fl a fi
‘’
rs an a
“

p , t, ! ru e a
gs e r s r
he s o ld o ff hi s hou se , carri ag e , h o rse , and
g arde n . I f t he a
ppo

de m o n s t ra ti ve i s fol lo we d by a n o un , i t ag ree s wi th
s i ti o n al

tha t n o u n , a n d n o t w i th t ho s e whi ch p re ce de i t W i ff a r 3 a8i -

‘

sm e ar ri h t , aw n m m ? m
“

g ; au r a t ?a u ? fi rs t a t t hat

t i me the t k w 1 t h t he m s u ch we apo n s as m u sk e ts, s wo rds

y o o

an d s h i e lds .

5 68 . T h e demo ns trati ve u se d a p pos i ti o nal ly to a s e n te nc e

is al way s i n th e n e u t e r s i n g ul ar, u nle s s i t be fo ll o we d by a .

n o un , w h en i t ag rees wi th t h at n oun fii i
‘
afi fi fl 3 1 71 8 1 -
6 5 1 7 { fi s tfi
W fi w wm w fi m mfi am? fi re as fi i ra rrs rrai ar
’

. ,

sum wrfi whe re i t s o hap pe n s t ha t a p e rs on e x pe c ts a favo u r

of u s , an d it is no t in o ur w r to co n fe r i t o n h i m , t h er e h e
p e o

i s to bla me , not we . I n ste ad of sl zfi fi re we mi g h t s i mply

'

sa
y 31 5: fi .

A lth o ug h t h e dem on st rati ve m ay be e mploy e d i n a ppo si ti o n

to two or m ore cla use s , i t i s a lway s i n t h e si ng ular nu mber ;
 3 04 enor mo u s. 56 9

i m gar M
does i t be co me y o u th at y o u sho uld lau g h
3
.

at h i m, an d th at when h e teases o u h l d b t h i m l
y y o u s o u e a

56 9 . W h en atte n ti on is re
q ui re d to be di r ec te d to each

cl au s e s eparately , dem onstrati ve a? th at, i n i ts n e uter

th e
s i ng ular fo r m, i s pl ac ed i n app osi ti o n to e ach c l au se , a n d th e

dem ons trati ve n e uter si n

g i th i s ,
i s ular
p l ace d l as t
f
, i n apposi
ti o n to th e wh ol e s e n ten ce col le cti vel , wi th o r wi th o u t a n oun
y
wfi m m w fits w sfi m s M ummi es ! arm
'

fi
“
a ,
e

m s wri t . a
‘'

, t wh om !“ 0 P § H § al l thi s ) di m

Qr
'

m ‘
=rr€t h e bu r n t hi s h ai r w h e n l e t ti n g o ff fi re w o rk s he

b ro k e the loo k i ng -
g la s s t h a t w a s i n t h e
p ar l o u r h e b r o k e th e

c arri ag e di d I no t fo rg i ve h i m al l t he s e fau l ts

570 . T h e de m on s tra ti ve i f?i s

y us u al l s u bs ti tu te d for the
th i rd pe rson bu t w h en t wo pe rson s are m e ti on ed , gr i s u s ed
fo r th e n ea re r, an d éfi fo r th e mo re di s tant T hu s t he En g li sh
‘ '

mai n , wo u ld be
”
s e nt e nce ,
“
l et hi m g o , an d l e t thi s m an re

re nde re d E B fi ri r, gr (T i t . I n li k e m ann er, let hi m g o , and

that m an s ta
y, wo u ld b e QT wri t i t 17 31, .

A s r e g a r ds the r ul e s o n the e m pl oy me n t o f th e de m o n stra

t i ve FR t h at, r
as a co rel at i ve, s ee th e R el ati ve Pro no un (§ 5 5 0

5 . T he I n ter r oga ti ve P ron oun .

57l T h e i n ter rog at i ve afi vr r e fe rs both to and

'
e rs on s
.
p
thi n g s , bu t ch i e fly t o the fo rm e r g aff a" ?W e“ ? et
g } who i s
m o th er , ch i l d fi r rrar swwq th at 1 ag ai ns t
? wh om has
’
ur a v
y o

he co mmi tte d an o fl en ce
g e t?g r afi l
i m '

ai
'

m fai rer afit vr 3

‘

j
wh at i s y o u r o b ec t i n e ng ag i ng i n th i s b u s i nes s
W h e n th e ag e n t s u n k n o wn , t h e i nt errog ati ve
. firw i s
a
‘
u sed

wi t h th e n eu ter s i n
g l u ar ve r b sf i t ! grewqfifi
" eh , who i s
call i n g o u t to me
5 72 . T h e fo r m f rfl rfl r o r affromr i s e m ploy e d wh e n i n q
u i ry
'

re fe rs t o o ne o f a clas s of o b ec ts : 1m W 3 1
53 3 3 Wj i
-
w hi c h w i l l y o u t ak e o f th es e man g o e s ash a rr Hafi
‘ ‘

gm ( i fi e
r
wh i c h boy t o ld y o u th i s s to ry gaf fer m m
w i ll i whi c h of th es e h o rse s do you wa n t
3 06 raononns . 578

T he sen se o f deg ree i s be s t ex

p re ssed by faflfl
'
tr
i w h fi sf;
m
and du ll i s t he
fiv wfi m wfi m fwfl
u nde rs tan di n f m e n,
u v v ww fi W h o

a nd h o w s cant
w p
a
oo

n
r

d
g o y
i mperfect t hei r k n o wle dg e 1 axi s? ni t
“
Efi ffl m fifi fi W
m an h o w s trong do so me O pi n i o ns a
p p ea r to s o me
p eo
pl e

6 . T he I ndefi ni te P ronoun .

5 78 . afi w as an i nde fi n i te p ron oun s i g ni fi e s s o me o ne 5

a re?aftw wa r 3 113 s o me o ne h as co me do wns tai rs . W h e n th e
is q u i te u n k no wn, th e fo rm fi n er; i s u s ed
3 8 1 3 ?
t
”

p e rso n

m ar H rfiffii l 3 11i
‘‘
so me o ne, I do n ot k n o w wh o, i s c al li ng o u t to

afr fi h as the se ns e o f any o n e fi fi fi W ai m

'
v l
y ou . rS Gl '

te ll me wh en an
y o ne co m es . an !Q ar
.
" ‘ ’

expres ses s o m e p arti e n

lar pe rso n or s i n ul ar an d
g p lthi ng , bo th
u ral 31W 31W i
( f
i f !Q EE W3 3 3 EM F Sui ? to d ay so me p eo ple are g oi ng to
“ co m e
' “

t o o u r h o u se ; GEM Q flf fi sfi q3 8 23 : so m e o ne h as s ai d
'
’
so a.

certai n man h as s ai d s o .

N ata T h e form afi fl r (gal: has t he form of th e E ngl i sh i n defi n i t e

—

arti cle, a n d the i n defi ni te h rase h i ch i s of te n e mploy ed

”
a cer ta i n, w
p
i n th at lang uag e i n co m me nci ng a sto ry arrvr q
‘
éh fl fi fi i fi
'
' '

m
83 6 2:
{ far there was a ce rtai n m an of th e name of M aloj i . T he i a
defi ni te n u meral qr; h as th e
a same sense (gar; sq
fir Q fi fi fi arsfi W t
fi fl éh fi fi at th ere w as a certai n m an of the name o f S ant éj i
' '
F v e ry o
p o r
‘
a re i f?“ n
a ? shi re grgo ears q% a mt? fi é
r r m assi fm 1 at a

c ertai n ti m e o r on a oertam o ccasi on, h e fel t ve r anxi o u s as t o h ow

y
h e m i g h t feed t hem q may
”
an also m ean “
s o me o n e,
u
'

. an y o ne

Q afl 3 3 11 551 or ( EM T§ W a f Sharer call so me doctor, an may

' ' '
u
y y o

fi nd .

N ol a —
T h e M arath i h as th e force of the Engli sh arti cle i nh e
no u n

rent i n i t, and th e con text det er mi nes whether i t i s defi ni te o r i n de

fi ni te ; mfi Il
'

i a w ar i f
’

at las t we ha ve co me to a town , or at last

we h ave come whi h w h ave been l ooki ng forwar d to)
to th e to wn ( c e

i r an:
a wa rm i t m u st be a t i g er at mm 3 7 6 arra r see, h ere t he

o x co mes .

5 79 . affi rm as an i n defi ni te pron oun an swers to the qu es

ti o n pu t wi th th e i n te rro g t ve fim r?f r m? a rm whi ch o n e

a i a o

s h al l I ta k e A ns wer, W ri t fi '
tak e a ny y o u
p le as e .
 58 1 9 3 0 11 0 0 11 3 . 3 07

5 80 .
m as an i n de fi ni te pron ou n si
g ni fi 0
,‘
n
th at whi ch,

a ft?s ome , expre ss e s a fe w o r a li ttl e : sw -

" i -
i gI amh r
-
,

31 ? m i ? s ome peop le thi n k so ; rah 3 3 3? a s; 551 3? q r fl i f}?

o

there was s om e oi l a nd s o me wate r i n i t .

a m has a
parti ti ve s en se wi l l? m W t W W fl
'

I
W W a
(r m?he an d hi s daug hte r ate s o me o f t he fi g s an d
dri ed l an t ai n s fro m i t I t ex al so , s o meth i n m
p .
p re s ses,
g o re

or le ss, n o t noth i ng a uras W I, m W w (GIT do n ot g o

wi th o u t tak i n g any foo d ; e at s o m e thi ng m ore or l es s W i th.

the n e g a ti ve p arti c le it si
g ni fi e s n ot a t a ll : 3 857 ari a
? W
art?y o u sh all n ot have any thi n g at al l .

It is u se d wh e n any matter or bu si ness i s S pok en of i ndefi

ni te l i qq fi ni f f w ? I h t k t m
‘
y g g r s
t av e o S a an u
p e o
y o s o e

thi n g . Us ed adver bi ally i t e xpre sses an i nde fi n i te deg ree

c
{ w g ri st 55 73?W arr ? t h e h a
pp i n e s s o bt a i n e d fr o m
the p o ssess i o n of Go d i s som et hi n g i ndes cri bably won de rf ul .

T h e ph rase a
fi ifi
’

artF f -i g s ni fi es by s o me means or o th er

3 mm $ 6 ? F ri ll urn g ? yo u
la re m u s t by s o me m ean s or

othe r s u l m wan t
pp y y .

T h e pro n o u n c o m bi n e d wi th Q afi me an s s o me fe w p e r
' '

sons o r th i n s
g W .
mm wfi wfi a afl W E H m fQW ri m
m qfi
'

u a t h e re are s o me
'

p eo
pl e of s u ch a n a tu re th at th ey
mu s t ch e w tobacco th e wh ole day . W i th th e ne
g a ti ve
p ar ti cl e

i t den o te s , n ot e ve n o n e , n o th i n g at all ; har m ?ar a?Q w 11 ?

i a 2
'

W w fl Tfi
’
th e P e n dh a1 i s di d do t le ave a si n
g l e ve s s el in
m a
’
the h o u se ; i i éi QT Hr I sh a n t i
‘
Eli g v
'

f e u
g y o

an th i n at all .
y g
‘
fi fi
’

é
'

wh e n r e d li t d h d i t i b t i f a h f i fi
'

E
'

c a e as a s r u v e o r c e : r
u
p
at? 17 23 ; 57 6 ?arts? 11 5
3 5 3 2 s o m e fi e l d s h e r e an d t he re a r e
g o o d
at Efi i él Efi i él W ?affi x
so me h er e a n d th e re a re bad i f
fi
' ' ' ' ‘

-
arté?SW? mat? th i s p i c tu re i s g o o d m so m e p ar ts , i n o th e rs
it is very bad .
3 08 T H E c as e s .
§ 5 82

R edupli cated wi th “ a :
it e xpresses som e li ttle de g ree : x i i i
“

I N ?T 5 W , W W m 3 11 3 I have purch ased so m e

li ttle j a g ri , s o m e l i ttl e m ore i s y e t to be boug ht ; a fiw W
as soon as I took th e me di ci ne , s o me l i t tl e
efi e ct beg an to sh o w i tself .

5 82 . Be si des th e se nses o f 11x o ne

g i ven u nder secti on 57 8,
i t has th e follo wi ng
l . T he nu meral Ex i s u s e d i n defi ni tely i i i ?q
x m m
frat s o m e on e p erson was s tandi n
g t h ere .

2 It. e x resses
p th e s e n se of o ne p arti cul arl
y p or re

e m i n en tly fi r 12x ’
fit an u n ri vall ed h ero be ; i t { x fi x an

ar ran t scam p he .

3 . I t m ay den o te e xcess o r conti n uo usness ; qx

M , th ere was a ceas eles s wai l g oi n g on .

4 .I t may mean o ne, al i k e or i denti cal ; st ra i q

t x w e

a re both o n e an d the sam e .

5 I t m ay
. den ote o th er, n o t the sam e 1 aw’
S E K,
E i f Q3 ?
th i s an d that are di ff e re n t m edi ci n es .

6 . I t m ay m ean o ne
,
u nchan
g eable
g i
f flt
t z
‘
,
gfi m (17 5

smfi '

y o u are g reat , a nd
y o u r word o ug h t n e ve r to ch an
g e.

C H A P T ER .
X X VI I .

T H E USE S O F T H E C A S ES .

1 . T H E N OM I N A T I V E C A S E .

-
ar i swar o r
a m .

4 53 4 64 .

5 83 . T he N o mi nati ve i s the ca se o f th e j
s u b e ct w he n the
verb tak es t he K a r tari c on s t ru c ti on 21 0 mm W ans ,

3 1 13 1 an ? yym o un g e r br o t h e r h a s c o m e I t i s al s o t h e cas e of .

th e n o m i nal predi cate In

g m a r arr 331 68 5? fi x t h e fath e r o f
wrr Wa ?G W EN? W M yo u
g

t hi s boy was a w eave r ; i ar e a ve r

y
h o n e s t w o m an .
3 1 4) wa s oase s . 58 7

t i o ns bes i de s that of i ns t ru men tal i ty . T he fol lowi n g are a fe w

of t hem

2 . T he agen t, or the j
s ub ec t o f th e ver b ; fi at W W i fl
‘

W fl i fil fl a
’

s he tol d m e th at sh e wo ul d ?soon co m e m
W W W W i fi
n zn
‘
W affl e an? Go d has se n t

u s on earth to hel p o ne a no th e r .

«u ni t 33 i n f
r a was fi ts fi M or 0
p
. a l zt =r — .

a -
t m as first as W e?ai m fi r
-
m rfi M oropa nt .
—
.
,

N ata —
T he j
su b ect is al wavs i n the i n stru m e ntal case in certa i n

i nstances .

3 T he op er a ti ng cau se or power : m
. a a rr m fih F -
igr
’

M an t a d i e d from th at very di sg race , Sfi fl r “ ri ft «raft m aft

t? m fi
l
l? gi m e { w e 3 1 ? W m
E STIR ?at i
r a I a m n o w co n

vi nce d th at th ey belo ng to so m e res

p e c ta ble fa mi ly , an d ha v e
been re du ce d t o th i s s ta te by po ver ty .

ai mifi as s ww gfi n M a
as i w w —
R am da s .

4 . M ann er : W flfi fi fi w fiw m m m fi
they re cei ve d th e m w i th g reat affe ct i o n a nd m eek n e ss .

W 5 =I
’

m fi WW W .
— M or o
p a n t.

5 T he a ccomp a nyi ng ci rcu msta nce W W

. HRT W R UT H ?
Fi fi fi fl ’

m we a r a t th at ti me S hi véj i attack e d th e
M ah o m e dan s w i th twelve t h o u san d h orsem e n W fter a t
a

M ai ? fi lt m M ah o m e d p en etrate d i n to t he P an j ab

w i th twe n ty th o usand h o rs e . T he i n s tru m e n ta l te r m i nati o n

o fte n a s s u m es th e fo r m of hit , as i n the l as t e x a m p le , to
e xp re s s th i s s en s e ;W WW W aiv er; qri a W S? Hi , w e
sh o ul d n o t g o i n to th e k i tch e n wi th o u r cl o th e s o n , — li t , wi th .

scarf a n d tu rban ut on
ou r p .

6 . T he con te n ts o f a th i ng : 31337 ? 3 2W“ ! W ? “N W N

EEGT 617 e “ Tr!fil
“
m i fi r (T EEN 355 W onl
y th e re h e t oo k
o ut th ep fi l
s cr i
l e d w i t h m o/za r a s , w h i ch h e h ad ti e d rou n d hi s
w ai s t, a n d e m pt i e d i t b e fo r e Davl atr i v
‘
.

7 . A r
ef ere nce , i . e .
, it is j oi n e d to n ouns, j
ad e cti ve s, or

ve rb s , t o p oi n t ou t in f
r e er en ce to w ha t t hey a re to be u nder s tood:

“ ems?W TW eft wr first

a 3 Tl 5
f7 i nt ra state as w
 587 TH E CA SES . 311

i fi l h i’
s m oth er w a s n o t h e a l th y i n bo d y , b u t s h e w as b ea u ti fu l
a n d c le ver i n h o u se wi fe r
y m r m 7 5 1 175 W 5 i fi? th d ”

t a 3 e e e r

w as bli n d o f on e e y e .

m mm fl ffi
'

( ri as
a sta ffm was firs t h e n — T u it ér dm .

8 Sp ace, p roxi mi ty, (fi

.
re .

( )
a N ea r to, i n m oti on l flW
‘
fif fii I w as
q u i et

l y g oi n g al o n t h e road .
g
mtt frarm fi w ar I fagarr W
u it am .
— -
T u kd; i m ( .

()
b C l os e to : fifi tar
t ar m t fi ufi fi ' ' '

s he h el d h i m to h er bos o m ;
FIT ar a i i i ? 3 3? R E
i “ B E ?
" {ti ff th e re we re th o rny

t r ees al on g bo th s i de s o f th e r oad by whi ch he we n t .

() 0 M oti on f rom s
o
me? i t W arm as: I w e n t fro m P oo na

t o S atara .

N ofa —
W hen th e 3 h as an abl ati ve force eq
u i val ent t o from,
as i n th e last i nstan ce, i t i s al ways wri tten wi th o u t th e an uswar .

9 . I n tercou rs e, opposi ti on, §

‘
c . t art fi ? l m? m 3 751} h e
f o u g h t wi th hi m W i tt w , w W i t 3 3 35
3 3 3 “ th o s e wh o do not behave t o wards o th e r s wi th g en tlen es s
and h on o u r , a re base .

mm Pa w W a mm rtfi m ' — T uk é r é m .

10 . P u rpose emf? st raw s m ut i t}? f or our

b e n efi t y o u m u s t o f n e ces s i ty g o .

i f? m T i me m m: wr rW h e d i ed i n t wo h ours fl

w t h t ri er I T t BTW W i M u kteswa r
i t i ’
i — r .

12 Di r ecti o n a u thori ty mt fi q
.
m § e m fi a mfi fi t w as
,

fl fi fi ft m th e n Sak hi r e mai ne d th ere t o wai t o n M a n i

‘

w i t h t he p e rmi s s i o n o f B h i m ébé i W W W fi fi r W ad! h e

r

w as co n vi c ted by l aw ; m u a
n { fl t i n hi s si
g h t .

13 C om p a ri son : W a fi m éfi fi w fl W W W
m
.

s
"
h r
? t
i m 3
3 13 317
13 a
tr ffi he co m pare s hi s ow n co n di ti on

w i th t h at of th e o th e r
p e r s o n , an d fan cy i n g th at h e i s so me
g r eat m an s wel ls wi th p ri de .

14 . T he measure f
o excess or i nferi ori ty i n c om pari s on a?
i f?!W hfi fir?!he is o l der by two y ears .
3 12 ms C A sss . 5 88

15 . R ate
f o i n m eas u re men t an d
quan ti t
y l ifi l lfi
’ ‘
m ,

w ‘
fi i h wri t he 8 9 118 by s eers, no t by p ap a li a (b u sh e l s) .

O bs .
— T he Eng l i sh stude nt sh o ul d no ti ce th e prep os i ti o ns wh i c h
e xpress the di fferent se ns es o f the i nstru m e ntal and all the o t h e r
fol lo wi ng cases . T he se nses of t h e M aréth i i nstru m ental are expres s e d

wi t h ,
” ” ”
the pre pos i ti ons by, ”
i n En li sh by ai nst, i n,
“ “ “ “
a
g ac
g "
M a ri th i i d i o
”
c o rdi n al ong , &c No o ne wh o w ou ld s peak
“
g to,
.

Uses of the C ases

”
mati cally s houl d negl ect t he ch apte rs on th e
“
c
.

4 . T H E Da rrvn C a s s .

m or H ai ti

T he dat i ve p ri mari ly de no te s th e p ers on or thi n g

588 .

r emo te l conn ected wi th a n a cti on a s i ts obj t t m l i l l

y ec e y o og ca
y
i t si g ni fi es a gi vi ng , real o r i m ag i nary ; g gra ri G m fi r fi a
‘
t
'
f

al a s at -
fi thi s m u s t be g i ven
p y WW to you as -
o c k e t m on e

s ma r ts gm i r m ? 81 e
‘
a t? s rfaa a “ as Gan pat ré o g i v e s
'
c

m u ch s we e tm e at to th e y o u ng e r l ads , an d t ak es m u ch fo r h i m
sel f a ls o T he da ti ve o b e ct i s u s ual ly th e i ndi rect o bj ect T h e
. j .

dati ve case has s e ve ral o th e r s e n s e s . It si

g n i fi es

2 T he di r ect obj ec t : Es ri t lflfl lt p ’

rare r ufi é fi th e e l de r Po wzi r
' '
.

h olds hi m t fi
'
fla wai rwfig fii ‘ ‘

, HG ! mar g a r are? fath e r

do e s n otk n o w y ou s o we ll a s I k no w y o u . W he n t he obj e c t
is a
p er s o n, th e dati ve i s u se d as th e di re ct ob e ct j 4 90

3 . T he su b ect
j wi th the p oten ti a l ver b; su m afi r
'

q '

m
w ard?we do wi tho u t wo rk i n g ; M
can n o t W 323 1
arent W t rr€
= r y o u wi ll n ot be able to e at dry bre ad as sh e
'

doe s 4 81 ,
4 T he p erson
. or th i ng to whi ch a n acti o n r e er s , chi e f fly w i th
i n transi ti ve ver bs it 5
?
! 3 5?i ) mi ? a
f? n ?rm m tre at} th e

Ran i be cam e an xi o u s w he n t h e t wo boy s g re w u p W i t

W W y o u a
pp ea r to u s ve r
y d r e a df ul .

T h e follo wi n g are a fe w par ti c ul ars i n di cated by th e dati ve

o
f f
r e erence

( )
a T he p erson or thi ng benefi ted or i nj u red 3 3W m
3 m m in M t th e p ati e n t r ec o v e r e d by th e re m e d i e s that
w e re u se d ; w i t% m t GIF T?
! 53 th e re are a th ou san d
3 14 T H E c s ss s . 5 89

-
b M oti o n to
g m?gi t mu ffs safer fa r mre s mi te oth e r

b oys wo uld be pro m oted an d ri s e to hi g h a

pp o i n tmen ts ti l

i m ffm h e has g one to to wn

’
tr .

7 . T i me

a P oi n t f
o ti me I n co me to -
mo rro w at fo u r .

b T i me i n defi ni tely ma
za (T i ll? i f ?
! m wh ere w e re

yo u last ni
g h t

c Exten t, li mi t, S
(
‘
e
.
m m; W
ar c
m i n i i e sat nri -
i t wi l l ta k e t wo y e ars mo re fo r h i m to re tu rn m i n a?
at ri a i t wa n ts two m i n u te s to t e n .

N o te -T h e dati ve H r i ndi cates t i me defi n i tely,

“

and G i ndefi ni t e ly ,

T he dati ve i n a i s ne ver u se d to i ndi ca te a po i nt ri o d f ti m e,

“
or e
p o

e ti me fii
-
sh i ts r no t fi fth a come exactly
but o nl
y i nd
efi n i l i i t ,
at

o clock .
’
two

5 . T ar A . BL A T I VE C A SE .

(mm frfl fi )
'

or l .

5 89 . l T he a blati ve e xp re ss es th e rel ati on o f abla ti o n ,

i o f ca r ryi ng a wa t ak i n g fi PM (aw
“
e or a wa n "
!
y y
-
. .
,

Wh i t !QT ?! W ET th e fo u r th day T ri mbak s h et retu rne d fr o m t h e

1

vi llag e
i éfl rs fl n
a ? 3 m? fi t?! e a fi gr a m y o u a r e
w
l uck y th at y o u h ave at le as t es ca ed fro m the h an ds of s uch a
p
cru el g i rl .

N ot e T he po st posi ti o ns
.
—
m , qrt fi '
etc .
, ar e su bst i tuted for t h e
dati ve ca se-
endi ngs as mo re c o u rteo us fo rm s M 7 3 74 3
W 3

i i t h en tle man i s m re c o u rteo us th an

m fi ar 3 3 73 3
‘

g ve t o t e g o t ri .

I n Eng l i sh th e sam e i di o m i s s om eti mes used

Y et to th e G e n erals vo i ce t hey so on o be ed
y
—
Al i ne ) “

N 0 te .
— T he ablat i ve te rm i nati o n
3 3 o r m is affi xed ei the r di rectly
to the nou n, or to no uns g overned by ostp osi ti ons;zi m asm
‘

p
( m ai l an?
:
Gopal zi rav came down stai rs ; t i f em? {fi g {ti 3 51 11?
W I am goi ng to hear the whole s tory f ro m hi s li ps (I n? W
Rh ? qfit fi r he cal le d ou t
T he Engli sh fro m i n si de th e h o use .

fro m,
”
- i d b i d ed i n M ara ro m
“ “
g o ve rn n
g an a ve r s re n e r th i b W f
,
y
abo ve m from here m
”
a from i nsi de
;
W '
 590 T H E case s . 315

Note F .
ng? i s generally used i n th e p lace of rd to denote th e
a

a bla ti on , expressed m Eng li sh b

sense o f y the
“
re
p p os i ti on fr om : m

could have s uffere df h i s pranks ,

ro m
m m “

i
atr a al l ? UP "
I !
to say that he wo uld r un away fro m th e teacher . It 18 whe n moti on
f m a p lace i s expressed th at i u su all o i ned to n ouns deno ti ng
ro
{ a s
y j
l
p ce
a or locati o n ; “ H
Q ? W he cam e f rom town . W hen moti on

N ata —
l
( ) P o s tpos i t i ons and adverbs, i n flec ted by [ a or W . when
ex ressi n th e se nse o f l li t h av a lo cati ve, a nd no t ablati ve
p g p ura y, e

force ; m
m a
; m ay R i Rt
’
if
zi fi ré (fi t l i g h ts we re h ung bo th
i nsi de and o u tside t he house ; my h m Hi I " ? m fifi fi e verv
where trees o nl
y we re vi s i ble .

2P os tposi ti on s i nfl ected by am, w he n go verni ng pl u ral n ou ns,

.

conve
y th e l ocati ve s ense ;
3“ cams- ai d? m ai ze e a mq m
wh en the me rchants of Bo mbay brou g ht o nly cotton i n the shi ps ;
m w w as?the bi rds perched on th e trees .

3 T he postposi ti ons, as wel l as adver bs, express the sense of p e g

.

edge or channel , co rrespon di n

g w i th th ro ug h ; 3 117 3 i t c ame
by post T he i nstru mental i i i s also u sed an am? i t g o by the
.

door .

()
2 A n o th e r i m po r tan t m ea n i ng of the fo rm Q3 i s than , an d

i t i s ch i e y fl u s e d as a part i cle o f compa r i son W m m

n m
fi tfi W m m m fi m m m m
i t appears fr o m th e ve ry featur e s of th e g i rl th at sh e i s born to
li ve i n a so m e wh at better co n di ti o n than th i s

6 . T H E G EN I T I V E C A S E .

‘
(W or We l .
)
T he g e ni ti ve case e xpre ss e s conn ecti on general ly, o r
59 0 .

the rela ti on of enu s a nd s eci es between two ob ects ; he n ce the

g p j
geni ti ve is u s u all
y g o ve rne d by a n oun zfl ifl ar mfi m 3!

a m 3 173 ’
at ah f r grey i t
i wri t m if I am i n the sli g h test deg ree
to blam e for i t, the n my con di ti on sh al l be as di s tres sful as
3 18 r ue oas es . 59 1

No et .
— T hc noun , p h ra as i n
s e s i n ?a ,
the abo ve
s s i s no t u su a lly s

m d
o i fi ed be for e ass u m i ng th e g en i t i v e te rm i n at i on 2 11 , wh en i t e X p re s s

h
es t e sen se o f q y m
ua l i t t h o u se h ol d , b u t m of t h e h o us e .

an ad ec ti ve , and th e l ast i s fi l the

‘
T he fi rst i s j a g eni ti ve case ; 1t
5 t

mas ter or owner o f the ho use, and M m i s th e same as qt i azfi

m fi h o useho lders, or l i vi ng i n the h ou se ; an ?! mfi rafters
‘

pers o ns

o f th e ho us e, fo rmmg a
part o f t he h o use, b u t qfi fl a fi h o useh old
rafters, in o r so mewh ere near t he h o use, but not fo rmi ng
p any art o f

the h ouse . So meti m es ano th e r ad ecti ve j mav be deri ved f rom t he sa me

r oo t ; w g o lde n, or -
ti ff{fl ei th er g ol den or
g i l t from éfi g ol d.

It is u su all
y s u ch
p wo rds as e x ress a local relati o n , in so me way or

oth er, th at, li k e the adverbs, d o n ot i nflect the root before tak i n g the

g e ni ti ve m as W ET of body, di e !“ of th e mo nt h,
th e o f the
m
co unt ry, a t !" of th e north , &c ; o the r nou ns te rmi n ati n i n at i nflect
.
g
it ai m work , m ar
t not m ar u seful . T he i n fl ected adverbs
are fi t of abo ve, (El m of bel o w, arm of yes te rda
y , 81 0 .

N ol a T he geni ti ve te rm i nati o n i ndi cates th e ge nde r of the n o un

—

it q
u al i fi es and whe n i t i nflects a th i rd perso nal pro no un , a dem o n

s trati ve o r a rel at ve, i th e ro no m i nal ni t i ve e x resses th e ende r and

p g e p g
nu mber o f the poss esso r, as wel l as o f t he t hi ng posse ssed ear!“ o f
hi m , fi rm fit? , of her, &c .

-T he lo cati ve i n
N ote .
f beco mes ad ecti val
j by the ai d o f the s u ffi x

qr s mfi m i n ternal, of t he mi nd 5 93 , N ot e

9 . C omp leti on, a bu nd an ce m trmfi i '

m “

t m
afi q v '

ay
W fl fl gxffl
’ '

Erma sh o als o n s h o als o f th i s k i n d o f fi sh co me o ut

t he nce e very y e ar i n to t h e M e di te r ran ean S e a ; ni fi h

tr

W m ‘
T fi lfi fi th e wh o le vi l la g e had co me to see

th e fun .

10 A . chan e O
g f s ta te : Qfi m m i rfi a fi ’s
‘ '

r m W
( i n? a o m n be m a r i ch m an , a n d a ri ch m an b e co m es
p o r a c o e s

a
p oor man ; m w g fi 1 fl aqi afi fi rz m w e e m
am an ? t h e t u to r h as t o l d m e t o tran s l a te a San sk ri t
sto ry f ro m th e P anch ata n tra i nto the ve r nac u lar -
to day .

ll . A dap tati on or u se : i f i -
?F rt h i ?a rm th
"

at is a
p lace fo r

bath i n g fi ner W W mai l i g i ve he r al s o s o me weari ng

a ar el .
pp
 5 93 THE C A S ES . 319

59 2 . I n the abo ve i nstan ces we h ave sh o wn the co nnec

ti on i ndi cated by the g e ni ti ve be twe en t wo nou ns I t h as s om e .

ti m e s a referen ce to adj ecti ves , ad ver bs , and ver bs T hu s .

I T he geni ti ve wi th an adjecti ve
.

Wi th a n adj ecti ve to den ote the g rou nd or o bj ect fi rW

W ar ea h e wa s co n vi c te d of i nfan ti ci de .

II . T he gen i ti ve wi t h a n a d ver b

T he p arti ti ve g e ni ti ve i s ch i e y j oi ne d to fl adverbs W 3 773 0:

i gi as }
?do n o t s i t o utsi de th e h o u se .

N ote .
—
T h e pos tposi ti on s are affi xe d to the i nfl ected for m of the
no un, or i ts g eni ti ve case as m m: or am on the ho use .

I II . T he gen i ti ce wi th a verb

1 T he geni ti ve i s s ometi mes u s ed a s both the s ubj ect a nd obj e c t

.

-
the verb 3 m m m ai m sari?3 1 2i arse art e mi t aw rfir 5 17
o
f 1
r n fer m i ! s ti ll
"
aq i t was i n J an us mi n d to
’
i no t ac k n o wle d
g e

th at h i s o pi ni o n wa s wron g "
til ea r
s
?W W I wi l l no t h ea r
what h e m ay say .

N ata — T he nou n 51 m s ay i ng , &c .

, is no do ubt, u nders tood .

N ata —
T he ob e cti ve
j g eni ti ve is chi e fly g o ve rned by the co m o u nd
p
ve rbs , and ex resses
p the j
o b ect o f so me feeli ng ; em 8 851 {TI T swea
r
I was ang ry wi th h i m 3 71 W 3 78 “ t hey di shono ured the
ki ng 296

2 T h e g en i ti ve i s d a d verbi a l l to exp ress t he l

re a ti on o
. u se
y f
ti me : fi r fem fi mi t h e Sl eeps by day .

N ote .
— T he g eni ti ve e xpress es ti me more emp hati cal ly th an the da ti ve

i n a : sit i ts wh en i a a?
at r as ( rah
t e?wrt i
r ts assi s ts are a h e

use d to co me every day i n t he e ven i ng , a nd t hey both wo ul d be

alo n e fo r a lo ng ti m e i n th e n i gh t . I n t hi s se n t e n ce t he a t te nti o n

i s d i re cted to th e ti me of t he i r mee ti ng , w hi le i n th e fol lo wi n t th

g o e

p la ce and not to the ti me i m i f?!378 m , T?

at EF film y o u

were ou t i n the ni g h t, and wher e were you ?

7 . TH E L OC A T I VE .

(m or e mi t ) .

593 . T he L ocati ve C as e ex
p re ss es t he i
r e la t o n o f
p lace

i mi s s" arm? “ 3 3 a mg 651 31 35 i t (the S o u nd ) havi ng

“
3 20 P O ST PO S I T I ON S GOV E R N I N G oas s s . 594

fallen up on thei r ears, they beg an to look o nly i n th at di re c ti o n

- ‘
mart?i fl H elms?wri t fi g ? i ra r for th i s reason h e wen t o u t i n
' '

the m orn i ng .

‘
W m m fi fim ’
ufi m afi h i u

i sm Sui 3 m m m , t ari f f mm m: anti 3 — T uk a ra m .

N ote — T he l o cati ve
. so meti mes tak es t he geni ti ve te rmi nati o n
‘
‘
afs tm qifl 3
’
’
3 ! to i v a m o u thf ul o u t o f o ne s own
’
mo u th
g e .

m m i nfi w m mnfi awfi a r n
’

at fi nnfi t u s

Na a
t — T he i n is an ad ecti v al affi x,
j li ke at i n fife i am
' ’

594 . T h e l o cat i ve e xp re sse s th e fo ll o wi n g o the r re lati o n s

w smf a n } fi ra m w
‘ ’

2 . T he ob
j ect o
f the ver b a n
e arg on

wh e n yo u con vi ct hi m , th e n yo u wi ll p ro ve h i m a li ar .

3 . I ns tru mentali ty i f he ea ts wi th th e m o u th
W m!W h at i s do ne by o nes el f i s w el l don e
fil .

w m ft n a m W rtergs e r n
’

h ? i f T u kdr ém
'

s at a r s t h ri i e — .

é fi flffi wg W t II g m? i lfi fli W’
’ '

7 II — M u ktes war .

m w w .
— M u htes hwar .

4 . P urpos e : W a tt u nfi t 3 e m arm ? u a n anf wfi t i s n

he s at dow n for m e di tat i o n , a nd fel t G o d to be i n th e so ci e t
y
of m en an d i n th e de se r t .

C H AP T E R XX VI I I .

P OST P OS IT I ON S GOV ER N I N G C A S ES .

59 5 59 9 .

S eve ra l pos tpo s i t i o n s are u s ed i n the place o f ca s e

5 95 .

i
t e r m i na t o s , o r
n o i e d to
n c a s e - j
te rmi n ati o ns to va ry th ei r se n s e
FIT Sfi i l a
‘
m 3
“

or H GT 3
‘
g i ve th at ma n o to m e
g .

T H E I N S T R UM EN T A L C A S E .

(m or m d
T h e follo wi ng p os tp o si ti on s i ndi cate the
596 . r elati o n of

i ns tru menta li ty
3 22 POBT POS I I IONB Govs
‘'
mvmc ca sns . § 59 8

of avai l when we ha ve fi ni s hed ou r j ou rne

y and arri ved at

ho me . T hi s pos tp os i ti o n occurs in learned di sco urse .

m ex
p resses the j
ob ect as, m ( Ii i ? tell hi m
m i g i ve i t to hi m .

3 3 1 1 1? i s n rally u sed i n poe try It expresses

.
g e e .

()
a T he obj ect “ W M ll

W fl tfl sfi cfi vfi ’
u

b
( ) Grou nd or r eason u mrl fi m ( g i ft : for thi s rea s o n

R ag h u vi r ca me m m afi y ou sh oul d co me fo r
the marri ag e of my s on .

( ) U
cti li ty or fi tness m fir m g raft on ? a er i s
p p fit
for wri ti ng .

4 T h e pos tposi ti ons

.
nt
a i GIST, a n, an]?denote t h e

m
,

ur ose o r reason
p p T h us, . I n! 3 g i ve a co w for t h e
B rahman .

6 . as? at, ex res ses

p the ob j ect ;m m “ i t! se nd i t to
hi m .

3 . T an A ‘
B L A I I VE
'
C ass .

(W or M J
5 98 . T h e follo wi ng are the a blati ve
p o st
p osi ti o n s

1 .
W den ote s t he sou r ce
W xv i 81 " tak e mo ne y
fro m hi m ( S ee W under the i n stru me ntal case , 596

2 .
W denotes

( ) a The sou rce or moti on from if m mll

s a I have
come fro m h i m .

A
() g y
b enc i 3 d?
"
m th e vessel was brok en by

() c P roxi mi ty it w m 31 3 1 he went by ou r

v illag e .
§ 599 J rosrrosx
ri ous con s u me ossns . 3 23

thi s si n ; 2 ) p r i vati on : m ( M
W ) a: mi
li 3 mfi w h i t fi rth he has
E “
not brou g h t the two ru
pees he
took fro m me .

(bl S i nce N T M uff an ? I ha ve bee n at ho me si n ce

() Di s ta nce f ro m i n s pace W W 3 11? i t i s far

c
g :
from my h o use .

4 w is use d to express co m ari so n zm fi r

-
t mafi af W
.
p s

1 ?an? h e i s wi ser than th i s e l de r bro the r It al s o ex

p re s s es

m m
.

a reason w arn w m fi m ’
ens si n ce

you cal l me , I m u st co me . 589, 2

5 . m ex resse s
p
( a ) S o u r ce W «farm h e came fro m u
pstai rs .

()
b Loc a li ty m Ema?m am ? al l th e pe o ple

sat on h o rseback .

() 0 A pproxi ma ti on i ll m m he we n t by o ur

vi llag e .

N ata —
m di ffers from W . Both ag ree in expressi n g near

nest , but m i ndi cates, i n addi ti on, to pass close to an j

ob ect wi th
out touchi ng i t, so as to g o fro m o ne si de of i t to a not her ; a?W

W W he went by o u r ho use vi ci ni t
( y) ; i ll W W !“
W T he went past our house .

()
d Gr ou nd or reason : 5 8 1 “ IT m m W I reco
g n i ze d
youby your voi ce ; 3 1 W“ ! R m 37 37 I we nt i n con s e

q
uence o f wh at y ou told m e .

4 . T H E L OC A T I V E .

(W or fl flJ
'

§ 599 . T he followi ng are th e Loca ti ve pos tp osi ti o n s . T he

p p
o t si ti n 81 h mi have a lo cati ve fo rce ; m
ure l i
s o o s , p y
m m i ?
t w h at be n efi t i s th e re i n stayi ng a t h o me atta in

W W m m fi flfl m f ’
a rfl t he ne ws o f bat tle a rri ve d
'

as soo n as the bri de ca me i n to th e she d.

 3 24 TH E m us e s .
I: GOO

Nates— The followi ng i di om i s wor thy of noti ce ari a i n i s i di oma

ti cal ly u sed for I t on i n s uch c ases as $ 3 1 6 a ri ng i n (for on)
the fi nger : so also W 11 3 1
”

3 s hoes i n the fee t -

sti nkt snrt qra c at
’

i n th e body ; m W‘
fli a tu rban i n the he ad &0
‘
, .

C H A P T ER XX I X .

T H E US ES OF T H E T EN S ES .

6 00— 6 50 .

6 00 . T he tenses h ave been con s i de red as sim

p l e and

co mpou n d . T h e si mpl e t e n ses di ffer fro m th e com po u nd not

o nl i ard t o th ei r fo r m , but a ls o t h e i r si n i fi cati o n T he

’

y n re
g
g .

for me r ex
p re s s t i me i n defi ni tely , th e p o i n t o f ti me at whi ch
a cti o n s ha p pe n, wi th o u t re
g ar d to d u rati o n, an d t hey are

a
p p ro
p i r at e ly e m p loye d to i n di cate s i n g le a c ts o r h a bi ts, whi le
t he la tte r i n di ca te a du ra ti o n o r c o nti n u an c e o f ti me t he ti me
,

d u ri n g w h i c h a thi n g i s do n e .

6 01 H l
en ce th e
re se nt, si m s t a n d fu t u re te nses,
.
p p e p a

m ay be de n om i nated pre se n t i nde fi n i te, pas t i n de fi ni te , and

fu tu re i ndefi ni te .

T H E IN D ICA T I VE M oo n .

PR E S EN T T axes .

T he P res en t I ndefi ni te .

6 02T he p re se nt i n de fi ni te i n di cate s an ac t whi ch

. l .

has late ly co m m en ced, an d i s i n a s tate of p rog res si o n :

fi sh ; yo u are esti n g j .

2 . I t i n di cate s an acti on that i s j u st a bo u t to comm ence

era v fi gm swi g?firs

'

m co me , I wi ll sh o w
y o u s o me thi ng

s tran o r co m e I am g oi n
g to s h ow u e t
g e y o , c .

3 . I t i n di cate s an a cti o n th at wi l l cer tai n l

y h appen : and
- -
m m g i ve y i ii m
o afi a i i ? I
u l eave , sh al l to m ori ow
the wh o le day , fro m m or ni ng to eve ni n g at sna f u : fi st} q rfi
'
,

at gen an ren w ti cri Wi

s s as i f w e s ho u l d no t g i ve

hi m t h e hard, yo u r fa th e r wi ll di re c tly de man d th e fi ve

o rc

hun dr e d r up ee s fro m u s snarl m am afi a n o w the m

Governm en t wi l l certai nly e xe c ute me .
3 28 TH E m uss s . 608

N ote . When merely

th e proneness of an agent to do a cert ai n act i s
to be e x resse d, t he eni ti ve s u i ne i s used i nstead o f t he fu t u re e rfect
p g p p
tense (i t g a r
? m an dm he i s su ch a man as wi ll so me
day or o ther do mi schi ef .

T he P resent Du bi ta ti ve
T he Prese nt Dubi tati ve ex
p re sse s th e p ro bable o cc u rre nce

m
“

of an e ve nt i n presen t ti me a?S fl fl l h e m i ght be

' ‘
8
'

di ni ng n ow .

P A ST T i mes .

The P ast I ndefi n i te .

6 08 . T he P as t In defi ni te e xpresses an ac t wh i ch has

transp i re d i n ti m e al ready passe d o r s en t :
p ft
a m arm m
he sai d to me y es te rday fl lfi W m '
m “ Tif f? h e s t r uck

me j u st a mo m e n t a o
g fafi m {fl }?fi r! H m she to ld me
th e who le story .

2 . It i s u s ed i n t he fi r s t cl au s e of a co n di ti o n al se n te nce

wi th a t i f, ex pressed o r u n dersto o d, to i n di cate t h e p os s i ble,

th oug h m os t do u btfu l, o cc u rre nce of an e ve nt M 11 3 1mm
mm m m m 3 3 “

sho uld y o u eve r p ass o ur door,

co m e t o me .

3 . It ex
p r es se s an acti o n t h at wi l l cer tai n ly a nd w i thout
delay h appe n i n future ti me , on ce rtai n c o n di ti o n s bei n g ful
fi lle d fl fl r a ?W W
“
3“
'
tell me , an d I sh all als o r u n to
h i m di re c tly ; E lla? {Ti f f m T i m 3 33 ? m fl
b l
‘'

W , w m m 3 1! mm they s h o u l d wi th

p e rfec t c o n fi de n ce in e ach oth e r an d wi th co u ra

g e co m e fo r ward,
an d th e s u c ce s s o f th e re fo r me d party wi ll be an acco m p l i shed
fact ; n, f?W m ark-
Wyo u g o on I wi ll fol low i m me
“

i i

di ate ly .

5 . It is j oi n ed to a state me n t to e mphasi ze i t ; afar a le

?
6 “l 3 5 85 th ere i s no doubt abo ut i t, do yo u un ders tand
“ Ti
W fi m w fi w fi i m md o y ou k no w w h at 1
have come to sa
y to ou
y
6 . It i s u sedfo r th e pres e n t tense whe n expressi n g a desi re
or opi ni o n m odestly M W Inf i r
i G
’
i ft I wan t wa nted
 me u s ers . 3 81

T he C am ou mi P ast H abi tual .

6 12 T he C o mpound P ast H abi tual has thwfi rst aeme of

'

z
.

th e si m le as t habi tual , vi z , that t he act was habi tual at some

p p .

p ast
p e ri od m amm i m m mm i n m
th o usands of l u ed to co me from g reat di stances -to hear
p p
eo e s

T he I m ep to-C ovcti nua ti ve .

6 13 . T he I ncepto -C onti nuati ve expresses the commence

me nt and co nti nuance of an act
m m m Dh ri taré
s h trabeg an and spok e as follo ws . Th i s form i s use d o nl
y in
trans lati ons o f Sansk ri t h i sto ri es . T he pure i di omati c expre s
si o n for o rdi nary use i s th e i nfi ni ti ve o f the ve rb wi th m
T he Du bi tati ve P as t .

5 614 . T he Dubi tati ve P as t exp resses the probable occur

re nce of an eve nt i n past ti me i t 313 1 m he must have

g o n e . It expresses a st ro ng er deg ree of
probabi l i ty than the
fu tu re per fec t fo rm a t m W e was 1 1 m w e are? 1

u m ay have tau h t me, bu t I have n o r ecolle cti o n of i t

y o g
N W Rfi
'

m - w an d ?yo u mu st have teased h i m so me

way o r o the r w tw3 3 d m

i
r r e ve n he m ust h ave done i t .

The P as t P r osp ecti ve .

61 5 .
( )
1 T he Pas t Prospecti ve ex
p resses that the a
g en t
had an i n te n ti o n i n ti me pas t to do s o me ac ti on 16 m m
fi w w n m m m I was to m m
have called o n y o u yeste rday, bu t a s I fe lt u nwel l, I s tay ed at

h o me .

It that a certai n act was th e poi n t o f h ap

( )
2 expre sses on

pe ni n g i n past ti me , b ut th at i t i s un certai n whe ther i t

ac tually took place or not m m W 6 y

7 60 es ter

day he was to have been tri ed .

F o r um T russ .

6 16 1
( ) T h F t I d fi i t e x resses an aet that i sa to
‘

e u u re n e n e p
' ’

occu r i n future ti me : mi 1 11 1 m i t wi ll ra n i to m o rro w.

332 rue m uses .
61 6

( )
2 I t ex resse s
p wi ll i ng ness to perform a parti cu lar act 1
;
” m a m m fi fl l wifl also l oo k af te r t h e

one that you wi ll k eep l fl a rm m af r i h

a I w i l l g i v e h i m
my share .

Nata — I n Engli sh a futu re not spok en of i n reference to a past act

takes th e auxi lli ary wo uld an d not wi l l, but i n M ar ath i t he

m m 3 13 $ 1 i m ‘
flfl we were
.

si mple fu tu re i s u sed Rfl
’

81

very m oment afrai d that y ou wo uld i nstan tly di e .

It e xpre sses the i n cu m be ncy of a

p arti cu lar act in an

i n terrog ati ve s en te nce e x ressed in Eng l i sh by th e au xi li a ry

p
s hou ld z éh i 5
1 1 ?
5 wh y sh'

o u l d I r un i ?
n m l 57 5
1? “ Ti l
why sh oul d h e bre ak i t h e i s n ot m ad .

I t, wi th th e parti cle at, e xp re ss es th e ce rtai n ty or i n

c um be ncy ex re ss e d by s hall : i t a ri a h e wi l l o ; i t
”
p g
-
a ri a fl h e s hall g o , i e , force d t o go by anoth e r
. . .

4 It ex r es s es ote nti al i ty, h si cal o r m oral, exp resse d i n

.
p p p y
Eng l i sh by the i n an i nterog ati ve
”
u se o f t he word can

m
s e nte n ce : e m{ i n arrh
}
? q
efl
r h
a t
aeri r
r
s eg o t '
n o t e e th

y e t, ho w then ca n h e eat ?
3 8 3 m g fl q i a i
ng 1 t fl‘
E d i W -
- h ow can I be ha
t i
h a b
ppy y p l un i
g gn an o t h e r
p e rs o n 1 n t o

di stre ss
I t m ay e xpre ss i n l i k e m an ner a past poten ti al , express e d i n
Eng li s h by cou ld H i 3 6 “ WM 6 51 1 3 1 11 3118 ? h o w co u l d
th e so n s o f P an du spre ad abroad o ver th e wh o le cou n try 1
'
’

5 . It i s u s ed i n th e fi rs t clau se o f th e co n d i ti o n al s en te n c e

wi th R T , e xpre s sed o r u n de rs too d i f g re at ec t i s to b e

“

ex
,
r es
p
p re ss e pd i n th e sup o si t i o n :m f ar -
m i r a re; at
s enr
m
e17 m Fm an? i f y o u wo ul d have t he g oodn ess to g i ve h i m

m edi ci n e, I shall ne ver forg e t yo ur ki n dn es s as l o ng as I li ve ;

W m fl W afi
“

, W at t t W lad i es , i f you wi ll

g raci ous ly permi t me , I wi ll j u st

g o an d be back in a
m om e nt .

I t m ay i ndi cate al so that th e su

p p o s i ti on i n the opi n i o n o f
-
,

th e s
peak er, is no t li kely to be reali zed : W ( rs qui t am at
‘’

qf g
'
as ; M i f you pl ease to seat me u
pon the t h rone,
I w i ll g ove rn the k i n g do m fo r yo u .
3 3 4. re p res ses . (51 8

o cleck
’
T he verb { Tfi s ubsti t u
t d e fo r M si g e
s i
nfi
th e

same thi ng . t
‘
fl w m m ( Il l a .

( )
2 It expre sse s al so conti n e ncy, a
g li ttl e do u bt or nuoer

tai nty as . to wheth er th e acti on wi ll tak e plac e or not

really

m “ i f ?QT m m W most pro bably we h ave these

sh owers in o ur vi lla e
g ; m In 31 1 3 m m W y o ur father
m os t probabl y wi l l be e xpecti n g yo u r retu rn NT m i
n

i
mm W I shal l mo st p robably be at P oo na t hi s ti me
-
to morrow .

F u tur e Incepti ve .

618 . T he F uture I nce pti ve e x re ss es

p the co mm en cemen t

and co n ti n uan ce of a future act in fu ture ti me : fill W i l!

l ?

he wi ll begi n to g o away .

T he F u ture P erf ect .

619 . T he Futu re P erfec t expre sse s the co mpleti on of an

act be fo re th e oc cu rre nce o f an o th er fu tu re acti o n :

W e d
ni
aft i i i era
-
sr I s hal l have g one the re befo re you .

2 . I t may fi r a11 °51

e Xpre ss co nti n g e ncy : he mi ght
have I t e X re ss es os s i bi li ty l e s s e m hati call h
t th
g o n e .
p p p y an e r

dubi tati ve as t for m i n m : a ? fi s t 3 mm h e mu st have

p
g o ne . T he probabi li ty i s s trong er i n th e latte r for m

Fu tu re P r osp ecti ve .

6 20 . 1 . T he F uture P ro specti ve ex
p re sses that th e ag ent

wil l be abo ut to do so meth i ng at some fu ture ti me gm?m as s?

fi
a m u
m: sfi wI sh all be g oi ng to wri te wh en y ou com e .

‘
2 It e xp res se s al so conti n e nc —
that the nt may pro
.
g y a
g e

bably be abo ut to do a ce rtai n act ?i n n: was;

a he may be
com i n g .

T he Fu tu re D ubi tat i ve .

6 21 . T he Future Dubi tati ve express es the p os s i bi li ty of

i nte nti o n to do somet hi ng
’
an ag ent s i n future ti me ti l

W m m W he mu st be g oi ng to ,
read i to -
day .
336 rue muses . 6 25

not wri ti ng , then onl

yy o u shoul d co me an d s ee me . It can

be used i n the future as well as the present .

2 . I t may exp ress that the agent may have an i ntenti on to

do the act su ppos ed, bu t that the speak e r has no k nowl edge
of it If? m m at a
‘
m m GM T sh ou ld h e be g oi ng,
then entrust the busi ness to hi m .

PA ST T unes .

T he P as t I ndefi ni te .

6 25 . T he Pas t I n defi ni te expre ss es that an e ve n t whi ch

di d no t ac t ual ly tak e place m i g h t h ave
p ossi bly occu rre d

m (T? w M? m emi t we sho uld have had at le as t

en o ug h fo r on e or t wo day s i i} i ii a m ar m as: g m rqfi

' '

fifi “ Hi i f h e had com e there, he wo u l d have le t y o u g o

'‘
i lfl s
'

nfi r w i wg mfi mfi ar fi m m i t mi ss ed by a li ttle,
o the rwi se she wo uld h ave fallen , i . e. , s he n arro wly escaped

falli ng ; m w m m m % mm at mm m m
F
u n (I n? an ? h ad y ou n o t be en at all th at trouble for me,
I should have been dead long ag o .

P as t M cbi tati ve .

6 26 . The P as t Dubi tati ve e xpre sses u n ce rtai n t

y re

s ecti ng an acti on , whi ch , i f i t e ve r occu rre d at al l , mu st no w

p
-
be fully perfo rmed card?wi ll an d ? e are l at w i n( ft! «
. m w f
«
s ho ul d h e real ly have been u i l ty o f u h th n t uly
g s c ro g u e r
y, e r

be IS a black g l '
ald s fi fi ffi
‘
m m at i leu m e m
sh o ul d he have arri ved fro m B om bay, th e n let me k n ow 1 n
s tan tly e m firm aft i i i W W th o ug h he should not

have g one, sti ll I m ean to g o to hi m . I t i s u sed i n the untccs

dent clause of a co ndi ti onal se n ten ce .

F UT UR E T axes .

T he Fu ture I ndefi n i te .

§ 6 27 . T he Futu re I ndefi ni te expre ss e s that p a erson

mi g ht have i n tended to do a cer tai n acti on , bu t th at h e di d

n ot : if M m HU I? i t?!i f h e had i ntended to g o, i t would
be deli g htful .
3 38 T H E T E N SES . 6 29

N ote .
— T he use o f t he ver b t ri ll , on t he occasi o n o f leave ta k i ng ,

is consi dered u n lu cky , as it

fi nal departu re
su gg ests ai i ideath, th e '

-
.

i mpli es a oommg agai n ; smfi M i ar; grn 3 1 1:

i
5 m i
al I s h al l b e

i conti nue to re ard me wi th afi ecti o n

’

g o n g g .

6 . I t is u s ed i nterrog ati ve ly to ex
p r e ss i nq
ui r
y erra ani qr '
v

m W l what sh all we do
’
no w li t .
, what i s i m cu m b e n t
on u s to do n ow ?

N ote .
— T he j
su b uncti ve form denotes a certai n degree of i ncu m
bency wh i ch i s enti rely absent from the i mperati ve anal W m
ark ?what shall we do no w

7 . I n te rrog ati vely i t i s u sed as e xpress i ve of g r eat s u r

pr i se

or e moti o n
m W , wi t m p ar do n
y o u
,
t oo , s ho u l d

speak h t w y T hi i i e for m t han t he

'
’
in t a a 1 s s a m ore p o l t p re

i n di ca ti m m 3 W l I t e xpr es se s e m o ti o n ,
‘
sent ve , 31

wi t h the force of the po te nti al ve rb ( “ Ti ff 3 111 1 ? EST ! W T H f

mfl ?wh at can we n ow say of hi s state ? W W W
‘

m fi m m sfl nfi m m é r m «fi rm ? what
‘
can we
sa
y of the a n n oy an ce whi ch Ganpatrav h as o ffere d u s fro m t h e
mome n t we came ?gm g ar ai m m l?
“
boy , what s h al l I s ay

to y ou T he speak er i ndi cate s by th e s u b uncti ve form i n j th e

last th ree sen tences, th at h e i s u i te p erpl exed, and doe s q n ot

k now wh at to sa
y or do .

8 . W i th th e j
con u ncti o ns ]
p a rti cl es
W t herefo re , & c .
,
it
e xpress es p ur
p ose
3 1 : at ar ms =r m w m w an

p r e s s a s h ar -
p p oi n te d p e bbl e to h i s ear, in o r der that he m ay
n ot ag ai n com mi t the sam e fau lt ( N T mm
9 W R dwe? m
m i f? a l l th e fo wl s h ad asse mbled, in o rder t hat th ey m i g h t
e lect a k i n
g .

9 . It i s u s ed for the g er u n d t ar mm m m wnfla ' '

p ro
per to place au thori ty 1 n th e han ds of s uch a man fé m
-
we are wri t r m we re m ans Go d k n ow s fu ll we l l h o w
to g o ve rn th i s wo rl d i tt ri a { W M ? Ful fi l I have to m
r un h i th er and thi th er i n th e g arden .

10 . I t i s freq
u en tl
y for the past habi tu al tense , an d
u s ed

th en i t m ay be ren dered i nto Eng li sh b

y wou ld afl m
 6 3 0] ms TEN S ES . 339

m m fi m ars r m W W u m wfi fi w fi in
e ne ral h e h u rt n o o ne o nly wh en he was exce ssi vely teased,
g
h e wo ul d beco me i
; fa l film fi n fl i fl fi fi ? {N
‘
o utrag eo u s sn 5
“

fi m afl fi m i rfia m w efiw w m she

wo u ld cons tan tly tease he r an d r e ro ach

p her th at sh e di d n ot

p os s es s the vi r tues whi ch are rare ly fo u nd e ve n in g r -

own u
p
wo me n .

1] It expre sses a s u pp osi ti on wh i ch i n the opi ni o n of the

s
p eak er s ho ul d n e ce ssari l y be rea li zed arr ?he sh ou ld
-
co m e to m orrow .

12 . T he s ub u n cti ve j may be u se d i n th e past and future, as

w e ll as th e p re se n t, ten se (p ast ) t ar g a r wri ter as ?£ 217??n

( rah l m I h lt a rent why
k th h s ho u l d
' '

e 3 Eli av e a e n o u o n e coac
y
3 why sh o u ld I have pu t the re i ns i n to yo u r han ds l t wrél
'

bo x '

-
afi all qfl ti a
‘
i l
'

W
e g r ll I too sh o u l d h ave co m e, bu t at th e
“

ve ry ti me S o me ti mes, h owe ve r, the p ast

I became u n we ll .

"
a u x i li ary mi g h t be u se d : an G l fl fi i f? u should have to ld
y o

me . For th e fu tu re, se e No 6 . .

N ote — Duty i s ei th er present or future , and th e si m ple su b uncti ve

j
exp resses t hi s s ense of du ty wh en i t i s e mploy e d denote pre
to
se n t o r fu tu r
e acti on : ar mr11 6 m
o a m 3 11 3 we sh o ul d gi ve food to
t h e p o or a ft?an?’I W IH 51 1 3 h e sh ould g o t o m orrow to the
“

pl ace of worshi p
I n th e past . t ense it e x ress es
p g en e ral l
y the noti on
of th e h abi tu al occu rre nce o f an act, o r t he p o ssi bi li ty of i ts occu rrence,

or so me oth er non ethi cal rel ati o n - . W hen duty i s spok en of i n relat on i
'

to th e past , th e co mpoun d form m ade u p wi th th e past t ense of sné

to be, i s u sed m fi I n? a?h e sh ould h ave come T he au xili ary fi fi
'

mi gh t be o mi tted as i n th e above s entenc ei n the text : t et x gm mi l

fi i sar
a i h
w y s ouh l d I h a v e tak en you on th e coach -
box ?
T he e thi cal sense of obli g ati on i s u su ally expressed by the subju ncti ve

wi th th e su b ect
j i n t he i nstrumental case, otherwi se i t denotes that of

u ncer tai nty : i ll a

str wamen he co ul d not have co me fi t an?afi
'

yo u o u ht to
g come -
to mo rrow .

63 0 . T he ne
g ati ve forms of the j
s ub unc ti ve m ood are

th re e , vi z . , (l ) the j
s u b u n cti ve wi th a n ot,
p refi xe d, as a Er ma
( )
2 t h e i n fi ni t i ve w i th a? (a n ot an d i t it co me s, li te ral ly , i t
does not co me ) , as t ar er a I sh oul d n ot come an d 3
( ) th e
 340 T H E T ENS ES . 631

wi th prop ri ety co me ; W at I sh ou ld not do i t .

Of these three forms the fi rst 1 8 n ot u su ally used, bu t th e

second is ofte n u se d to neg ati ve t he j
s u b un cti ve m oo d i n m o st
of i ts sen ses . T hi s fo rm tak es th e j
s ub ec t i n th e i n st ru m e n tal
case . T he th i rd for m h as i t expres ses a n i h
a s
pe ci al s en s e

fe ri or deg r e e of i m pro pri e ty , e s peci ally that wh ere th e i m p ro

ri e t d n t n i t i n th t i t lf b t i n t h t t ta k e n
p y oes o co s s e ac se , u a ac
'
n co nnecti o n wi th th e si tu ati on of the s
p eak er at th e ti m e
war?arm!t h at a? I can n o t wi th pro pri ety do thi s work S ET .

fli t wo uld be s t ron
g er an d wo u ld co nvey th e i dea t hat
so me th i ng wh i ch was i n i tself i mproper had been ask e d to be
done
N ote .
-
T he ph rase i n ai w i th a i
or i g i nal se nse of the
r i s th at o f n u

pro fi tablenes s o r i nexpedi enc , but wh at i s i nex edi ent i s often mor all
y p y
wrong : W I GIIH l ai r I s ho uld n ot eat i t, i e I am so ci rcu mstan ced
“ ' ‘ ’
. .

that i t i s not expe di en t or advantageo u s fo r me to eat i t, th o ugh th ere

is noth i ng w ro ng i f I di d eat it as y ou desi re . T hi s i s a mi ld and

p ol i te refu sal .

63 1 . T he neg ati ve form of

j th e m o od i n th e
s u b u ncti ve

i nfi n i ti ve m ood an d 3 3 bei ng us ual ly u se d, we sh al l g i ve s o me

exa mples o f it .

1 . It ex p re ss es the ethi cal sense : 3 1W “ ! “ Ti m w ar

m we sh o u ld o bey o ur
p ar ents corre spon di n g n eg ati ve

fo rm wo ul d be m ar wat;3 3 we s ho ul d m
' '
t n ot o bey Tr
r h ifi l a
'

afr fi H s : ai r n o m
'

h b a sham e d of
’

v o ne o u t t t ar
'

g o e p over y ;
i we must n ot h i M ark th e force o f th e s ub unc
j
‘
ar
p o
p g
e ve u .

ti ve i n th e last example .

2 . I t m ean s a di sp osi ti on or ha bi t : u ni t m m
w i fii 3 3 h e was su ch a m an that h e co u ld n ot s peak to
hi s ser van ts wi th out bran di shi n g a s ti ck over th e m .

3 I t may express p urpose : ( fi rm? m i n H afiéfi

.
' '

( M I? W the e n d for whi ch reg al power i s val u able i s that

al l sh o u ld o bey th e k i n g s co mman ds a corr e s on di n
’
n e a
g
p g
ti ve c on str u cti on i s rrs zrfi was Q ! ” E
‘
hl
'

m an ?fi t a? that
”

no wi sh of th e k i ng sh ou l d re m ai n u n f ul fi l led i s th e e nd fo r
wh i ch reg al w is val uabl e .
po e r
342 wa s T E N S ES . 63 4

m I nfi ni ti ve M ood .

63 4 . T h e i nfi ni ti ve i s u sed to ex
pre ss an acti o n th at
depe nds u pon anoth er, an d re s tri cts it 3 31 mi n 31 m?H is:3 let
us di e of hun g er .

I n Engl i sh the i n fi ni ti ve, be i ng a ls o th e g erun d, ad

63 5 .

m i ts of vari ou s uses, but i n M arathi th e g er u n d i s di s ti nct fro m

the i nfi ni ti ve an d also from the S upi n e, an d conseq ue n tly

i ts u se is q u i te re s tri cted . It chi e fly f o rm s th e j

o b e ct o f ve rbs

i g the acti on of th e mi nd wi l l s u ch as { fi
fi to
—
ex r ess n or
p
wi sh , m t o s ee, i n th e se ns e o f to de s i re, fi’
al fi rto
'
a be abl e , a
t o g i ve, i n th e sense of to m
al ow ,
l affe ct etc at to as i t 65 35 ,
.

fi he desi re s w
i t ; til i ris; q l
’
{fi to do m fl i
‘
s t h w i h t e
'

a e s e s o co e ;
art t ri fle: she wi ll be able to do i t; newi t 3 allow me t o co m e

fi t fi m he beg an to r ead Fo rme rly m any o ther v erbs .

g o ve rned th e i n fi n i tve « fi t Q t W , h e s e t h i m s e lf
to tak e th e medi ci ne T he i nfi ni ti ve may be co nsi de re d as a
.

ve rbal accu sati ve .

N ata — I n Vedi c ti mes the verbal n o un formed from a roo t by the

termi nati on 33 17 1 11 was reg ul arl decli ned In f
5 ,
3 y p rocess o

ti me on ly th e accusati ve form was retai ned , a nd ca me to de note the

se nse of t he dati ve . H ence th e present I nfi ni ti ve fo rm always conveys
the dati ve sense . In M arathi , al so, i t i s only ac cusati ve, and i n capable
of bei ng u sed as the sub ect j and i ts dati ve form (the dati ve sup i ne )
ex
p resses the dati ve sense of u r os e.
p p
N ote . T he Sansk ri t I nfi ni ti ve corr esponds i n L ati n, to the
supi ne in um da tum wh h i l h accusati ve of a verbal
( M ) , i c s
p p y
ro er t e

substanti ve i n Sansk ri t
j
”
us t as — A p te .

N ote. — I n Sansk ri t the verbs to desi re, to be able, to k no w, to con

strai n, to begi n , to get, etc. , over n th e i nfi ni t ve i n $ 5

g .

636 . T h e dati ve supi ne can be u s ed

i n th e place of t he

i nfi ni ti ve i n e ver
y o n e of the above exam ple s i f? a t or t o
rr
-
m { Fug HT he wi shes to do i t T h e 3 ?to allow may take
. verb

o nly th e i nfi n i ti ve wari t 3 le t m e come W657 arm fa? a

, it
?!Wr
the wi nd wi l l n ot let me wri te .
 6 4 0] rs s r s s ss s. 343

Note -l n S anskri t also th e i nfi ni ti ve i s

. re -
placed by the dati ve of
th e verbal no un deri ved from the root .

5 6 3 7 . T he pri nci pal u se of th e i nfi n i ti ve i n Engl i sh i s to

e xp re s s th e pur pose of an acti o n; I co me to bu ry Cwsar , n ot to

p rai se hi m, aft W m M en i wmt aflfi ‘

m unfi t

at fi . But thi s se nse i s e x r e s se d

p i n M arath i by the s u b u nc
j
ti ve m ood, an d the dati ve su
pi n e .

638 . When the pur pose of an acti on i s e xpress ed by a

d i sti nct sen tenc e j
or clau se, th e s ub uncti ve moo d i s u sed i n M a

r athi , o the r wi se on ly t he dati ve su

pi n e [W W W ] “ i
waft m ark fifi all th e fowls had as se mbled i n o rder that
t h ey mi g ht el ect a k i ng . T he same m ay be th us expres sed

wi t h a dati ve s upi ne Hi nfi
' ‘
t ri rr m m m fi a al
‘
l
t he fowls had assem bled for to el e ct a ki ng .

63 9 . W h en the i n fi n i ti ve is u se d as the j
sub ect o f the ver b
i n Eng li sh , especi al ly wi th the ve rb to be th e g er un d i s
u se d i n M arathi to lau g h i s n atu ral, m m i
3 l1 .

T H E PA R T I C I P L E S .

I .
— T he P res ent T en se .

64 0
T h e prese nt parti ci ple has three
. si m
pl e, an d two
co m oun d for m s
p .

I . )— T h e for(
mli n i n i s t h e pri n ci pa l o ne , an d i s u s ual ly
u s e d to m ak e u co m n d t fi u n fi t h i re adi n
p p o u e ns e s e s
g
fi fi mfi rrfi h e does n ot speak ; fi fifi w fi m fifi wh en
I w e n t, sh e was cry i ng It e xp re s ses th e curr en c of acti on .
.
y
( )
2 It is u se d wi th other verbs to defi n e th e m i
gg m
3 3 131 1 m do you y o urself conti nu e the work di li g e ntly
ie
r

m m ng a o on wo rs hi i
pp gn Go d fi fi t m 3 3 17 (T IG H T
'

he s too d l ook i n
g at th e sh o w a
l
l fli t ( i n a sh e s a t th er e w
lau g hi n g .

N ata — W h en the present parti ci ple i n fat i s thus adverbi all y u sed

i t may be Opt i onally redupli cated i f the verb whi ch i t m o di fi es i s a

t} m or m
verb of mo ti on or acti on ; a and ?she came weepi ng,
bu t i f} m m or m sh e sat down or lay down weepi ng
a m m g?m he wal ked on m
i i look at that boy he comes eati ng ,
.
 re s m use s . 6 40

m «a W u
‘
vr a m mo m n
A nandtanaya .

(8 ) W i th the neg ati ve par ti cle i t may ex

p ress th e noti on

of wi l li ngness, besi des th at o f curre ncy m mag ? won t ’

,

y ou s peak
{W uh a i v mfi a «m i fi t fi i i t s won t
’

y ou tak e my ri ng n owth en I wi ll g et ang ry wi th y o u m

m in an
fi Dau latsi ng wo n t tak e i t
’
.

II . 1) T h e parti ci ple i n mi expresse s th at wh i l e th e acti on

de note d by i t i s g oi ng o n, that de noted by the verb tak es
pla ce : If
? m m « ri ff w ar?h e fel l do wn wh i l e wal k i n g .

T he parti ci ple i s u s u ally repeated to e xpress the sen se of

du rati on
2
( ) Bu t when th e parti ci pl e does not expre ss an i dea o f
du rati on or con t i n uance, i t i s n ot repeated : m m co m e m
’
at t welve o clo ck “ W i t emi t I g ot u p as soon as he ca l l
ed o ut to m e ; rarer a W W W a i
a
'
r w i th o u t th e i r
'

m
k no wledg e s he went after them and s to od there ; m *
a W W W “ W fifi
'
th ey set the mselves to ta k e
the medi ci n e wi th ou t at the same ti me mak i n g any wry face s .

( )
3 T h e
p art i ci pl e i s u sed to m ak e u
p th e i ndi re ct ob e c t j
of th e transi ti ve ve rb wh en th e i n di re ct ob ect expresses an j
acti o n i n prog re ss : mm m r q
i nffi k I' s aw hi m play .

II I T he par ti ci ple i n mi ar e xp
'
r es s e s, l i ke that i n mi ,

th at whil e the acti o n de noted by i t i s g oi n g on , ano the r ac ti o n

i s p erformed : “ It gi ft m m W m I read o ff

y o u r note whi le t ak i n
g m y m e al s . It u suall
y ex
p resses th e
s e nse o f du rati on .

2) I t e xp resse s the i n di rect j

ob ect : t ar m m m
vrfi i i I saw h i m beati ng th e horse
'
.

N otc .
-
T h e di fference between the parti ci ples mi and (ai m when ,

they express the i ndi rect ve rbal object, i s the same that exi sts between
the Engli sh i nfi ni ti ve and the present parti ci ple , used obj ecti vely : I

saw hi m stri ke, a nd I saw hi m stri ki ng .

IV . 1 ) T he com pou nd p i
arti ci le
p in n m ex
p ress e s the

pro
g ress i ve s en s e li k e th e above t wo parti ci pi al forms : an d?
W m if m h e came whi le we were playi n g . I t is
 3 46 T H E T EN S ES . 64 0

j u ncti o nal cla us es , li k e thos e i n wh i ch the parti cl e s ri g i

'

t h en,
Ht th e n , af t s ti ll, o ccu r .

1
( ) T he for m i n an m ex
p re s s e s th at a
p as t e ve n t is
in s o me wa
y th e c au se or o ccas i on of th e act m en ti o ned i n th e
follo wi ng cl au s e : i i ? (4 1 7 5 arra r ei fl
'

ai w fl gi z gi t : 3 331 271 “
‘
ra
'

whenever he ca m e do wn , h i s di sposi ti o n wo u l d beco me t he

sam e as befo re .

(2) I t i s u se d i n the fi rst c la u se o f a co n di ti o n al se nte n ce

to ex
press a
p ro babi li ty s t ro n
g e r th an t hat de no te d by a rm
- m
m fi
t erW
a
3 13
"
! i ll W i f m e an s he u sed , i t wi ll s ti ll

be po ssi bl e to ri d h i m of h i s bad q ual i ti es .

3 ) I t h as th e s en s e o f the parti cle alt ho u g h : F "ri m ‘ fli fi

'

ifi
'

W e s ts: W } are?are a?m

e
i s; m are? t ho u g h I s h o u l d
s e n d all my e s tate , I c o ul d n ot m ak e h e r l o ss ; {H air 3 3 7 3
p u
p
W fi im th o ug h I sai d so m u ch , n e ve r th e l ess h e w e n t .

W i th thi s form fi e ve n mi g h t al s o be u se d : { at was: srqai fi

i f 373 1 .

4
( l )
. T he
p r i n ci pal u s e o f th e
p a rt i ci pl e i n t a i s t o c o n n ec t

t wo clau ses whi ch o th er wi se wou ld be oi ne d by t he conj u n c j

ti o n 3 1 e and an d i t den o te s th at th e act e xpre s s ed by i t pre
ce de s i n p oi n t of ti me th at m e n ti o n e d i n th e s u ccee di n g clau s e

fi rs: q
fiW
"
g a sh he tu r n e d o ve r fo u r l eave s, an d ask e d m f
arm m am qmi g? I w i ll g o i n to th e pr esen ce o f m y
i

3? tr
'

‘ se m
u ncl e, an d o n m
y k n e e s b eg h i s pa r do n éfi afi rt i q
’ "
m ai l
‘ '

R or
’
‘
e ; ( fi r t?fi fi
'

s a
‘
th o s e l a m b s we r e
pi l e d o n e a bo ve an o th e r
,

wi th th ei r feet b o u n d . I n th ese s e n ten ce s th e j

s ub ect or th e
ag e n t o f both t h e ac ts i s the s am e .

( )
2 T h e j
su b e c t o f th e par ti ci pl e may be di ffe ren t fro m tha t
of th e ve rb : rri
rrf
fi t !art E ra ( rai
s f s
c
st afte r s i n i
g gn i s o ve r ,
st i l l a

g o o d a rt o f
p th e day wi l l r e m ai n i t? fi t ? ai r Err fi i I th i n k
a y e a r h as p as se d s i n ce I s aw
y ou l as t Far m m Emi rfa
fir wn
-
3
?
h w m n da is i t si nc e h e di e d
grl 7 o a
y y s

N ote — I u th ese exa mpl es , th e sense o f th e p l u perfe c t m ay be ex

- m
.

d o th e p f i W
o i ne a
ri
p re sse d by p p j ost t o si ti o n s t 1 ast te nse li
-
.

wa s: m a
y al s o b e o n stre w n 8 m i t! th e a s? e r
e s e m i
tt,
or
-
fi m m
E m m
afi fi : W W
’
r a r ; o r ra o ?“
m . &c .
 64 3 ] TH E T EN SES . 3 47

)(3 It ex
p res se s th e cau se o f th e ver bal act th at fol lows
-
arm ra re? am
ft 1
1
W su g rai i I have g o t q fe e bl e b
u i te
y co n

s t a n t si ck n e s s eh an at ? W he di e d o f fe ve r i i i Era sm ai
,

afi a i nr m m aw fi mw rt fi a efi t fi m as h e was
r e t u r ni n h e cam e to a r i ver o n t he ro a d, t h ro ug h whi ch , fro m
g .

a r eat fal l o f rai n t ha t had ta k e n place, h e s aw th e re wa s n o

g
p a ssa ;W Wg e
W W W W ? what wo uld y o u g et by
k i l li n g me 1
?

( )
4 I t h as t h e fo rc e o f a-
rt i a l th o u
g h ,
w h e n t a i n fle cts th e

v e r b st a ff ; erg? I f?s trum; st i f { tr am w e r e ? s ee , wh at a bl u n der I

f
h ave c o m m i tte d, wi s e m an as I a m i f i s o ften adde d to 3 7 1 3 7 .

( )
5 I t i u s ed to m ak e u p th e fo rm s o f s om e co m o un d ve rbs
s
p
g t ? ETEE was h i t thoro u g h ly
'

ta fii i i t i f f fi tt h e fl un
g i t awa
y .

N ata — I n t he ph rase a m an ? a s ubsti t ute fo r i ft f tfii I k n ow,

fl

t he p ar ti ci le e x res ses th e
p p s ense o f th e ve rb i ntensely or fo rcibly f é
fiW fi t hat I k now fu ll well
‘
at ’ si .

64 ] l
T h e futu re par ti ci p e i n o
ur e xpre sse s th at th e s peak
er has so m e k n o w l e d e o f th e i n te n ti on o n th e p ar t o f t he
g
e nt to do th e ac t de no te d by th e parti ci ple a? t m
i v
E e
h
'

S IT
“

a
g
i s g o i n g t o c o me . fl
I t i s chi e y u sed to m ak e u
p th e fo r m s of

th e co m po u n d te ns e s . I t s fo rm i n an is u sed as a verbal

j
ad e cti ve i l fl rfi
'
' '

i ar. th e p e ople who i n ten d to

ii
‘
co m e .

64 2 . It i s u se d a a n ou n n
s i t h e for m o ur
f o as well as wrt r ,

-
a n d th e c ase i n fle c ti o n s are o fte n adde d o nl
y to t h e fo r m e r
-
for m : si ravrri g ash as w i t: i f? th e r e are m any t o s peak bu t
‘ '
'

, ,

few to a t ; H R WR FQ ( t e
c i n h D e c k a n WW ) a re t
‘
i n t-
fi
’

es, ,

cm si r l rsfi (W m ti m
‘
v
e rr
i
) i
'

ts a e
r ?we c a n h o l d th e h a n d s

of th e s tri k e r , bu t ca n n o t s t o p th e m o u th of th e s
p ea k e r .

T H E GE R UN D .

64 3 1 T hi s ex re s s e s th e si m
p le ve r ba l ac t, W i thou t an
. .
p y
ci rcu m s tan ce s o f ti m e , m o de , & c .
, an d is s u bs tan ti va l in u se ,

bei n g de cli n e d i n al l th e cas e s , li k e a n e u te r n ou n e n di n

g i n

(i ; as a w
t r i do i n g ; doi ng 85 0 arm fo r doi ng ; W [ of , .

h a? m f a i m ? i hi i d firi q tfi q w
‘
T u s aur ,
u
f a t r a s a c t o n s a re g o o
'

a
fi ii nnit W3? s h e d i d n o t e s c a
p p
e u n i shm e n t W am fi l a rray
‘

qraa m am an?i t i s i mp e rati ve th at I sh ou l d obey m y fath er .

348 ru e T EN S ES .
[Q 6 4 4

N otc .
-
T he g erund may take i ts o b ect
j when i t i s a trans i ti ve verb

Q m m m i} t u ri c you owe me fi fty betelnuts .

N a
et — T he verbs are i ven i n the di cti onary i n the g eru ndi al form,
g
and the ver b i s named by i t ; as $ 135?hug the ver b to do .

2 . It i s u s ed for th e i mperati ve as a. most i n defi ni te form

W M afl con ti n ue to wri te to us . I t , bei ng i n defi ni te, i s
m ost re spectfu l , an d occurs fre q
u ently i n the o ld Bakhara, as

we ll as i n let ters : W M " fi t

la
'
ti t “ !
W WW then t hey
sai d h ave pati e nce ; aft gl fi a rr fi q
that R amsi ng ia hs ho ul d

t fi yo u may n ever th eles s make th e m both p ri so ners It i s a .

more cou r teous for m th an e ven th e subjun cti ve .

8 . Wi th the verb srfl fi

'

,
it e xp res se s th e s en se o f o bl i a ti o n
g
or nece ss i ty : W th e ar m Hfi 811 ? one day we have to di e

T m: S nrm s s .

64 4 . T he for ms of th e su
pi ne s are tw o —
dati ve an d

g e ni ti ve .

64 5 . T he Dati ve S upi ne — T he dati ve supi ne has t he

foll o wi n g s eci al u ses
p
1 . T he dati ve su
pi ne i s u s ually u se d for the ob j e cti ve n fi n i
i
ii i i m mm he wi sh es to do i t It i s
’

t i ve t t on l
”
: i or .
y
a fe w ve rbs th at tak e the i nfi n i ti ve as the o b ect. j but the su
pi ne

may be u se d wi th al l th e ve rbs .

2 i n e i s u s e d wi th th e pers onal or dati ve

T he dati ve su
.
p
j
ob ect , to com plete o r de fi ne i ts se n s e , esp eci al ly wi th t he ve r bs

ai m? t o t el l s fi
n ar i fi to co m m an d ,
t o tea ch, y w m .

fi fi i to pe rsu ade , ti t ai to i nsp i re , W e mploy , (t o qfi

'
'
to a

W m ai m G
“

m he e mpl oy ed hi m to how woo d

a re? W m Fi rt h ? he
“

tau g h t hi m to p ray e m m .

m m t ra m he co m man de d me to k i ll h i m . T he su
p i n e s

i n di re c t bjo ects de noti n g ac ti on .

3 T he dati ve i i e m pl oy e d to
. su
p n e s expre s s p urp o s e
g ft
i

m m fi ai wh at went y e
' ' ‘
out for to s ee W
1 53m m a
r mm w co me wi th me to see my g arde n .
3 50 T H E T EN S ES . 650

ro babi li ty — l i t tle ho r t o f a b s o l u te c e r ta i n ty
-
a? (ra m r fi qfi -
p s

3 11 7 }W ? s he 1s s u ch a
p e rs o n as w i ll one day or o th e r
-
su t e ly do m i sch i ef . ft
a er a ware 8 1T W at m , w ai rg m
65 3 : th e s to n e s t ru ck hi s e ar, a n d it t he was r ead to
3 ear y
b reak o ff, b ut th e wa s de fi c i e n t by
ac t a l i tt l e ’
b e t he ca r w as
wi th i n an ace of be i n
g s t r u ck o ff .

'

6 50 . T h e fol lo wi ng are e xam

p l es of th e ne
g ati ve co n s t r u c

w s rfi mh arts? fea s rsae grr, H ? fi at rw a r a re?

‘
ti on fi t
’

z
gv a r 1 ! s

b u ry m e i n th e g ro u n d as m an
y da s as
y y o u
pl e a s e , b u t I s h a l l
n ever 3 3 i fa
di e m
"
3 i rer
: , f rt i tfr
— w m fi rst 3 3 G r am
W lfi i IR ?the n T ri m bak
F sa i d t ha t the ball w o u ld n e ve r m o ve

fo r w ar d e ve n a n i n ch .

N ol a T h e ger u ndi al dati ve and geni ti ve sh ou l d not be co nfo u n d

—

e d wi t h t he dati ve a nd g e ni ti ve s u pi n es T h e gerund i s si m p ly .

no mi n al, h a vi n g t he fo rce o f a n abstrac t no u n, and sh o uld be u s ed

wh e n an a cti on is vi ewed as a t hi ng o r o b ect

j ; bu t wh e n th e se nse of

a cti on or th e ac tu al perfo r m ance of a

i s p redom i nant, th e s n
t h i ng

i nes sh ou l d be u sed T h e g eru nd sh o u ld ne ver be u sed i n th e c as e s

p .

"
ment i oned u n de r t he Dati ve an d Gen i t i ve S upi ne s , T hu s, a?arra

( 1;e fi a rqrq
'
dru
m: an? h e i s
"

g o i ng t o c o m e to sl ee
p
-
to ni g h t i s

c orrect, but fi a m a i lwrt ?

3 11 w o ul d be w r o ng mm 3 6 m
a 1

W 3 1?
1 1 w
0h a t s h al l we cal l t hei r pl ayi ng
?
m wo ul d be wro ng

m
"
in th i s se nt en ce ; su i t Ir a ?t ffi i ii 3 ?t wh i ch are the h ym n s to

be su ng - -
to day ! B ut ar ma?I fi i i sn o
‘
o
rt bri ng t he si ng i n g so ng s , or

song s u sed in si n i n
g g .

N ote — T he s np i nes are i n fl ected forms of th ei n fi ni t i ve, wh i ch , e ty

m o lo i cally wel l in ard t o th ei r u se , are su bst anti val i n ch ar
g as as re
g
ac t er . T h ey are o f th e n a t ur e o f t h e g e ru nd, abstract nou ns, den o t

i ng acti o n, bu t, u nli k e t he g er u nd , t hey, i n t he dati ve case, e xpress t h e

T h u s , h e g oes t o read wo u l d be i f!ma ntra
”

s e nse o f
“ “
a p u rpos e .

m qra
”
l? s o al so wh a t s h all I do fo r h i s readi n
‘ “
a ,
no t ara o ana g
m m ma ure
wo ul d b e i a m n
,
n ot i n
aret ai m ari a
? I n Sansk r i t th e
form 15 5 5 i s no t i n ec te d
fl i n th e dat i ve t o e x p es s th i s se n se o f p u r r

se arm s; cra m h
'

e g oes
“

t o c o o k B u t e v e n i n S an s k ri t i t i s o n ly a
po .
.

fe w s peci al verbs t h at c a n t ak e th e fo r ms i n an I ts e fi ci e ncy i s

.

m ade b h i d oi o t h e r fo rm s , n d b t h u se li k e th e M arat hi
p y u t e a a y e ,

; arm? m ma
dati e s u pi n e of a ve b l d ti a h e oe s t o th e act of
v r a a ,
ve g
co o k i g
n -M ar M u l ler
. .
 6 53 ] T H E P A R T I C L ES . 3 51

C H A PT E R XXX .

T h e P ar t i cl e s .

T H E A DV E R B .

65] 6 82 .

6 51 . T h e de cl i n able adve rb a
g re e s , i n g en der an d nu m

b e r, e i th er wi th th e j
s ub ec t, o r wi th th e j
ob ect o f t h e ve r b
'

e
'

fl W mr
i e; s h e w i l l d an ce we ll ;a?W aré
‘
-
ir
arti z
'
'
‘
ho w
d o e s h e si n g am at “ m W m W thu s he fell i nto
v e ry g re at di s tre ss T h e de cli nable . a dve rb i s thu s u se d

W he n th e j
s u b e c t i s u n i n fle cte d, a n d th e v e rb i s i n tra n s i
ti v e , t h e ad ve r b ag re es wi t h th e j
s u b ec t i f?ar m W sh e

?w f?fi rm mm?h e
i

W al k s w ell a ai er E is o
pp o s e d to m e .

2 . W he n th e ve rb tak e s an u n i n fl ee te d ob j e ct, th e a dve r b

a
g r ees wi t h th e j
ob ect, i n p refere n c e to the s ub e c tj i f? m
ai m? fi
a i h s h e si n g s
‘ ‘
wel l .

3 . W h e n bo th th e j
su b e c t a n d ob e c t are j in fl e cte d, th e ad

v erb IS i n th e n eu te r si ng u la1 W afi W h ow
‘‘
ut cz rfi
'

p
c o u ld h e beat h i m ?

4 . i s p ut i n th e n eu te r si ng u lar, also, wh e n th e
T he a dve rb

j
s u b e ct o f th e i n tran s i ti ve ve rb i s o m i t te d as wel l a s i n e c te d fl
a? 11 0 W W i ll i t ?
be i flfi 3 T? fi f l h ow co u ld h e g o?
' ’

T he adve rb is e mpl oy e d i n th e n eu ter si n ul ar, a l so ,

a. g
w h en th e j
ob e ct o f the t ran s i ti ve ve r b is o mi tted, a n d th e v e rb

m erel y i ts g e n e ra l se ns e o f a cti o n Fll afi W

’‘
h ow
'

e x p re sses
‘
do e s h e r e a d ai at? h o w d oe s s h e si n
g b u t ? R IT l nfi
a G l ’

q -
rf q
‘ ‘
fir h o w d o e s h e re ad t h e b o ok

6 52 . One adve rb m ay m o di fy an o th er adve rb, an d t h en

a n d n u m be r 3 ! fi re W af q
c"
bo th i n g e n de r aff
“

ree
g a

3 7 7 n?wa f
3 3 a r i ? s e e h o w w e l l Go d h a s orde re d thi s m atter .

6 53 . A dverbs e x p re s si n g th e s e n se o f
q uali t
y , or r ath e r

j
ad ec ti ves u s e d adverbi al ly , can be co m
p a re d li k e si mp le ad ec
j
-rw fl n arfafi
‘
M ai na
ti ves ; ( rl n ds better th an
'
a a r ea

R ama . 5 22 .
3 52 THE n ar ro ws . 654 — a

6 54 In a com o un d s e nten ce th e rel ati ve adver b i ntro

.
p
duci ng t he i n i ti al clau se i s followed by i ts correlati ve Ffi
'
313 i
i ts ?swi sh ( 11 112 3 1 1 W i t W W W em 1 5: wh e n e ver s he

nsed to see her m o ther i n ang e r, s he was afrai d .

T he relat i ve parti cle may be o m i tte d ; 'fl W W i T i s?

'

N
t

m an? I used to wo rk wh e n I was young i i {mu ffs fl i t 3 1 r

I ?at“ ? we sh o uld do as m b d
Q y o u a
y 1 u s .

655 . T he re lati ve a dverb o f ti m e m i m ay be _

r e
p eat

ed to co nvey the s e nse of fre q

u e nc ,
y an d t he cor re lati ve foll o w
i ng i t i s u su all
y re
p eate d first ?fi a t a ! q?m a s
“ fi g }
(3 ? fi a m i d?m i a wh e ne ve r h er ey es fel l u po n h e r , t h ey
u se d to fi ll w i th te ars . I n the fol lo wi ng sen te nce th e a dv e rb
i s n o t repe ate d ' ‘
I l
'
il
F
' “

ci li a?“ W W , w i f? W QT

m Ra fa t hey dri ve m e away whe neve r I atte m

pt t o
g o to t h e m .

65 6 . W he n fl a t i s j oi n e d to W ,
it e xpres se s t he r a re

occ u rr en ce of an e ve n t, an d th e co r re la ti ve is on l y o n ce

m e nti on e d : W W W m m W W W fl ,

fl g? i i rafi it
} flat 3 1 : Rift zi t mfi so me ti m e s whe n she
'
a g ver.
’ ‘
hap

p e ne d no t to do atte nti ve ly wh at s he was bi d, th e n T r i mbak s het

ai n i n that p lace
u se d to han g the j a
y a
g .

06 3 .
— For the mean i ngs and u se s of oth er adverbs, S ee 348 .

T H E P os rP osrrmN '
.

657 T he postposi ti o ns , wh i ch are capable of i n ec ti on;

. fl
a ree wi th th e n o u n s to whi ch th ey r e fer i n n de r an d n um
g g e
‘
or H i i r
be r afi : $1 ( f
8 i t f r? twen ty el ephan ts
'

fl i ? Gr
sto od ar o u n d h i m T h e po stposi ti o ns , i n co n u n cti o n wi th th e
. j
no u n s wh i ch the y i nfle ct, for m adve rb i a l h a e s, an d conse
p r s

qu en tly foll ow th e sa me l aws o f con co rdance wi th th e decli n

abl e adverbs . 5 08 .

"
6 58 . P o stp osi ti o n s may i nflect a w hole sen ten ce: ah avi
fiat W are ? I wi ll n ot g o wi tho u t tak i ng t he ru pees ;
w 318 m I f?a l l?
g fi fl after I have m e t hi m, I shall
'

ask hi m T he po stposi ti on i nflects th e verbs

. an d we}? m
as i f th ey wer e n o u ns fi refl + am: W h en the postposi
ti ons th u s g o ve r n a s e n te nce, t he s enten ce ends i n th e past
ten se i n m
. 5 04 , 1 , N ote .
3 54 T H E P A R T IC LES . 66 1

the hou se, calli n

g out to her m other, si ster , an d th e s er v ants,

an d sh owi ng i t to th e m .

5 . m may be i ndi scri mi nately u se d

,
but n ot s o i f.

§ 66 l . T he co
p u lati ve con u ncti o ns j are o fte n o mi t te d in
M ar ath i, an d th e o mi s s i o n fre q
u e ntl
y i m parts n at u ral n e s s and

an i m ati on to the narrati ve : m m fi

fif r a 3
'

m
wri t W W W
m fi ; wi m wea
s r . m m fl
i tem fea r m m vfi ; W ?fl i ers emi t amenerrfi efi a m a ft '

‘
fi f m i st rrarweft ; i f?mm ?afghan? firm mt wri ter
? a re?m
' ”
e t

l eal i ty s he di d n ot dece i ve h e r mo thel , s he d e cei ve d h e rself .

Formerly sh e u s ed to be al wa
y s ch eer ful . S h e wo u ld fi nd
deli g h t i n th e soci e tv o f h er mo th e r, and wh e n e ve r h e r m o ther
we n t o u t an d cam e ho me , sh ewo ul d g ladly g o for war d and

e m brace h er ; bu t al l th i s hap pi n es s was n o w l os t to h e r ea fi

W a na m ai a fiw affi mfi fl fi ; m afi wfi a fia fi i t
’

fifi
'
3 11 ? h e h as bi d us do wh at wo ul d do us
g o o d, an d fo rb i dden
wh at wo uld i n j ure u s .

662 . On the o th er h an d , th e l e
p e ti t i o n 0 1 th e j
c o n u n c ti on

arre s ts th e atten ti on , an d r i vets it on th e detai l s : arr W 31 8

W p th e n
j y i n th e ca e, an d wen t wi th i t
sh e
g ut th e a

all o ve r th e h o u s e , call i n o u t t o h er m oth e r, a n d s i s te rs , and

g
th e ser vants, an d sh o wi ng i t to th e m T he p arti cle s are, how .

e ve r, o f ten o mi tted, an d th e atte n ti on i s drawn to th e detai ls

by th e to ne of th e voi ce w : 'F I hi
’
? m fi ,

mit ffi l i m m x nfi fi r, efi mfia m fi amr an d ?

‘ ‘
e , , “ ,

was er w e - m m t
-
m i ?
1i nn r a r
t i rrfi f ? i f
’
,
é e,a ar a e a
,r a
y “ ,

‘th e n th e
ffi fl s
q u i re to o k Davlat ré v u
p s tai r s, w h e re he had
be for eh an d co lle ct ed s uch fru i ts as g rape s, l i m e s , s haddocks,
i n e -
a l es , m n t l n t i n fi u av a s a n d s uch
p pp p o eg ra a e s, p a a s, g , g
s ,

fl o we rs as th e r ose , th e e s sa m i n e t he j as mi ne
j , ,
t h e C h ri stmas

fl o we r , an d th e c h am
p aca a
fil i 5?e mf? fi W "? S l l?

é m ais rer,
‘ '

m , azrrfi
er , a re smfi g
,
o
s s m
a erg ? eras she

was th e n so m u ch o ve rp o w e r e d w i th j y
o t h at sh e k i s s ed her
m o th e r p rofus el y on h e r l i ps, h er ch ee k s , he r ey es , h er breast,
an d h er h a n ds .
 6 64 ] TH E P A R T I C L ES . 3 55

663 . T h e di s j unc ti ve j
con u n cti on s 3 mm and fifl T, or
,

d i ffe r a li ttle i n se n s e , th o u g h th e di ffere nce i s l i ttl e atte n de d to .

W has o n ly a di s j u n c t vei force, wh i le F

an" has th e addi ti o n al
‘s
s e n s e o f var i et :
y
-
fi fi i t 13 3
f 3 v
17
W W
W ei a m m fi wr m e em i t Em m a-
na
g i ft m m ; W G T IT i f a n y h o n e s t p pe’
o l e s u ffe r i n
g fr o m
p o v e rt
y d es i r e t o g e t a m o u th f u l of f o o d ,
o r
g l e an s tr a
y e ar s o f
c o r n,
y o u sh o ul d n e ve r m o le s t t he m m m “ i t " fl a t m
m e wm
m a r. « fi r
a
‘ -
i
erts m m a emu " m
31 m m m m m fi am w eurefl s i ster
i f?
! 3 18 37 6 j
w o ul d y o u r ma e s ty be pl ease d i f I prai sed hi m i n
our e s e n ce as h e de se rves, or co u ld I s a th i f
y pr
y a n
y n
g u n avo u r

a b le o f hi m i n th e pre s e nce o f o ne wh o co ul d deal w i th hi m ,

a t o n ce, acco rdi n g t o h i s de se r ts

2 . N WT!an d
“

rl?“
e a re o ft e n ele an tl
g y used to v ar
y p a r ti
-
cles a m
s ear ta Fker fi rearm R af
a fi rar, W t «h as
err

R afa em r 3m srar é we w
‘ '

t a rt ar e ? wheth e r i t (th e
are
c h ar
g e ) was tr ue , or a t r u mpe d u p o ne , o r he r eally i n te n de d
d oi n g i t cann o t b e p reci se ly de t er m i n e d .

6 64 . W h en t he seco n d cl a u s e o f a co m
po u nd se n ten ce

l i mi ts th e si g ni fi cati o n of the fi rst , th e ad ve rsati ve con u ncti o nj

mfg o r qr, bu t, i s i n serted: 1 W
o
'

W m i ? 6 1? f

vrft vear
'

m m mar; W gm art
c fears w ra rv vrfae mfi rm aft
‘ ‘

g ar sui t g t,
i eff; W are? beca u s e y ou have con fe ss e d
y o u r

fault, I wi ll m ply n o t p u ni sh y o u b ut I wi ll n o t
si call y ou my
Du rg a un less I t ry y o u r pe n i te n ce fo r many day s ar
-
mr W
-
‘‘
Trn rr, e rs rsrr s eru m rs m ar, as , af r
‘

i rfi fi et h e r, R afi a a f a es s e s e

am ? y m an b r o th e r h a s g o o d m an n e rs a n d i s o f , a fra n k
an d g e n e ro u s di s po s i ti o n bu t h e i s at th e s ame ti me a l i t tl e
rash , fo r ward and o bs ti n ate ; { mW
m ET Eff ?
are i fim r
he s wore, but di d n o t sp e ak ?co ul d be
th e tr uth ; at ? or a t s ub

s ti tu te d f or trt
o .

N a
Ol — T he adve rsati ve sen ten ce i n wh i ch the secon d cl au se li m i ts
the fi rst, co ul d be co n verted i nto a co n di ti o nal se nte nce, denoti ng co n

a t?m
cessi o n m
w rt al arm , the at} as"? areas
i ar : T ff
e { i —r s ti rre r,
”

W W ,
I & c ,
an? al th o u
gh my b.ro th er i s o f good h abi t s, &c
,
st i l l h e .
35 6 T H E PA R T I C LE S .
6 65

i s at the same ti me a li ttl e rash, &c . T he con di ti o n al i s preferabl e

w hen the opposi ti o n i s poi nted .

66 5 W hen the seco nd clau s e contr adi cts t he fi rst, th e

.

wh ol e s en tence i s cons tru cte d i n two way s

1 . W hen the fi rst clau se
i s p osi ti ve, i a , does n o t co ntai n a . .

neg ati ve par ti cle, an d the secon d clau se i s n e ati ve, th e two
g
cla uses are s i m l u t to e th e r , wi tho u t th e i n s er ti o n o f an
pyp g
adversati ve
p ar ti cle fi at W “ E a
r ,
at ri a are? s h e d ece i
ve d he rself, n ot h er m o th er ; st i lt ‘
fi E i f? ai l f fl ffi r aféli W
'

!
'

511 art?i n a thi n g li k e th i s, i t i s thei r faul t, n ot o u r s .

2 . W hen th e fi rst cl au s e con tai ns a n eg ati ve

p ar ti c le an d

th e s e con d is afi rmati ve, the adver sati ve arti cle s m a may

p y or

n ot be i n ser te d : W W 55 2!W i t? ( or at ft er)

a

by eati n g
p oi so n, m an wi l l n ot li ve, bu t di e . T he ad ve rsati ve

at then i s on l
y u s ed, n e ver qi g ‘
or qwne ve rt he l e s s .

3 W h en two opposi te cl ause s are oi n ed si m ply to i n di c ate

. j
vari e ty , an d n ot co n tradi cti on , th e co ulati ve co n u n cti on
p j
saf r a n d, i n th e s e n se of N o
e 1 , i s u s ed g e m -
SH ITTi 3 .
"

m
an?th e boy i s weak , a nd th e g i rl i s s t ro n g
M .

6 66 . W he n m o r e th an two adve r sati ve cl au s e s ar e u n i ted

-
in o ne s e n te n ce , both W rb ut, an d anfaran d, i n i ts op p osi ti o nal
o

ch ar ac te r, are e m l o ed t o co nn e ct t he cl au se s si t aW
ar er
“

p y
W mi
‘
fi fi ér a rwfi tfi w fi
efl i t w W Ear 5 1 53 53
73 1 2 t ,
-
mW
Si 71 fl l f l Fi fi M
' '
i ii “ !m etre I am fu lly awa re
th at pe o pl e do so, but I have n ot met wi th a s i n le
g fau l t i n

V68 6 , wh ereas A tmaram m u s t be , l eas t, g u i l

at ty o f a t ho u s an d .

I n t hi s s e n te nc e th e s e co n d clau s e l i mi ts th e fi r st an d t h e thi rd
,

n e g ati ve s the se con d

h en ce W ve ry natu rally co m e s bet ween
fi rs tw m
'

th e t o clau s es
,
an d s i r b e twee n th e s eco nd an d th e l as t .

W hen ,
h owever , the s e co n d clau s e n e
g at i ve s th e fi rs t and

th e th i rd li mi ts th e p se co n d, th e re i s n o arti cl e i n s erted be
t we e n the fi rs t an d th e s eco n d cl au s e, wh i le W i s i n s erted
b efor e t h e t h i r d :
“ ‘
(fi est a?ate ?sib m wrs fi as s«
—
ft, ai m
i r W
, W $ 3 3 55 W W t h e
plates an d di s he s of the

farm er we re n o t of g ol d an d sil ve r , b ut o n ly of b ras s and

c o p p e r, n e ver th el e ss th ey we re cl ean a nd br i g h t . afi sti ll,

wou l d be p referabl e t o w .
 6 74 ] THE PA R T I C L ES . 3 59

H e nce when a
p er so n s
peak s of hi msel f wi th mo de sty, he
u se s t he pas t ten se i n th e con di ti onal claus e ; th e pas t te nse ,
b e i n g a n e mphati c for m, i m po ses a h i g h de g re e of o bl i gati o n
on hi m : mm w m m art i sfl sfi m swe aters:
M 3 113 17 5
?i f I prai s ed hi m before h i s face , as I m i g ht i n
j u s t i ce be ex pecte d to do, the n wo u l d your ma e sty be pleas e d j
I t w o ul d be r ude to us e th i s for m in r efere n ce to a pe rs o n of
su ri or sta ti o n
p e .

6 72 . W he n an e ven t is ce rtai n o r o f fre q

u en t o ccu rre nce,

an d the pe rformance o f an other act de pen ds u pon i t , the p ast

t e n s e i s u s ed fo l lo we d by m ? ! i n s te ad o f at : m wri t W
n 373 ? when u n cl e oe s o u t, I wi ll even th en m ee t y o u
g
-
fl? armr W W Gi n te l l m e as s o o n as he co me s g rg m
-
W m m m
‘
rfi e afi a hwr ri t éi arte r ies i
a m sufbr fe at
“T 3 ? m are w he ne ve r t hi s boy g o e s i n to th e co m
p an
y of
“
o th e r boy s, they dri ve h i m a way, an d s ay, we wi ll beat y o u i f
u shall co m e back a ai n
y o
g .

N ata — T he past i ndi cati ve so meti mes denotes an e vent whi ch i s

l east li kely to h appen i n fu tu re ti me Ernaff “ ( N E H we re
at fl a sh ? 3 sho uld door, come to m e T he pas t
“

y o u e ve ass ou r
r
p .

i n di cat i ve here denotes an event wh i ch i s n ot depen dent u

pon th e
wi ll of th e pe rso n of whom i t i s affi rmed, an d therefo re most co nti n

g en t .

N o te —
. I n stead of the pas t tense , t he i mpe rati ve m i g h t be u sed 3 gr
%e m e?1a m (s t ar) am ? wh en fi fe p u t t h e o x to t h e water
w heel , and he w i ll t hen i mpro ve .

6 73 . W hen an e ve n t h as ac tu all
y t ak en
pl ac e , a n d th e re i s

do u bt i n th e sp eak e r m i n d abo u t i t, th e prese nt an d th e p as t

’
no s

ten s e o f an ? are u se d to m ak e puth e v e rbal forms ?

a 3 1 :fi t
=rr
€
r of whi ch y o u h ave n o do u bt at mm 3 11 =rr€ r i f he i s
”

t h i e f, th e n h e h as n o th i ng to fe ar aan? f ra at wa r
' i

not a at
'

i f th ey h ad com e they m u s t have se en me fi r FIT

ll ai l
E
'

i at fi g? i f “ !fi ts i f h i h th n w i l l se e h i m
”

e s ere , e
y o u
,

6 74 . W h en the s pe ak er doe s n o t q ue s ti o n th e occ urre nce

o f a n e ve n t, bu t S i mply wa n ts to e xpre ss th at h e has n o k now

abo u t i t , the n arm
‘
i s su bs ti tu ted for Sui : i t f rvi mi hm
le dg e
 3 60 THE P A R T I C L ES . 6 75

m fll
‘
l
’

W w : th ou g h h e s h o u ld h ave g o n e t o anoth e r

I wi ll fetch hi m the nce ; W

co n ti ne nt, W G IT fi t fi W ‘‘ '

w ?at sho uld the teach er have g i ven the m leave, what then
i ll

5!arm 8m?!at W 31 573 sh o ul d h e be g oi ng , then do n ot come

i fi féqfl
’ '

sm art; at I f? m 1 1 6?sh ou ld y o u be g o i ng to
wri te, I s hall n o t w ri te at i t vi ? arm
a ai r at s h o ul d he
be i n s om e
pl ace j u st h ere , th e n 2
’

6 75 . W hen we wi sh p to ex re s s that th e e ve n t mi g h t
h ave be en di ffe re n t fro m th at whi ch has ac tu all
y h a
ppe ne d, t h e

co ndi ti on a l m oo d i s used ar msfl 3 mmfi rst au ra? at a? m

omi t had I n e e de d m ore m o n ey , I wo u l d h a ve s o ld th e

wh ol e ; E rar Ww staff sw at?ar m m arri es i tem i f y ou ha d

p ardo n e d hi m , the n R am awo uld n o t h ave bee n so m uch g ri eve d .

T hi s i s the m o s t co m mo n use of th e M ara th i co n di ti o n al m oo d .

67 6 . W hen th e th i n g s su
pp o s e d ar e ve r
y s h o rtl y t o ha p
‘ ‘
the co n di ti on al is u se d i t H?a t?" F": H féra rai f he we re
“ '
n,
pe 1

g oi n g t h e n I wo u l d g o al s o (P r e s e n t t e ns e ) .

67 7 . W hen th e c o n di ti o n al cla u s e de no te s a co n ce s s i on ,

th e par ti cl e s a t?an d af t d lf uf fi af t emi t

‘‘
ar e u s e { H a
-
e al th o u h I ld h i m m u ch , h e d i d l i s te n
era g t o so n ot

31 W? 31
3 31 l
'

fil m? i f i t t i ff
i 3 35 a l th o u
g h De vrav
-
was S h e ddi ng t ears , s t i ll he s m i le d w hen h e h eard t hat .
germIi
m i g h t be s u bs ti tu te d f o r th e co n di ti o na l ar ti cle s
or p
{fi 3
5 5 3 3 1T H ?Fl? th o ug h I s ai d s o m u ch, s ti l l he we n t away .

TH E I N T E R J EC T I O N .

6 78 . T he i n te r j e cti on i
‘
q
f y ,
es ,
re
q u i re s a wo rd o f e xpla

ti o n . In ans we ri n g a q u e s ti o n , the ve rb e mploy e d i n th e q ues

ti o n i s re
p eate d wi th or wi th o ut E y
ra e s . I f a m an was as k e d

i f hi s wor k was co m pl e te d, h e wo u ld be ask ed arm i n? h ave yo u

do n e y o u r work l i te rally , i s th e work do n e) ?H e wo ul d an s wer,
"

i ts; g i
r t es
y , i t i s don e ,
or si ? i t i s don e
mply i n n eve r only

a y
n e s .

‘
679 . B u t si nce é zr i s a
r for m of th e ve r b fl at to beco me
,

a n d, as a ve rb, is us e d i n th e se ns e o f 3 11 i , is it can

n at u rally be u se d by i tse lf whe n the q u e s ti o n i s p ut wi th the

362 P R I N C I P L E S or vs asrr roa rrou.
'
6 84

N ote T he rul es of M arathi versi fi cat i on are r i nci al l d ri ve d

.
—
p p y e

from S ansk r i t .

6 84 .
Q I (W
UA N T T Y) i n di cate s th e ti m e ta ken i n pro

nou n ci ng a n (em ) o r s l l able ; S Y L L A B I FI C A T I ON

y (m ie n )
refer s to th e n u m be r o f th e s ll able s w h i ch co mp ose a ve r s e
y
or a
p art o f i t ; R H YM E (m ) i s t he corr espon den ce o f s ound i n

the ter mi n ati ng sou nds of t wo or m o r e m e mbers of a ve r se

an d A C C EN T f?
( !I fi
El rm) m ark s the se cti on s i n to wh i ch a ve rs e

i s di vi de d .

6 85 .
Q uan ti t
y i s re c k on ed by m é tr és or m o m en ts , an d

e ac h shor t vowel is s up ose d to be u ttere d in one m o m e n t, an d

p
h e nce i t i s e
q u al to one m é tré A long vowel tak es twi ce as

m h ti m
.

uc e as
q
is re u i red to p r o n o u n ce a S ho rt vowel , an d is,
th erefore, equal i n
qu an ti t
y to two matr és . T h e di ph th on g s a re
i n cl u de d i n the lon g vo wels .

T he l e n g t h or
q uan ti t
y of th e vowel i s i ndi cated by two si gn s ,

t he m acron or a tran s ve rse li n e p u t on th e to p of a s

yl lab l e

to de n o te two m é tr és , a nd th e cr e sce n t
( )
v
to de n ote on e

m dtr é thu s i f: 1 m etre i r 2 m atras i rfi 3 m atrés ;

=

W 4 m et res j i ér 2 m é tr é s .

6 86 . T here are so m e vo wel s wh i ch , th o u g h sh o rt , beco m e

long by posi ti on T hey are th e se ()l a s h.o r t vowe l wi th —

a n anus wé r over i t ; (2 s h ort vowel, ollowed by a vi sa r a

) a f g
()
3 a S h o r t f by a dou ble conson an t ; an d (4 )
vowe l, ol lowed a s h or t

vo wel (occa si on al ly a t the end o a ver se T h u s f w

) f i g ; . 31 ;
east wri te afi t arare .

N eta — W hen th e letter w i th an anu sw ar over i t, or that followed

by a d ou ble letter, i s n ot p r onou nee d f or ci bly, i t does n o t becom e l ong ;
as a s ; i f s ; i n ". écfl 5 am . .

5 6 8 7 . R hym e fo r m s an e sse nti al el em e nt of M arath i ver

s i fi cati on , an d th e followi n g ve rse is an exam l e of it

p

“ W mu m m .

st ns vrm n srfi afi a error .

N ote — T h e termi nati ng syl labl es o f al l th e fou r members of the

verse so und al i ke . T he t ermi nat i ng l etters mu st be of th e sa me organ .
 § 6 9 9 ] P R I N C I P L ES or V E R S I P I C A rI o N
'
. 363

6 88 . Syl labi fi cati on i s e ss e nti al to some k i nds of ve rsi fi

cati o n , s u ch as l
s okas, &c . I n th e fol lowi ng verse all th e
m e m bers corres po n d in t he n u m ber o f thei r syllabl es , al th o u
g h
th ey do n o t all rh me wi th each oth er
y
uh 552
1 1 11
3 ! fi rm?In 5 5 sy llabl es .

W TW u g zs r fswrm n 5 5

6 89 . A co mbi n ati o n of th e s yl lable s , ei th er accordi n g to

th ei r n u m ber , o r t he i r leng th y) (q u an ti t for m s a i n or foot .

W h en the s
y ll abl es are com bi n e d accor di n
g to th e i r n u mber,

th ey m ak e wh at may b e calle d a syl la bi c foo t, an d whe n th ey

a r e co m bi ned a ccor di n
g to th ei r leng th, th ey m ak e a n on

s y l la bi c foot .

6 90 A syllab i c foo t i s co m o se d of th ree sun: o r sy l

.
p
labl es, an d the th re e syl labl e s m ay or m ay n o t va r y i n len g t h
t hu s mm i s a S
y l labi c fo ot .

T he syl lables com posi ng a syllabi c fo o t may be t h us arranged

N ol e —

acco rdi ng to t hei r q

u an ti ty

W ;m ‘ mam
‘ ‘
v v v
G R l
T hu s ther e are ei g ht classes of t he sy llabi c feet, e ach of wh i ch i s na med
by t he i ni ti a l lette r of th e abo ve wo rds . T h u s n deno tes the foot
m t denotes t he foot t fi qam
‘
or v v and so o n .

9 - l labi c foot, w h i ch i s me asu re d b h e len th

5 6 1 A n o n .sy y t g
of th e s l labl e s w h i ch com p o se i t, co nsi s ts of four m a tr é s , as
y
i f WT i i 4 .

N o te — T n -
he no s vll abi c feet ar e di vi ded i nto fi ve classes, acco rdi ng

to th e p os i ti on an d q ua nti ty of t he s
y ll a bles of whi ch th ey
"
co nsi st.

i
'

fi fflfi si f ? f t?
'

T hu s , i5 1 4; r= 4 t f? if “ 4 T he
sr
“

: i = .

class es are na med by the i ni ti al l ett ers of th ese words T h us, I !deno tes .

h r 1? denotes firfifi i or v v and so on .

6 92 ,
T h e fe e t mak e a c m or W a di st i ch , a nd a ver s e

con si st s o f two or m o re di sti ch s T h u s .

m fi fi ér m fifi m fi m
‘
l s fi u

N ole .
— I n t hi s verse there are fou r di sti ch s, and each di sti ch contai ns
3 64 VA R I ET I E S or vs ns rrrc a ru m '
. 6 93

ni n e syllables, i . e. th ree syllabi c feet, and fou rteen m atrss, i . e . th ree

and -
a half non s llabi c feet T h h f-
l letters are not reck oned
y e a .
.

-
N ola Each di sti ch i s usuall marked o ff b two p erp endi cu l a r
y y
n

l i nes, put at the e nd of it . T hus 1

§ 6 93 . T h e di sti chs ar e arr an

g e d i n to li nes calle d sn i
'

halve s . T h us

“ W am r a mm fi rw n
‘
mm un fl rm l ai m ftaw ffl ar n ’

6 94 . T he a cce n t m ark s e d a s e cti o n of t h e ve rs e whe r e

there i s a s li
g ht au e m ad e in r ea d i ng i
or s n g ng . i T h us
p s

mm s! fl ai r n s ta t e m g zw fi wmr n
W fim i r '
m afi afl ll m u fi w m n
N ol e .
— T he accen t fa lls here o n eve ry fi ft h s vllable .

83
'
N ote .
— A di sti ch i s a di vi si on of the verses accordi ng to t h e

sens e as wel l as th e arrangement o f the f ee t , whi le t he accent does no t

mark off cla uses ; it si mply i ndi cates th e p lace whe re a pause sh ou l d
be m ade i n readi ng T he s ll abl e o n wh i ch t he accent falls o ugh t t o
.
y
fi ni sh th e wor d .

JH A P T ER XXX I I .

T H E V A R I ET I ES or M A R A T H I V E R S I FI C A T ION .

§ 6 95 7 06 .

6 95 . ath i poetry i s di vi de d i n to se ve ral classes ,

T he M ar
r

the pri n ci pal of whi ch are th e f i ryé s, the rSlolras , th e P arlas ,

'

th e S é k i s , th e D i n drs, th e Ot i s, an d th e A bha n gs
’

T he l
f ryé ( st ru t) .

6 96 . T he A ry zi ve rse i s whol ly rec k o n ed by the q u an t i fy

o f i ts s
y ll able s . It c o n s s ts o f
i f e ar di sti chs an d two li nes .
 366 vn nmr ms o r V E R S I F I C A T I ON . 7 00
'

the same sy llabl e

T h e di s ti chs of a s l oha m ay be com p o se d o f
.

fro m on e to any n u m be r of sy llabl es, an d may t k e any var i e t y

a
o f feet T he followi n g are a fe w speci men s o f S lo kas
.

( )
1

aarm
f i n l gzw fi m u

W W W
’

II QE I N

N to e — T h e d i sti chs are co m

p osed o f fi ve s
y ll abl e s each , a n d
rh m e by pai rs
y .

( h i nt ?
i ml wu
nm n
w m s ft w ’
u
si azaw m ll tq rm i m n

N ote T h e di sti ch s are co m po s e d o f e i g h t sy llables ,

— and th e
a cce n t fall s u o n e ve ry fo u rth s l la b le
p y .

‘
W fi fi w m fi m m m i
'

i at ll gr sfe ra t z u

m w m a fi r efi u fi sfl fi w m " w
N ote —
T he di s ti ch s are co m osed o f e le ve n s l la ble s e a c h
p y .

(4 )
at wfi m am fi m n mmfi w am efi w a u
fi m am fi fi fi ufi fi wfit m fi fi r fi n

N ote —
T h e di s t i chs ar e co m os e d o f
p 13 s
y l l abl e s e ach an d

th e accen t fal ls u
p on th e thi r rl and th e ten th s
y ll abl es .

( )
5

m W m m m qrt
‘

fi aré u
’

t ra u a ar
‘
W fi fi s fi at wfii é h ah fl a é g rfi wfi u

m h wfi w m afi m mfi u

i m at mm afi m am m fl wfi
N ote — Each di sti ch i
co n ta n s 23 s
y ll ab les , an d the accen t

fal ls u o n t h e 6 th , 6 th, 6 th , an d 5 th sy llable s

p .

T he P a das (W )
7 00 . T he P a da i s a s tan za, com pose d o f se veral li nes,
calle d kad ven s , th e fi r s t li n e of w h i ch i s r epea ted a t the en d of
3 68 V A R I ET I ES or V ER S I F I C A T I O N .

(I .
) A Di ndi ; composed of two di sti ch s

m i ra i m W ew m fia m m m u w
m m m lm m m n qu
I
( )L A Di ndi composed of fou r di sti ch s

m m ém ufl m fi tfi mi u
'
wtgfl é mfi rl ‘
'

ri l

m m fi a ami m m m mfl m afi w gm m n
T he () rz afl fl
'

g 7 03 . T hi s ve rse i s determi ned n ei ther by the quan ti ty no r

the n u mber of i ts syllabl e s I t i s composed of fou r di sti chs th e

.

fi rst th ree o f wh i ch rh m e wi th e ach other , whi l e th e l a st doe s

y
n ot . I t does n ot di ffer mu ch , i n con stru cti on , from p rose , and

i s empl oy ed i n the composi ti on o f narrati ve

p oe ms T h us
.

( )
1
ita m h as ni t i n? f r s t! i
m u
it m m ll m m II M u ku nd ar éya .

( )
2
‘
a ra si m fi u m aw fi r afi fi
'

ar u
'

a m in arm fl r
fi n
’

é s t-a
'

t li t
s D nyéndeva .

3
()
W E m i nstea mm man
a a ff i r]? m ll 3 G !a a un fi
? “
t II M u ktes wa r .

T he A bha n g m
( i t)
t

7 04 . T h e A bhan g verse h as two or four di sti ch s , an d each

di sti ch con tai n s a cer ta i n n um ber o f sy l lables . Someti m es two

short yll abl e s s are p ut for on e lon g on e .

7 05 . W h en th e A bh an g verse con si sts of f ou r di s ti chs ,

th e fi rst three h ave si x syll ables each , an d the fou rth h as four .

T hu s,
4 1m " w fi é mfi
‘
m ul t
mitm
t "ed i aa
3 r nm u

fi rth s i steru m afi a n w ere as us m m‘

t uau
am m m r u «h ar m "3 3 m m" m fi ll i l l
T a k hr am .

N ote . T he
— se con d an d t h i rd di sti ch s rh ym e wi th each o th er.
3 70 P EC ULI A R PO ET I C A L ro ams. 71 1

m for m fi m .
— l l aman
7 .

fi m ( for M ) M W W fi
M u ktes war .

su m it m if m for m W .
— T u hé r dm .

Someti mes an i s chang ed to Q

‘

W W W fi .
— T nké rdm .

3 51 13 ?
51 5? mm ,
fl
'

fi .
— Dnyénadev .

A r mori vss .

7 11 . T he A d j ecti ves are someti mes put i n the sa me case

wi th the n oun whi ch they q ual i f

y

an am? at? a n e w a
rrt -
itm .
— M or0p ant .

712 . Ad j ecti ves en di n

g i n at are someti mes in fl ected li k e
th e ad ecti ves
j i n an

3 “ W W l
E l “ afi W .
— T ukdr dm .

7 13 . T he j
ad ecti ves are free ly compare d , as i n S ansk ri t,
wi th the parti cles of co mpari s on 5 20, N ote)

m fitfit fi r, w
art ere ! er M or op an t m m .
—
.

fi rg w SW
z as M 3 fi t! a?wi t arth
e — M oro ant
p , .

P uonouus .

714 . T he personal pronou ns as sume vari o us forms i n

poe try
N am . i
t T hen P lural
A cc .
q
I ns tr .
gar, a t, at
B ut fil m
m q fi
‘
. 8
, , , i a, a

A bl .

Gen “
m ; W w
(L an d t fl are u sed i n th e accu sati ve
m -
i h a
r
t ft um .

715 T he dem onstrati ve fe mi ni ne pron ou ns ( l an d i ll ,

.

an d th e relati ve i f, assu m e the forms 3 , a, an d 5!resp ec ti vely;

an d th e c r u de -
form s w and m , become W an d m .
 7 17] PEC ULI A R P OET I OA I. ro a s m . 3 71

m it i f mm , i t it m utt .
— R é mda s
m m m a s?s w m w e m — T uker em ,
. .

R W fl r fis fi fi v fi fl a t fi art m Waman
’

n fi —
.

716 T he fo rms am m
.
m and W are Opti onal l
, y , ,

chan ed to at slur hm an d $ 3
g i , 7 i f ! wh o,i s cha n g e d to as" .
, .

W ” m
‘ — Wanna?»
W Qfi W R EEL ,

T he crude- fo rm m of 551 1 what ? i s ch a ng ed to m .

m m aw m fit m
, , wri tgm a mM m — T e kerem , .

T he wo rd { at occ urs i n th e forms q t and Q s :

'

{It‘ll W W W 3 R 6 G13 ? m t ali T nkei rdm

'
'
— .
.
,

i n: sam e w t an was i f mm — M u km war

, , . . .

N ata — Some ti m es pure Sansk ri t forms are us ed for i n

stance, n for arm mi ne, a! for
a thi ne
“

m .

T a n Vane .

71 7 . T he past habi tual forms are usually employed fo r

all the j
forms o f con ugati on, present, past , an d fut ure
l st Conj ug ati on . 2nd C onj ugati on .

fi si ng .
W ai pl u .
it 513, “ Ti f f i ts :
2 .
i m w a“ i m : w m
3 . i nfini te? a, m , 1fi , m an i mal“ ,
i s W i l l? m
I mp era ti ve .

i ai fi :
P l uper/ect P a rti ci p le .

«i n , «as «gmeg , or aa mt m , m , m
N ata — T h e g er und i s u sually e mpl oy e d for the i mperati ve
or th e j
s ub u ncti ve

ar
m ar fi a
W m brat (
rar i ty — T u laér ém .

N ot .
e — Someti m es the secon d si ng u lar and th i rd i ndi cati ve

pl ural forms assum e R! and fi reapecti vely ,

'
m m .

N ote —
So me ti mes th e root i s pu t for th e th i rd person si n

g ul ar

m i f 3 3 (at) fli t — T ukdra m
’
.

"
I n the pas t secon d person plu ral Elli
N ote — and it ?! are

someti mes s ubsti tut e d for at

3 72 rac e me s PO ET I C A L r o ams . 718

m mm m w afi m m fi

N ote S om e ve r bs as s u m e ec uli ar forms i n the past ten s e

.
p
emi t for awai t (S k . mm , are ) went
m fo r m laug he d .

-T he future te rmi nati ons i n Q ’

an d f are i ndi scri mi nat e l y

$ 31 t ri fle; (for ( M a ) fi rm — Ehnath .

fi
{ W W
' ‘
fl W w .
— S ri dhar .

N ote — A s the base of the s eco nd j

co n u ati o n
g i s made up

wi th i
‘
, so i n p oe try th e base of the fi rs t con u j g ati on i s form e d

71 8 . Pas si ve form s made p wi th

u { i t or fi (Sk at ) . a re

u s e d o fte n i n po e try , bo th acti vely an d pas si vely T h ey . a re

co n u ate d
th us j g
P R ES EN T T EN S E .

Karta ri C ons tru cti on .

S i ng u l ar . P lural .

‘
fi
'
m -i
fr io

2 i mffi fi m
” e m ‘
-
f is
d W fi ffi fi l
-
.

-
6 rmi s? , eff f ,
- m
‘
fir é r , ,
a m n . . . th an at Es ta e

B h ave C ons tr ucti on .

P A S T T e ns e .

Ka r ma ni Cons tr ucti o n .

ar
r sui t a ffi r m en em a
—

i fi aafi f ata - ?
'

1 . rats F .l . s at FF
 A P P ENDI X . 3 75

N or a B .

P arsi ng .

(l ) d i fl l fi ll R avj i comes every day

‘
an
'
.

t wflfl i s a o rper nou n of the l st declensi on, (but decl i ned

'

p
i rre g ul arly, ) 3 rd s i n g ular masculi n e, and i n the no mi nati ve

case, bei ng nomi nati ve to an] .

i h ri s an adverb modi fyi ng fl .

i i i 1 8 an i rreg ular i ntransi ti ve verb of the 1 8 15 j

con ug ati on,

p res ent i ndi cat i ve , the 3 rd si ng ular masculi ne, and bei ng i n
ag re e mout wi th the nomi nati ve , i s i n the s ubjecti ve constructi on .

2
() m afi y o u sh oul d come .

an i s a rs o nal 2nd si ng ular,

ro noun , and i n th e i nstru
pe p
m ental case of ag en cy, bei ng nomi nati ve to mi .

qfi ‘
is an i rreg ular i ntransi ti ve ver b of the l at j
con ug ati on,

p resent sub ecti ve, j the 3 rd si ng ular n e uter, and i s i n the neuter

constr ucti on, as i t does not ag ree wi th i ts n o mi nati ve W

( ) t ri
3 m m m Rag h obareads a book .

tr i m? i s a p p
ro er n oun of the l st declensi on, (but de cli ned

i rre g ularly, ) 3 td s i n g u lar mascu li ne, and i n the nomi nati ve

cas e, bei ng n o mi nati ve to m .

m is a co mmon nou n of the 2nd declensi on, 3 rd si n ular

g
n eu ter, and i n the accusati ve case, g over ned by m .

m i s a reg ular transi ti ve verb of the 2n d conj ugati on, 3 rd

si ng ul ar masculi ne, presen t i n di cati ve, and, bei ng i n ag reement
wi th i ts nomi nati ve m
i s i n the subj ecti ve constructi on .

( ) flfi
4 i m w h en
w
s sh e cut th e man g o .

a} is a p e rsonal p ron oun , 3 rd si ngular femi nin e, an d is i n

the i ntrumental case of agency, bei ng nomi nati ve to W
3 76 A P PENDI X .

s im i s
w a co mmon n o un of the l s t decle nsi on , the 3 rd s i ng u lar
m ascu li n e, an d i s i n the acc usati ve case, g o verned by mfi a r.
' '

m is a reg ular transi ti ve verb of the 2nd con j u

g at i o n, 3 rd
si n g u lar mas culi ne , ofthe pas t i ndi cati ve, and, ag reei n
g w i t h
i ts o b e ct, j i s i n t he j
ob e cti ve con stru cti on .

( )
5 m m mi : as : do not beat that chi ld .

an is a dem on strati ve pro noun i n th e crude fo rm, j oi ned to

m is a comm on noun of the 3 rd decl ensi on (but i rre g u

larly dec l i ne d) , the 3 rd s i ng ular m ascul i n e , and i s i n the dat i v e

case , be i n g th e di rect ob ect to art aah j .

qrc fi is ul ar trans i ti ve ve rb of the n eg ati ve fo rm , zu d

'

az a re
g
si ngu l ar of the prese nt i m perat i ve, an d, a ree i n
g g wi th t h e
n omi nati ve i th ou u nder s tood, i s i n the su b j e cti ve co nstru cti o n .

()W
6 Wfi fi W Y am ani u n l oose d me .

war i s a p ers onal p 1 s t s i n ul ar masc uli n e ,

ro no u n,
g an d is i n
the dati ve cas e , bei ng di re ct ob ect to j m .

m flfi r n o u n of
'

z
'
e is a p ro
pe the l st decl ensi o n , of th e 3 t d
s i n g u l ar fe mi ni ne, of th e i n s tru me ntal cas e o f a e n c , an d is
g y
nomi n ati ve to W .

W is a reg ular tran si ti ve ve rb of the 2nd j

co n u g ati on , th e

past i n di cati ve, 3 rd si ng ular, an d bei n g i n the n eu ter cons tr u c

ti o n, i s of t he n e uter g en de r, a nd does not ag ree ei ther W i th t h e
j
s ub ect or th e j
ob ect .

7
( ) i ll P
WW { N
E firi t? he wi ll ari se as soon as sh e cal ls

ou t t o hi m .

(fl i s a p ersonal
“

pron oun , be i n g no m i nati ve absol u

te by reaso n
of the follo wi ng parti ci ple m .

m is a.
p e rson al
p ro n o u n , an d i s i n the dati ve case , bei ng
j
o b ec t to elm q u i ll“
.

ch
“
t artt -
i is
th e prese nt parti ci pl e of the com ou nd verb t
p im
m , j
bei n g oi n ed to i f} .
 NOTICES OF TH E GRAM M AR .

Op i n i o n s on th e F i r st Ed i t i o n .

Of th e Sansk r
al l i t i c lang uages of H i nd u s tan M arath i I S th e most d i ffi cu l t
.

o n acco u n t of the vari ety of i ts g rammat i cal fo rm s , i ts i di om ati c ph ras eo l og y .

an d th e ri ch n ess of i ts vocabu lary W e sh o u ld , th erefore, natu ral ly e xpect a

.

g ra mmari an t o h ave end eavou red to si m pl i fy as m uch as poss i le th e i n t ro du c b

t i on to th e g ram mar o f t hat l ang uag e an d t o p resen t to th e s tud ent on ly i ts
.

m ost es sen ti al and ch aracte ri s ti c featu res I n th i s res pect we h ave al way s co n
.

s i de re d S te ven son s G ram m ar wh i ch has fo r m an y y ears been th e pri nci pal

’
.

g u i d e to M arathi , as a si g nal fai l u re an d w e s h ou l d only account fo r th e fact

.

o f i ts h avi ng g on e th rou g h fou r e di ti on s f rom the anal ogy of th e Eto n L ati n

G rammar, and si mi lar medi aeval i n sti tu ti on s wh i ch h ave stu rdil y k ep t t hei r
.

ro u n d i n th e face of i nfi n i te l y su peri or work s by M ad vi g and o th ers A far

g
m ore am bi ti ous g rammar t h an the el em en tary book just n oti ced [M n B el lai rs
’

G rammar h as , si m u l tan eousl y wi th i t appeared at B om bay , u n der th e t i tle

}
.

T he S tu( en t s M anu al of M arath i G ram mar C haracte ri sed by th e same

’ ’
.

l u ci di ty as th e fo rmer, bu t arrang e d on a m o re com preh ensi ve plan , i t s h o ws on

e very pag e tha t i ts an on y m ou s au th or h as s oug h t to ap p l y i n i t th e m eth o d
f ol lowed i n the mos t recen t i n vesti g ati ons on C omparati ve G rammar T houg h .

i n tended fo r p racti cal pu r poses only , i t i s cal culate d to p rove of g reat servi ce
q
a lso to th e sci en ti fi c i n u i rer i n to t h e ch aracter of th e lang uag e of wh i ch i t
Tr i i bner s L i t er a r y R ecord
” ’
'

t reats .
f
.

W e h ave m u ch pl eas u re i n d i rect i ng th e atte n ti on of s tudents of M arathi

t o a new g ramm ar of th e l ang u ag e, pu bl i sh e d by a N a t i ve s ch ol ar I t supp l i es .

a des i d erat u m l on g fel t by E u ropean stu de n ts of M ara th i , w h o have h i t herto h ad

n o o th e r b oo k fo r th ei r g u i d a n c e th a n t h e wo rk of Dr S t e v en so n T h e M an u al
. .

h as h i g her clai m s th an th at of bei n g an el em e n tary trea ti se on M arathi G rammar .

I t i s t h e most sci enti fi c an d cri ti cal g rammar of an I ndi an vern ac ular we

h ave seen , and th rows mu ch li g h t o n the ori g i n of th e vocabl es , i nflec ti o ns , and
v ari ou s oth er po i n ts rel ati n g to th e s tructu re of M ara th i an d oth er cog nate

l an guag es b
T h e ook i s m ai n l y deS i g ne d fo r those prepai i ng for M atri culati on ,
-
.

for whom i t appears t o b e w e l l su i te d — T he T i mes of I nd i a

. .

Upon the w h ol e w e t hi n k t he M an u a l i s we ll -
fi tted for i n tro ducti o n as a
- b
text ook i n to t he H i g h Sc h oo ls — T he B o m ba
.
y E d uc a t i ona l R ec ord .

I th at I th i n k i t i s credi tabl e to t he au th or and I have no do u t

repeat . b
that i t W i ll be f ou nd u sef ul bo th to ad vanced N ati ve stud en ts and to Euro pea n
studen ts of M a rat — M aj or T homa s C a nd y, M arathi T rans lator to the
Go rernnwnt Edu cati onal Dep art ment .

I amg lad to fi n d th at M r N aval kar i s abo u t to

.
p u bl i sh a re vi sed and

i mproved e di ti on of h i s e xcel l en t M arathi G ram mar, wh i ch has al ready f ound

much acceptan ce i n W es tern I nd i a and el sewh ere I h ave no do ubt that t he .

new ed i t i o n o f h i s work w i ll p rove a val uabl e acq ui si t i o n bo th to t h os e co m

me nci ng th e study of M arath i , and to th ose who already mak e free use of that
l an g uag e T h e j uncti on o f bo th parts of the work i n one vol ume i s a con
.

ven i ent arrang emen t — R e c Dr W i l son, D J )

. . . .